Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

‘Jimin-ah, wake up!’

There’s a loud knocking on the door. Jimin slowly opens his eyes, with a terrible case of bed hair. He rubs his eyes and tries to block out the loud banging on his bedroom door. Suddenly it stops and Jimin lays back down with a deep sigh, to go back to sleep.

‘Jimin-ah! I'm serious! I need your help!’, Tae’s voice cuts the silence once again. ‘What!?’, Jimin shouts in frustration and throws his pillow towards the door. Meanwhile, Taehyung opened the door, meaning the pillow hit him right in the face. He softly touches his cheeks and looks with played hurt in his eyes at Jimin who couldn’t care less.

‘What?’, he asks again. ‘You really need to help me out Jiminie’, Taehyung scurries to his bed and drops on his knees. ‘I forgot I had a project due today, so I don’t have enough photos. My professor is going to kill me. I already hear her; "This time I can’t overlook it, Mr. Kim”. The subject is portraits and...’, Taehyung rambles on not even taking a breath between sentences. Jimin rubs his eyes, realizing where his friend is going with this rant. He put his hand to Taehyung’s face to shut him up and grabs his phone, squinting at the bright light of his screen. ‘What the... it’s 4 fucking 30 in the morning! Are you serious?!’, Jimin growls. Taehyung drops his head and mumbles: ‘I know, but it’s my first class in the morning’. Taehyung crawls onto the bed and looks at Jimin with pleading eyes. Another sigh comes from Jimin: ‘Okay, … on one condition. Taehyung lifts his head up waiting for him to continue. A small smile forms on Jimin’s lips when he says: ’You give me one of your Jungkook photocards’. Taehyung looks with shock and betrayal at his best friend. It seems like he is really debating if one photocard is more important than not failing one of his classes. After a long silence, Taehyung drops his head onto the sheets and utters a muffled agreement. ‘Okay, … just give me a minute', he says while getting out of bed. Taehyung exits his room sending a bunch of flying kisses. Jimin scowls and mutters: ‘brat’, under his breath.

‘So, what do you want me to do actually?’.

The two friends are in the park close to their apartment. The wind is blowing strong and Jimin and Taehyung, who are bundled up really well, sip on their coffees that the latter made as another apology. Taehyung looks around the park and points at a bench indicating for Jimin to sit there. Jimin hands his cup to Taehyung, who puts it on the ground. He gets his camera and starts taking pictures of Jimin from different angles. He gives him directions for his expressions and sitting positions. After a while, Taehyung checks his camera with a big smile and declares that the shoot is done.

While walking back to their apartment, Taehyung grabs Jimin’s arm and puts his head on his shoulder: ‘Thanks again for helping me out Jiminie. I seriously don’t know what to do without you’. Jimin smiles softly and puts his head on Taehyung’s. ‘That’s what soulmates are for’, they enter the building leaving the cold behind.

-

Jimin slowly opens his eyes, ‘No more dream’ by BTS blaring from his phone. He lets his alarm play a bit longer while he stretches his whole body, kicking his blankets to the end of his bed. 2 hours, 2 little hours he slept after they arrived back. Taehyung rushed to edit the pictures for his first class, while Jimin fell back in bed. He had classes in the afternoon and then 2 hours of dance practice, so hey, why not sleep a little bit more.

You know those 2 hours of dance practice? Well, they turned in 3 hours thanks to his coach. Sooyeon urged Jimin to try the whole dance, again and again, saying that he kept making little mistakes. Jimin knows well enough that they weren’t little mistakes, but just Sooyeon being a perfectionist. He didn’t really bother because he too can be a perfectionist and was glad to see a happy expression on his coaches' face at the end.

So, know that practice is over, Jimin drags his whole body back home craving the food waiting for him in the fridge. ‘you back?’, comes from Taehyungs room just as he closes the front door. Jimin hums in response.

‘What!?’

’Nothing!’

Jimin opens the fridge taking the leftover Bibim Gooksu from yesterday out. Just as he is about to take the first bite, a figure drops on the chair in front of him. A big smile plastered on Taehyung's face makes Jimin suddenly really suspicious. He takes a bite, and while slowly chewing he looks his best friend in the eyes, seeing the mischief playing in them. ‘What is it now?’, he finally asks. This is what Taehyung was waiting for as he starts his speech. ‘You know the way to the darkrooms, right? Well, I was walking through that hallway. Oh, I saw Su-min, she says hey by the way-… and while I was walking, I saw a poster with a very familiar logo’. It seems as Taehyung expects a response, but Jimin just makes a motion with his chopsticks for him to move on. Taehyung pouts for a second and resumes: 'Well, I saw the logo and got intrigued so decide to look closer’. He fumbles his phone out of his pocket to show him something. ‘-and holy shit Minnie, look!’. He takes the phone in his own hands to read it and Taehyung was right. Holy shit!

On the phone screen shines a blurry picture of what seems to be a flyer. He zooms in and sees that it’s a contest to win a meet and greet with the members of BTS, their favourite K-pop group. Holy shit, holy shit, holy shit! Jimin looks up and opens his mouths but can’t find the words. Taehyungs raises his eyebrow. ‘Tae, we have to win this!’.

And so they begin to fill in their information and sent it in. Jimin wonders if this flyer was supposed to be hung in a university hallway full of young adults. He worries that the contest is targeted to a younger public and that they might steal this great opportunity from someone younger. But Taehyung quickly convinces him that they too have the right to participate and hopefully win.

-

It’s been weeks since they sent in their application form, but no news yet. They check every day if the winners have been announced but everything is quiet.

But life did not stop. It's Jimin and Taehyung’s last year and finals are nearing. Books are their only friends right now and they both regret it. Because Jimin has his dance practice and he also has to teach his own dance classes to both children and young adults. Even though he was able to move his dance practices to 9 o’clock, the lessons are fixed.

This means that his periods for studying are spread throughout the day. Jimin makes a special effort to wake up at 4 am in order to get some studying done before leaving for to the dance studio at 8:45, leaving the studio at 12am. Luckily their apartment is a 15 minutes’ walk from the dance studio. He studies a few hours more until he has to leave again to go teach his kids. He teaches the kids on Monday and Thursday; the young adults on Monday, Tuesday, and Saturday at 8 pm. After the lesson, he studies for 3 to 4 more hours. It’s a tough scheme but not too much sleep depriving.

Jimin knows how important it is to be well-nourished, he just can’t be bothered. Instant noodles and take-out become their main sources of nutrition. Most of the time Jimin is so deep in his books he forgets to eat lunch or dinner or anything at all. Unfortunately, Taehyung is not there for him in this period of time to drag Jimin out of his room to force-feed him a meal, as he himself is also very busy studying and working on his end project. Also Taehyung has a part-time job in order to pay his part of the rent for their apartment: he is a waiter at a small café nearby. As Taehyung also likes dancing, he takes Jimin’s young adult hip-hop classes on Monday and Friday.

-

On a lazy Sunday afternoon, they lounge on the couch, limbs intertwined, and talk about RM’s latest vlive where he might have spoiled a possible comeback. In the background plays the first episode of a – what Taehyung thinks is an over-hyped – K-drama. The boys don’t really follow as they excitedly theorize about what might be the concept for the next comeback, and what not. There is a slight disagreement about some BTS trivia and Jimin decides to look it up because he is quite sure he is on the right end of this futile argument.

When Jimin unlocks his phone his determination to prove Taehyung wrong disappears, as he sees that he has a message. And who the hell would message him. Taehyung is sitting right beside him and he doesn’t have that stupid grin on his face he always has when he sent Jimin some idiotic meme. So, it can’t be him. ‘Oh God’, Jimin thinks, 'please don’t let it be that asshole from dance history begging for my notes’. He opens his messages and sees that it is from an unknown number. It’s a lengthy message and he starts tapping Taehyung on the leg when he reads it. How further he gets in the message, how more rapidly the tapping becomes. This causes him to receive a kick against his shoulder by an annoyed Taehyung who already asked ‘what?’ a million times.

Jimin gets on his knees in the couch and grabs Taehyung's collar. ‘We won! We won!’, he exclaims with a big smile. Taehyung's eyes widen. ‘No fucking way!’, a high pitch comes out of his friend's mouth. Jimin flings himself into his open arms. Losing balance, they both topple over onto the ground. This doesn’t stop them from celebrating, because they start rolling over each other on the floor. Exhausted, Taehyung ends on top. ‘We won!’, he shouts. Out of nowhere he grabs Jimin and starts kissing him all over the face. Jimin loudly protests and when he is able to push away his friend (who is acting like an over-excited puppy, he rubs his face with a disgusted expression. ‘I love you Tae, but that’s a bit too much.', 'I'm sorry. I’m just so happy’. Taehyung rolls off Jimin. They both lie still, staring at the ceiling. Jimin still can’t believe it, but he whispers:’ Me too’.

That night he can’t sleep. But who cares? Jimin is going to meet his idols, the people who helped him through so much.

Chapter Text

Today is the day of the meet & greet. Jimin is looking at himself in the mirror, making sure that every little detail of his outfit is perfect. Today is the day that they are going to meet BTS and both boys put a lot of effort into their appearance, joking that they hope to have a Y/N moment.  

 Jimin leaves his room and sees Taehyung lying on the couch busy making a dozen of selcas. When he spots Jimin he jumps up and twirls around. ‘what do you think?’, he asks with his typical boxy smile. Jimin can’t lie, his friend looks gorgeous. He wears a simple brown sweater tucked into plaid pants with a small silver necklace. The strands of his black perm almost covering his eyes give him the most innocent look, which Jimin knows is misleading as he knows what a devil his friend can be. ‘Tae, you’re going to kill them’. Taehyung picks at Jimin’s shirt: 'Can say the same about you, Minnie’. Jimin’s outfit consists of a mustard-yellow and white striped blouse with black accents and black skinny jeans. Thin silver bracelets hanging around his wrists and silver earrings dangling from his ears. His dark brown hair is parted at the middle with very subtle waves in it. Just as Taehyung he is wearing slacks but his are black instead of brown. Both are ready; they take their coats and head out. look, which Jimin knows is misleading as he knows what a devil his friend can be. ‘Tae, you’re going to kill them’. Taehyung picks at Jimin’s shirt: 'Can say the same about you, Minnie’. Jimin’s outfit consists of a mustard-yellow and white striped blouse with black accents and black skinny jeans. Thin silver bracelets hanging around his wrists and silver earrings dangling from his ears. His dark brown hair is parted at the middle with very subtle waves in it. Just as Taehyung he is wearing slacks but his are black instead of brown. They both are ready; they take their coats and head out.

For as they are both tired college-students they both are broke and have no car. So the subway will do.  

 The center of Seoul is busy and Jimin and Taehyung get lost multiple times. How, they don’t know but they end up in a very sketchy ally and when they see an old man stumble towards them, they start running back.

Jimin nervously looks at the directions they have been given by BigHit and then at the time on his phone. ‘Tae we have to hurry! We are going to be late! I don’t want to be late!’, Jimin’s voice increasing in pitch with every sentence. ‘Don’t you think I don’t know that Jimin!’, Taehyung tries to stay calm but the annoyance in his voice is very clear. He looks around: 'There! Let's ask them’, Tae points at a group of giggling high school girls. Jimin looks at them: ‘Shouldn’t they be at school?’, ‘Does that really matter?’. Taehyung grabs Jimin by the wrist as they make their way to the group. ‘Hi, sorry to bother you but can we ask a question?’, Taehyung starts, being his most charismatic. The girls start giggling and turning to each other. ‘Sure, what’s up’, the tallest of them answers. Jimin is a bit startled by how casual the obviously younger girl is speaking to them. He thinks it is a bit rude but he smiles because, damn, he really wants to find the BigHit building.  ‘Do you know where this is?’, Taehyung grabs Jimin’s phone out of his hands to show the girls the address. ‘Oh, that’s easy...’, she starts explaining, and her friends keep giggling. Jimin catches the eyes of one of the girls, who gets so red a tomato is nothing against it. ‘cute’, Jimin thinks as he unintentionally smiles. This makes the others in the group give her a few playful shoves. It seems that the girl finished her explanation because Taehyung bows to her in gratitude and grabs Jimin’s wrist again. Before he gets pulled away, again, he too bows to them.

 ‘She said it’s just a few blocks away’, they are speed walking now. Jimin checks his phone: 'Shit! Tae I hope she means it’s close because we’re almost late’. ‘Fucking shi-’, Taehyung grabs Jimin by the wrist – again – and starts sprinting, pulling Jimin behind him. ‘I swear to god, stop dragging me! I’m not an-’, Jimin starts ranting but is forced to stop as he in full force bumps into Taehyung’s back. His friend has come to a stop and is now out of breath smiling, looking up at a building. 

~*~

As they go inside a dozen employees turn their heads, questioning what business these two boys have at BigHit. Several bodyguards who are scattered across the lobby tense a little. The boys, intimidated by all the attention, make their way to the front desk. ‘Hello, we are the winners of the contest of the- Uhm... of the- of the meet & greet’, Jimin takes the lead now, nervous as he is. His heart is beating fast. This is really happening; they are going to meet the members of the group where he and Taehyung have looked up to since their debut. Jimin can’t really explain the importance they have in his life and how they impacted his way of being. He remembers the nights where stress took over him, on the verge of an anxiety attack, he just put his earbuds in and listen to the masterpieces BTS had created. Or when he was working out, ‘no more dream’ almost scarring his eardrums because of how loud he played it. The idol group had a tough beginning, but their success has increased. Even though they’re so popular nowadays, the boys keep being humble. That's one of the many things Jimin and Taehyung like about them. Their music is never commercial like some other groups, they always stay authentic to themselves, which is also the message in their songs.

 The front desk clerk looks up from his computer: ‘Can I see the verification of your win please’. ‘Of course,’ Jimin smiles, taking his phone out of his pocket for the hundredth time today. The man was very handsome. You could see that the man worked out. But like for real, you could say that it was his second home or something. The white shirt he was wearing strained around his biceps which really accentuated his well-built muscles. Jimin felt heat burn his cheeks as he can’t help but smile a little. He always had a thing for buff guys. He shows the confirmation text they got to the clerk, who leaned over to check. He sits back, grabs the phone, and says: ‘Kim Yuna-ssi, the winners of the meet & greet are here’. He hangs up. He points at a few seats where they could sit while waiting for their guide. Jimin flashes a big smile, thanking the man a bit too enthusiastic.  

 ‘You really went for it there’. Taehyung teasing him, but still, Jimin couldn’t help but roll his eyes at his best friend.  

 Jimin fidgets in his chair looking around for a woman that could be their guide. He sees a woman coming towards them. Her black heels that match her silk blouse were making little clicking noises with each step she takes. Her short light brown bob sways back and forth, and it’s obvious that her red-lipped smile is meant for them. Jimin looks back at Taehyung and notices that he’s looking in awe at the small woman.

 ‘Look who’s talking’, Jimin thinks but doesn’t say it because the woman is already at their seats.

 ‘Hello boys, nice to meet you. My name is Kim Yuna and I will be your guide today’.

 Jimin and Taehyung who had gotten out of their chair both bow to her as they introduce themselves.  

 ‘First, I want to congratulate you on winning the contest, I hope you are excited about today's planning’, they both nod their heads in unison. That makes her smile as she continues: ‘Okay, we will start the tour now’. ‘Wait, what tour?’, Taehyung asks. They look at each other confused. Nowhere on the flyer or the text stood that they would get a tour of the building. They thought that they would meet BTS immediately. ‘You will get a tour of the whole building before you meet BTS. This is because of their busy schedule. Were you not informed?’, she tilts her head in question. Now they shake their heads in unison. She smiles understandably ‘Well, there is no need to worry, you will spend a long time with the boys after the tour. Follow me'. 

 She turns around and starts walking towards a hallway to the left of the front desk. In that hallway, there are three elevator doors. She stops in front of them but doesn’t press any button. Instead, she points opposite the doors. ‘Here you can see the cafeteria’. Jimin and Taehyung turn around. The cafeteria is big, the glass doors and walls show that there are a lot of people occupying the space at the moment. They enter, the guide in the lead. Inside are many small tables with at each one a brown chair and a soft-looking couch. There are also a few higher tables scattered across the room. The room is white and gives a kind of minimalistic vibe. But the brown accents and the few trinkets that stand on a shelf hanging on a white painted brick wall, give it a cozy feeling. They move to the bar located in the corner farthest away from the door they just came through.  

 ‘Do you want something to drink? And no worries it’s on the company.’

 She points at a menu hanging above the bar. Jimin decides to order an iced americano and Taehyung chooses a green tea flavored boba drink out of the many options. With their orders in hand, they make their way back to the elevators. Yuna presses on the button for floor 1 and up they go.

 The whole tour is very interesting. Yuna shows them the famous practice rooms Jimin and Taehyung know from all the dance practices they have watched. They boys get very excited when they take a look through the windows in the entrance door. She also shows them the gym, a few offices, and even the recording studios. While showing them around, she talks about the history of the company, the CEO, and of course the idols and trainees under the label. During the tour, Jimin and Taehyung see none of the people she speaks of, only a few staff members. Yuna takes the empty cups from their hands and hands the cups over to one of these staff members. 

 Finally, the tour is done. Not that they didn’t like it, on the contrary, but the prospect of meeting the members of BTS outweighs everything else.

 They enter a small room with a couch in the corner and album covers hanging on the wall. Jimin knows this place: a lot of v-lives are recorded at this place. They are told to make themselves comfortable while they wait for the BTS members. They sit down, feeling giddy at the thought that a lot of idols have sat down in this couch. Before she leaves, Yuna warns them that taking pictures of the members or the building is not allowed. She makes it quite clear that there will be consequences if those directions are not followed.

 Taehyung breaks a long-lasting silence: ‘Omg Jimin-ie, what are we going to say to them?’

 ‘What do you mean?’

 ‘Well, when they come in. Like, what do we say? Can we ask questions? I have not thought about any conversation topics.’

 It's obvious that Taehyung is freaking out and Jimin can’t blame him. He himself hadn’t thought about it either. Now that he thinks about it, how are they going to approach it? Do they wait until the boys say something or can they just start gushing to them how much they love them? Jimin takes a deep breath. He can’t freak out right now because BTS can walk in any moment.

 He puts a hand on Taehyung’s thigh. ‘Don’t worry Tae, we’re just going to see how it goes when we are in the moment’. Taehyung nods and takes a deep breath just like Jimin did a moment ago.  

 Silence falls again but now it’s more comfortable. Both just scroll around on Twitter or any other social media. In the back of Jimin’s head ideas fly around that he can talk about with BTS. He knows that he wants to talk to Yoongi about the make-off of his recent mixtape under the name of AgustD. With Jin, he sure wants to know where he gets his confidence from, and maybe ask for a few skincare tips. Because you can’t lie, this man's skin is glowing.  He wants to ask Namjoon how it is to be the leader of such a successful group. He's always amazed about his song writing skills, so he might ask to hear about that. He knew from the start that he wants to talk about dance with J-Hope. The main dancer is literally a dance machine and Jimin has seen all his dance lives multiple times and would love to get some tips to improve his skills. And Jungkook? This one is a bit difficult. He wants to ask the youngest a lot. His dance skills. His vocals. How he got this perfect body or maybe what his ideal partner is. He just hopes that he is not going to embarrass himself by blushing non-stop. Jungkook is both Jimin and Taehyung’s bias, which sometimes causes an argument because only one of them can enjoy a Y/N life with the maknae. Though Taehyung once offered a three-way relationship, which was quickly shut down by Jimin with a slap on the back of his head. This are only late-night – sometimes drunk - fantasies between two best friends. They both know where the boundaries lie with this sort of situation.

 ~*~

The door opens slowly and a head pops up. Jimin looks up from Twitter, a picture of J-Hope still on the screen. His eyes lock with the person at the door and sees the same heart-shaped mouth he was just looking at. He inhales very sharply and makes a strangled noise. Taehyung and J-Hope unintentionally laugh at the same time, which makes him snap his neck towards the door. Jimin is sure he heard a crack, but Taehyung doesn’t show any discomfort as he stands up. Not knowing what to say, he bows unnecessarily deep.

 ‘Guys! They're here.’

 Suddenly 4 other men enter the room. Jimin cannot believe what is happening. All the members are so much taller than him except for Yoongi who makes it up with his intimidating aura. Jimin’s heart is beating in his chest, he is sure the people on the other side of the room can hear it.

 Namjoon steps forward, as the leader he is, to introduce himself. And the other members follow swiftly.

 ‘Hello, I’m Park Jimin and this is my friend Kim Taehyung’.

 ‘Ah, another Kim! Nice to meet you, how are you?’, Jin comes towards them. Taehyung seems to have lost his voice as he keeps his eyes on the man coming closer. As Jin sits down on the couch he pats on the space next to him: ‘No need to keep standing. You can sit down, both of you’.

 They both sit down, awkwardly smiling. The others move forward too, taking their places. Yoongi en Namjoon grab a chair and place them before the couch. J-Hope takes a seat next to Jin. Jimin suddenly feels the place next to him sink. He looks and is met with the prettiest doe-eyes he has ever seen. The maknae had decided to claim the seat next to Jimin. He smiles kindly, his nose scrunching like a bunny. Jimin does not know what to do, he’s so drawn into the brown eyes of the boy next to him that he does not notice his mouth stands a little agape.  

‘We both go to Seoul Arts University. I follow photography and Jimin modern dance. In a few weeks, we are going to graduate. Right, Jimin-ah?’, Taehyung’s question snaps him out of his staring fest with Jungkook. They both look the other way. Jimin doe not catch Jungkook’s embarrassed neck scratch and Yoongi throwing him a questionable look. Jimin is met with friendly faces who are waiting for his answer. He quickly agrees and explains a little bit more in detail what courses he follows. ‘So you’re a dancer?’, this comes from J-Hope. Jimin nods his head: ‘Yes I’m mastering in modern dance; I have been practicing for more than 8 years. I also have a bit of history in hip-hop, but that was when I was 10. I do give some dance classes for kids and young adults, but I’m not that good honestly.’

 ‘Why do I not believe that. I bet you’re an amazing dancer no matter what style’, Yoongi suddenly speaks up. He folds his arms, intently looking at him. Jimin can’t help but shrink as he feels that the man is analyzing his every move. ‘I-… I’m really not that good’, Jimin stammers shyly. He does not dare to accept compliments from the quietest and coldest member. He knows well enough that this is just a stereotype fans have given him. Yoongi is so much more than a cold, lazy person. On the opposite, he is such a hardworking person and has such a kind and caring soul.

 ‘Jimin-ie, why don’t you show us the dance?’, ‘I- I.. no. Tae! Shut up’.

‘Oooooh... what dance?’, J-Hope intervenes.

Jimin is still sputtering his protest. His cheeks start to burn and he is sure he is becoming very red. ‘It’s really nothing. Just something for the end of the year competition at school before we graduate’, he tries to calm himself. Taehyung looks really amused at Jimin’s struggle. ‘Jimin-ah don’t be so humble. You've been practicing for three whole months right now'. A few whistles of appreciation fill the room. Jimin sends his friend a dead glare. He swears to anything that is out there, that he is going to kill Taehyung one day. He does not want to show his dance to the BTS members. What if he falls? Or makes a stupid mistake? What if he is so bad but they don’t want to hurt his feelings so they say it’s good, while it’s plainly visible that it’s bad. Very bad.

 He shakes these thoughts off. It's not a good idea to spiral down in a dark hole of self-doubt right now. He is supposed to enjoy this day. So he smoothly changes the subject.

~*~

 It has now been a whole hour since the beginning of the conversation. Jimin never expected it to go this well. There never seems to be an awkward silence where no one knows what to say. They laugh at – mostly Jin’s dad – jokes. But there are also deep and meaningful conversations. Jimin and Taehyung get to ask all of their questions. They even get an inside scoop of BigHit and a few funny stories of their training days. It really feels like they’ve known them for so long. Jimin quietly thinks that they look like a bunch of best friends. It is a bit sad that it’s only for one day.  

 One thing Jimin does notice is that Jungkook is very apprehensive to talk. Jimin is aware of his presence and feels his gaze boring holes in the back of his head. Still, he does not initiate a lot of conversation. But it’s obvious that he still enjoys this meet & greet. He laughs loudly when a joke is made, especially when it’s Jimin who makes it. He answers very seriously to the questions they ask. And every time their eyes meet, he quickly looks down. Jimin does not understand why. Jungkook has no problem keeping eye contact with his members. It is also not because Jimin is just a fan, as he has noticed that with Taehyung there seems to be no problem having a staring contest. So why does he not want to look in Jimin’s eyes? Is it because he doesn’t like Jimin? Or has he said something? Is he crossing boundaries by sometimes falling against his arm because he was laughing too much?  

 ‘Is something wrong, Jimin-ssi?’

 Jimin looks up at Namjoon. He didn’t notice that his spiralling down was clear on his face this time. Everyone looks worried, which embarrasses Jimin. He’s always able to keep his expression neutral, but it seems with the tiredness of studying and now being in the presence of these idols it is a bit more difficult to hide his emotions.

 ‘oh, nothing’s wrong. Don't worry. I was just thinking.’

 ‘Hey, I’ve been thinking about it the whole time. I really want to see you dance, Jimin-ssi'

 Jimin looks with big eyes at J-Hope. He wants to see Jimin dance. The main dancer wants to see him dance. 

 ‘okay’

 He surprises not only himself, but it seems that Taehyung didn’t expect him to agree to the proposal. Jimin is fast to regret his decision when he sees J-hope's excited face. The dancer claps in his hands as he stands up. Indicating for them to follow. They leave the room with all the albums on the wall, entering the hallway. Jimin walks behind J-Hope. His heart starts racing. Getting really anxious, he tries to take deep breathes looking at the redhead in front of him. The rest is walking behind him, and Taehyung managed to slip between them and walk next to Jimin. Jimin doesn’t notice his friend until his fingers interlock with his own, instantly calming him.

 They gather around the elevator door. J-Hope already pushed the button and now they are just awkwardly standing there, waiting. A staff member passes them and asks if there is something wrong. Namjoon is quick to reassure the employee who still persists to know where they are going. So Jin explains that they are going to the dance studio. He does not give an explanation as to why they are going there, with the contest winners nonetheless. Just as the staff member leaves, the elevator doors open. Jungkook and Yoongi are the first to get in. Jimin is about to follow but is met with Namjoon who has the same idea. They both stop in their tracks and apologies to each other. Namjoon stretches his hand for Jimin to enter first. Jimin is a bit taken aback by his charismatic smile. He bows a little as a thank you and enters the elevator, positioning himself in front of Jungkook. The elevator seems not to be made for seven people: as Jin was enters as last, he has to take a few steps back pushing the others with him. Jimin almost stumbles, but he is stopped by a broad chest. Two big hands grab his shoulders, making sure he doesn’t fall. Jimin knows who is behind him. He looks back, meeting Jungkook’s eyes, what makes his heart flutter. He can’t help but smile as he thanks the maknae of the group, who averts his eyes quickly as he mutters: 'Don't worry. Just don’t fall’.

~*~

Jimin is stretching in front of the full-length mirror before him. They finally made it to one of the studios the BigHit building has to offer. Jimin can’t help but feel watched, which in fact he is, as all the others stand at the back of the room. J-Hope makes his way to the stereo, turning it on and fumbling with some cords. He calls over Taehyung.

 ‘Jimin-ie!’

 ‘Yes?’

 ‘What song do you want?’

 Looking in the mirror he sees his friend walking towards him to ask for his phone. He stands up, as his phone is in the pocket of his jacket cast aside on the dance floor. He unlocks the phone and gives it to Taehyung, whispering quietly: ‘Put on Own it, please’.

 Taehyung grins and walks back to where J-Hope is waiting with a curious look. Jimin goes back to stretch a bit more. In the corner of his eyes, he sees that the other members are chatting in hushed voices. Jimin turns around, facing everyone. he gets in position, giving a nod to J-Hope.  

 The talking stops when the music is turned on. Jimin feels his heart pounding against his chest. But this time he can control it because now he is in his element. As he starts dancing, all the nervous energy he had and all those doubts disappear. He becomes one with the music. His moves are smooth and swift. At some points brisk. Jimin really embodies the song as he is able to not only hit every beat correctly but also to ooze beauty and sex-appeal. Nearing the end, he even is shameless enough to throw some seductive looks at his audience.

The song ends. Jimin is breathless. Not because of the exhaustion but of the sheer thought that he just performed in front of BTS. It’s awfully quiet. Then they all respectfully clap, complimenting his skills. Jin turns to Namjoon with his thumb pointing at Jimin.

‘If I was a girl...’

J-hope stalks towards him, Taehyung behind him. ‘Wow, Jimin-ssi. I didn’t know you had all that in you!’. This makes Jimin feel so good. To hear the man, he has always looked up to, complimenting his performance. Jimin is not shy this time. He smiles widely thanking him. Taehyung flies around his neck, hugging him in a death grip. Jin joins the group. Namjoon, Yoongi, and Jungkook staying behind, muttering to themselves.

Jin asks: ‘Jimin-ssi, a question. You give hip-hop lessons, right? Is there a chance you taught one of our choreographies?’

 ‘Waa, Hyung! So shameless!’, J-Hope slaps him on the chest, with a big heart-shaped smile, but turning to Jimin wanting to know the answer.

 Jimin awkwardly scratches his neck, he did not expect this question. Dancing a choreography he partially worked on is one thing, but dancing on a BTS song in front of the members themselves... Jimin isn’t sure if he dares. Taehyung gapes at him, sparkling eyes looking right in his own. Of course, Taehyung wants him to dance.  

 ‘You can do Fire’.

 ‘I? You mean we. I'm not going to this one alone’.

 Taehyung let’s go of Jimin. ‘Why would I? I can’t dance. I'm not a dancer.’, Taehyung steps back, shaking his hands in denial. ‘A photographer, yes. A caring person, yes’, he glances at Jin for a second, who stays unfaced to the comment. ‘But a dancer? No’. ‘But I thought you said that you follow Jimin-ssi's dance classes.’, Jungkook says. The other three members join the discussion when Taehyung’s commotion catches their attention. Jungkook is smiling, finding the situation extremely funny. Words tumble out of Taehyung’s mouth. Jimin looks at him with pleading eyes and a pout. That and the overall peer pressure makes Taehyung finally give in.

 So they stand in the middle of the room getting ready to perform Fire. J-hope sprints back to the stereo, excited as always. The music starts and they give it their all. And it is the most fun they had until now. The intimidating expressions from the beginning quickly changes in big smiles. To their surprise Jin decides to join them, making Jimin lose his concentration and missing a step. He quickly regains his focus, unfaced when J-hope decides to join too. The others stay at the side, hyping them up. Jungkook belts out the chorus and Yoongi even raps his parts. Namjoon joins in with the singing, which makes Taehyung burst out in laughter falling on the floor. Seeing his friend go down, Jimin can’t keep it together and throws himself on Taehyung. Forgetting for a second in who's presence they are, they giggle and snort. The music has stopped en the room is filled with everyone’s laughter as they watched these two boys gasping for air. The laughter dies down and Jimin and Taehyung quickly get up, still a bit breathless.

 ‘Well... that was interesting.

Jimin thinks he means the performance. But what Yoongi really meant is that he thinks that the dynamics between the five members and the two fans are very interesting. It feels so right.

Chapter Text

The following week passes in a blur: Jimin practices his performance every day. The first 2 hours of the morning are spent with his coach Sooyeon to perfect the techniques, and the rest of the morning he spends practicing on his own. In the last two months, Jimin has developed the habit to leave the dance studio after his last dance lesson because he needs to study for his finals by the end of the month. But with the contest coming up on Saturday, he stays at the dance studio to practice for another few hours. Sometimes Tae drags him from the dance studio, but when Tae has other activities to attend, it’s often after midnight when he returns to their shared apartment, completely drained. He’s so exhausted that he only eats leftovers from the fridge. If nothing is in there, he even skips the meal. After the eventual meal, he takes a shower, having the water as hot as he can handle to relax his stiffening muscles. Nights are very short that week but he knows that he’s getting every move right and with each day his confidence grows.

~*~

And then it’s the day of the dance contest and Jimin is getting a little nervous. He’s up early but tries not to worry too much. He limits his lunch to a protein bar and leaves for the venue. He prefers to be too early than too late.

Slowly, participants of the contest start seeping in the backstage. They are running around and getting ready for their performances. The dance contest allows for different kinds of performances: there are dance groups but also solo performances. Jimin is going to perform his solo “Own It” of Drake. While nervously waiting for his turn to hit the stage, Jimin is warming up backstage, stretching his muscles.

It started as small whispers, but rumors are getting louder: BTS J-Hope and Jungkook are spotted in the audience. Jimin gets up from the floor because he wants to see it for himself, so he shuffles to the side of the stage where dancers are grouped together to get a glance of the audience, and yes, he spots his best friend Taehyung next to two hooded boys, who could effectively by J-Hope and Jungkook. He cannot believe his eyes. Are they really here to see him perform? His heart rate picks up a beat. Jimin jumps up when his phone starts to buzz in the back pocket of his pants. It’s a message from Taehyung with a selca of the three boys showing their thumbs up. There is also the following text: “Hi Jimin-ie, look who came to cheer you on! We wish you a lot of success with your performance. Fighting! “. Jimin’s hand palms start sweating. He was already nervous, but the attendance of the two BTS members makes it even worse.

Finally, his name is called to come on stage. The audience starts clapping and whistling when he appears on stage in a blinding outfit: a black and silver striped shirt with a deep v-neck that reveals his beautiful collarbones, and tight leather pants that leave nothing to the imagination. He inhales a few times to steady his breath and heartbeat. The audience quietens. Jimin gives a small nod, and the music starts. Once Jimin starts dancing, everything around him disappears, and it's only him and the music. Jimin is the walking definition of grace, his moves so fluid and oh so delicate. All his jumps and spins and drops are in sync with the beat of the music. His shirt flutters around his chest revealing parts of his toned stomach once or twice. The whole performance is breath-taking, it oozes sex appeal and entrances the whole audience.

When the music dies, the audience gets wild. Everybody is clapping and whistling and shouting Jimin’s name. The boy knows he nailed it and he accepts the standing ovation from the crowd with a blinding smile on his face. His eyes meet the proud eyes of his coach who is seated on the front row and gives him thumbs up. Then he searches for his friends in the audience and he sees them clapping with smiles on their faces. He sends a bright smile their way and bows several times while leaving the stage.

~*~

Taehyung has filmed the whole performance. Hobi asks him to airdrop the video to his phone, which Taehyung gladly obliges to. Jungkook nudges Hobi with his elbow and Hobi airdrops the video to Jungkook's phone. Taehyung can’t help noticing that Jungkook replays the video at least twice during the following performances. The first time Hobi and Jungkook are whispering to each other. Taehyung can’t understand what they are whispering but he only hears appreciative noises.

There are other really great performances but Jimin's’ stands out and it does not come as a surprise to Taehyung and his “friends” that Jimin wins the contest in the category of solo performances.

After having accepted his prize, he hurries backstage to change his shirt for a light violet-blue sweater with a small v-neck. It leaves his neck uncovered and exposes a small part of his collarbones. He looks in the mirror with a satisfied grin: he knows he looks good and the only thing he wants to do tonight is impress Jungkook. He knows it’s a bit silly, but he can’t help it. Taehyung sometimes tells him he’s an eternal flirt. He keeps his leather pants on because he’s in a hurry: Taehyung, Jungkook, and J-Hope are waiting aside from the building where the public is not allowed. Security had to guide them through the crowd as more and more people started to recognize the BTS members. When Jimin joins them, Taehyung and J-Hope start showering Jimin with compliments.

“Wah! Jiminie! You were amazing! The whole crowd went wild”

Taehyung pinches Jimin's cheeks. Jimin starts to feel a bit embarrassed to be babied in front of the two BTS members. Especially because he tries to impress one of them.

‘I’m honestly really impressed Jimin, my jaw was on the floor the whole time’, J-Hope chimes in with the biggest smile on his face. “It was both gracious and sexy. You really have a great technique. But that's something you can achieve with hard work, and I could see you worked very hard. But you also have something that you cannot learn and that’s charisma. You really are a great performer!”. He also adds with a wink:’ I didn’t know you could be so sexy’. ‘Hyung...’, a small whisper comes from the youngest who was resting his chin on J-Hope's shoulder. Jimin looks at Jungkook and couldn’t help but notice the small tint of pink on his cheeks. He looks Jungkook in the eyes waiting for his opinion. He scratches his neck and after meeting his eyes he immediately looks down: 'You really have talent Jimin-...Hyung’. At the last part Jimin’s heart flutters a bit.

After a few seconds Taehyung breaks the silence “I filmed your performance so you can evaluate it later. And perhaps you can use it when you want to audition for dance companies”, he adds with a wink. J-Hope starts chuckling “Taehyung shared the video with us, and Jungkook couldn’t get enough of it” while pointing to the boy behind him. Jimin looks up and tries to catch Jungkook’s’ gaze again. He gives him a smile that could melt anyone on the spot, his eyes curving like crescent moons. But the boy immediately averts his look. Jimin knows from the rumors that the golden maknae looks very confident on stage but is very shy among other people, so he tries not to get disappointed. Anyway, he shrugs it off and positions himself in a way that he does not look directly at Jungkook anymore. In case Jungkook would like to give him a once-over secretly, again, he will definitely have to notice his sharp jawline and of course his well-formed ass.

“Let's get a drink to celebrate!” Taehyung shouts. “Drinks are on me!” Jimin adds enthusiastically. The night is young and they don’t want to go home yet. Hobi hesitates and says “We would really like to have a drink with the two of you but it’s perhaps not a good idea to go to a pub in the neighborhood. You’ve seen the reaction from the public after the contest. People start to recognize us… Isn’t there a place more private we can go to?”. Jungkook adds “and we cannot take you to our dorms because the hyungs are tired because of our upcoming comeback”. “Let’s go to our apartment then” Taehyung answers, “Jimin and I share a small apartment, it’s only a 10 minutes’ walk from here. We can have a small private party there “. “Let’s stop at the convenience store on our way home, because I don’t think we have enough drinks and snacks”, Jimin grins “it’s been very hectic last week”. The four boys start walking in the direction of their apartment.

The four of them chatter and laugh a lot on the walk home, Taehyung being the loudest of them all. Jimin walks in between Jungkook and J-Hope and his left hand sometimes brushes Jungkook’s right hand. The small touches leave a weird fluttery feeling in Jimin’s stomach, but the boy next to him does not seem to be bothered by it.

~*~

When they enter the small apartment, they kick off their shoes in the entrance. The couch allows for 3 people so Jimin takes a chair while Taehyung, Jungkook, and J-Hope take place on the couch. Jimin starts to serve drinks and snacks while Taehyung and Jungkook start playing games on the console. They hit it off immediately as if they were long-time friends. Taehyung has always been the most extravert person of both of them and with his boxy grin and warm personality he can win everybody over, even a shy maknae.

Jimin and J-Hope talk the night away. They have a lot of points of interest in common, dance being one of them. Sometimes Jimin's eyes wander to the laughing and playful boy next to Taehyung, and he cannot stop himself from wondering why he opens up so easily to Taehyung while staying shy towards him.

Around midnight J-Hope gets up: “Jungkook, I think it’s time to go home. We are going to have it rough tomorrow”. They start gathering their things. J-hope grabs Jimin’s shoulder. ‘You did really well. You should be proud of yourself. This one thinks so too.’, he points back at Jungkook who is saying his goodbyes to Taehyung. When Jungkook turns to Jimin, he raises his right hand. Jimin grabs his hand and they bump shoulders. That makes both of them smile. Jimin laughs his signature laugh, which makes him slightly bend over, and rubs his cheek slightly against Jungkook's shoulder. Jungkook grins along. J-Hope doubles in laughter. And then a long silence falls.

Taehyung and Jimin stay in the doorway until the two idols are out of sight. Only J-Hope turns around to wave at them before disappearing in the night, leaving the two friends wondering if they will ever meet again. They both retreat to their own rooms exhausted from this amazing day.

Chapter Text

A few days later, on a Tuesday morning, Jimin receives a phone call from Bighit Entertainment. “Good morning. This is Bighit Entertainment. Am I speaking to Park Jimin? “Yes, that’s me”, Jimin replies timidly. “Jung Hoseok from BTS sent us a video of your dance performance from the dance contest last week because he thought it might interest us. And he is right about that, it triggered our interest. Can we invite you for an audition at Bighit? If you’re interested of course“. Jimin is taken by surprise but is quick to reply: “Yes, of course!”, he always dreamt of being an idol, but was too insecure to apply for an internship. “Note that all our idols can both dance and sing. If you’re willing to audition, you will also have to prepare a song to perform.”. Jimin hesitates a bit but answers that he will prepare a song.

He has a rather high voice and he knows most of his friends say he has a nice voice, and they encourage him to sing, but he has been pestered in the past because of it, which makes him a bit insecure. But he is ready to give it a try and come to terms with this insecurity. They agree on having the audition on Thursday at 10 AM. “We’ll send you the contact details of the person who will lead the audition. We’ll also send you an application form that you have to fill out. Please make sure to return it to us today. See you on Thursday, Park Jimin”. And with that, they end the phone call. Jimin storms out of his room right into the room of Taehyung, who is lounging on his bed. The latter jumps up in surprise “What in the world is wrong with you!?”, he shouts. Out of excitement, Jimin had impulsively jumped on the bed, not noticing Taehyung was eating some yogurt. Because of the sudden impact, it had flown out of his hand spilling in his lap.

“Taetae, I have great news! BigHit just called me! Hobi showed them your video of my dance performance and they invite me to audition!”

Taehyung’s anger over the spilled yogurt and now dirty bed are quickly forgotten. They bounce around together while Jimin shouts “I can’t believe it! I can’t believe it!”. He jumps onto Taehyung and they fall on the mattress. Jimin let himself roll on his back, arms spread, and stares at the ceiling with a wide smile plastered on his face. Taehyung leans on his elbow to look at Jimin and asks with big eyes: “Will you be asked to join BTS?? Or another group?”. Taehyung gasps: "Will you become a solo-artist?”, “I don’t know, I don’t know, they didn’t say!” Jimin answers, pulling at his own hair. “I’m so excited, but also afraid! Are you coming with me to support me?”.

Taehyung thinks about it for a second or two but agrees to accompany Jimin. Of course, his main reason is to support Jimin, but he’s also very curious to see other parts of the BigHit building. They are both drawn to it like bees to a honey pot.

When his adrenaline settles down, Jimin gets up from Taehyung’s bed to get his PC to download the application form, leaving his friend to clean his own bed. He wants to fill out the form and return it as soon as possible. There are a lot of personal questions to fill out, along with questions around skills and work ethics. He takes his time to answer the questions as correctly as possible. After sending back the application form, he heads over to the dance studio to practice his performance for the audition again and again.

After a few hours, he needs to leave the practice room because a dance course is taking place. He retrieves a towel from his backpack to wipe the sweat from his neck and face. He changes into a fresh T-shirt and walks out of the practice room while taking a few sips from his water bottle. The hallway that leads to the exit door passes along a few music studios. He stops abruptly when he hears a familiar melody that he hasn’t heard for years. Could that be?... He glances through the window in the door of the music studio and he sees Taehyung playing the piano while singing the cover of Adele’s song “Someone like you”. He once made that cover to apply for an audition at one of Seoul’s biggest entertainment companies. He almost made it as a trainee but was sacked at the last minute. They never bothered to explain why, and he was so disgusted and disappointed that he completely stopped singing.

Jimin always loved Taehyungs’ voice, which is a warm and jazzy baritone.

He quietly enters the music room and takes place next to Taehyung on the piano chair, and he places his arm around Taehyungs’ waist. When Taehyung plays the last notes of the song, he smiles at Jimin, not that boxy smile of happy Taehyung, but more a melancholic smile. Then he starts playing another song and Jimin immediately recognizes it as the song Taehyung composed himself for Jimin’s sixteenth birthday. He titled the song “Friends”. They both start singing in a subdued way, synchronizing their voices the best they can.

When the song ends, Jimin rests his head on Tae’s shoulder. “You know what I would like, Tae?” Taehyung just replies with a soft hum. “That you audition together with me”. Taehyung replies softly “No, Jiminie. I was in a really bad place after they dropped me. Do you remember how much effort you had to put in me to get me back on my feet?” He places a soft kiss on Jimin’s head before resting his cheek on Jimin’s head. “I was devastated. I poured my heart and soul out for that company. For them to just let me go without any reason”, Taehyung swallows trying to hold back the tears that are trying to escape. After he calms down he speaks: “I never want to walk that road again”. And with that, he closes the lid of the piano. “Let’s have a coffee at the coffee shop, my treat”, Jimin tries to lighten the mood. Taehyung accepts with a small smile. They leave the music room hand in hand silence looming between them.

~*~

Jimin wakes up early the day of the audition. He walks to the kitchen but finds Taehyung already awake with a cup of coffee in his hands. “Already up?” he says with a croaking voice. “Couldn’t sleep”, Taehyung replies. Jimin knows why, so he doesn’t ask questions, he just caresses the back of his friend. He starts preparing breakfast, and when they are both seated at the kitchen counter, Jimin asks “Are you sure you still want to accompany me?” Taehyung smiles at Jimin and replies: “Of course, I’m coming with you! I’m your manager!”, they both start giggling.

After taking a shower, Jimin prepares his outfit: he’s going to wear black skinny but stretchy jeans in order not to be bothered while dancing. He will dance in a plain white shirt; he puts it in his backpack. After the dance performance, he will have to talk to the BigHit people, and he doesn't want to stand there in a sweat-soaked shirt. He tries a number of shirts in different colors and designs and decides to go with a red cashmere shirt. When he’s ready to go, he puts on a show for Taehyung. “Wow, Jiminie! You really know how to dress to impress!”.

They arrive at the BigHit building at 9.45 AM. Better to be too early than too late, they giggle while entering the building. They are welcomed by a receptionist. “Take a seat, an employee will bring you soon to the assigned practice room”. While waiting Jimin starts fidgeting with his fingers, which is a clear indication that he’s getting nervous. Taehyung places his hand around Jimin’s small hands to calm him down. Taehyung has really handsome hands with long small fingers. No wonder he’s such a good pianist, Jimin thinks. He does not say that out loud because he does not want to upset Taehyung right now.

At 9.55 they are picked up by someone from the staff who guides them to a practice room. A man welcomes them and introduces himself as Bang PD. Jimin has to refrain from dashing backward out of the door. Meeting the head of BigHit Entertainment makes him rethink all the choices that brought him here.

Taehyung stays right behind him and places a hand on Jimin’s back in order to hold him in place. Bang PD must have noticed the anxiety in Jimin’s eyes. He makes a little bow, and welcomes him with a broad smile “Ah! Park Jimin-ssi, right? I heard a few things about you. Hoseok mentioned your dancing skills only thirteen times.” Then he looks at Taehyung with that same broad smile “And you are? Are you also auditioning today? I can’t recall being told about another person”. Taehyung shakes his head and conjures his most beautiful smile on his face when he replies “No, I’m only here to support Jimin, and free coffee and snacks”. He bows deeply. Bang PD breaks in a burst of laughter at that.

“OK, Jimin-ssi. Let’s start with your dance performance”. He waves with his hand to another man standing in the background, signaling to come closer. “This is Songsungdeuk, the dance coach of BTS. He will evaluate your dance performance.” At that, Jimin’s eyes grow wide but he manages to plaster a bright smile on his face in order to radiate some form of confidence.

“OK, Jimin-ssi”, Sonsungdeuk says, “As Bang PD already mentioned, Hoseok told us about you. He also showed me your performance at the dance contest, which you won, is that right?” Jimin nods fiercely at that but doesn’t say anything because he does not trust his voice at the moment. “We feel that BTS is missing something and are hoping to find that in a sixth member. This person will enforce the dance line and has to join the vocal line. We hope that you can show us your full capacity. We already know you’re a talented dancer, so that will be no problem. Hopefully, your voice will be the thing that we’re looking for”, Bang PD explains to them.

Sonsungdeuk asks “Do you have your music with you?” Taehyung signals with his phone “I have the music here. Can I couple my phone to the boxes?” Jimin and Taehyung walk towards the side of the studio where a few chairs are positioned against the wall. Taehyung takes place on one of the chairs and starts to couple his phone, while Jimin stands in the corner pulling off his red cashmere shirt to put on the white shirt he brought to perform his dance. What he does not see is how Sonsungdeuk’s eyes roam over his back with an appreciative look on his face: the dance coach notices the years and years of practice that mark the muscles on his back.

Jimin walks graciously to the middle of the floor, takes a deep breath, and nods to Taehyung to start the music. Once again, when the music starts, Jimin closes his eyes to shut out the world and to enter his own bubble. His movements are perfectly timed and smooth. Emotions surge through his whole body. Jimin ends his performance flawlessly.

Bang PD and Sonsungdeuk clap respectfully. They turn to each other, discussing his performance in hushed voices. Taehyung gives him a thumbs up. Back on his spot, he sees that the two are still speaking with each other, no more smiles on their faces, only serious expressions. “Okay, Jimin-ssi, I’m going to call our guy that will accompany you on the synthesizer, and then we can test your vocal capacities.”

When the musician enters the studio, he walks straight to Bang PD while looking around. His eyes stop on Taehyung and he exclaims “Don’t I know you from somewhere? Yes, I think so. I'm sure you will have no problem with this audition” Taehyung agonizes and stutters “Noooo, it is my friend who is auditioning, Park Jimin”. The guy stops in his track and contemplates: “But I’m sure I know you from somewhere… aren’t you the guy who auditioned for Rain company but got dropped moments before becoming a trainee?” Taehyung nods almost invisibly. Of course, he remembers the guy, but he never thought he will run into him again.

The musician continues enthusiastically “Bang PD, I told you about this guy”, while pointing his finger to Taehyung, “he’s the boy I told you about, this is the one you need to extend your vocal line with! This guy has a warm soulful baritone like you never heard before”. He turns to Taehyung and smiles “Please, show Bang PD what you have in store” but Taehyung shakes his head. The guy feels Taehyung’s discomfort and walks towards him. He sits down on his heels right before Taehyung and pleads “Way back I tried my utmost to keep you in the company, but it was not my decision to take. I really believed in you, and I still do. When Bang PD told me he wanted an additional member for BTS to support the vocal line I immediately thought about you. I contacted Rain company but they refused to give me your contact details.” Taehyung lifts his head to meet the guy’s eyes in search of confirmation. He really wants to believe him but he’s not sure. This strengthens the musician to continue pleading. While he places a hand on Taehyung ‘s knee, a bit too familiar to the boys liking, he whispers to Taehyung “I remember you wanted this so much but I also remember you were very disappointed when you heard the verdict.“ He grabs Taehyung’s hands and continues “But this is your chance. My position at BigHit is far more important than it was at Rain company, I’m one of the producers here. If this is what you always wanted, you can get it. But you have to show Bang PD.”

Jimin was watching the whole scene unfold. He does not like how touchy the man is with his best friend. He stiffens when his friend showed signs of discomfort, ready to step in. But after hearing the plead, he couldn’t help but try to convince Taehyung.

He shuffles a little closer to his friend so that their shoulders touch. “Please, Taehyung, I know deep down you still want this. You’re just afraid.” Taehyung looks from one to the other, expectation reflecting in their eyes. So he sighs and gives in. “OK, I’ll give it a try but I’m expecting nothing”.

The producer gets back on his feet and says: “Let me talk to Bang PD”. He quickly walks towards Bang PD and Sonsungdeuk. The three men have a short discussion. Bang PD nods to Taehyung, signaling that he also gets a chance to audition.

The producer walks in the direction of the synthesizer, but Taehyung stops him: “I’ll give it a try, but I’m going to play myself, just as I did on my audition for Rain company”. The musician nods and walks back to Bang PD. Taehyung takes place behind the synthesizer, and Jimin takes place on a chair next to him in order to support his friend. Taehyung looks to Bang PD and announces “I’m going to sing a cover of Adele’s song ‘Someone like you”. As he sets in the song, everybody in the studio gets quiet. His beautiful and melancholic baritone resonates through the practice room. Jimin looks at Bang PD and it is clear on his face that he’s impressed with Taehyung’s talent.

When Taehyung plays the last notes, there’s nothing but silence. Everybody is looking in awe. After a few seconds of silence, Bang PD takes his phone from his pocket and makes a phone call. After a few seconds, he says to the person on the other side: “Can you please come down to studio 2. There is something I need your advice on”. He looks at Taehyung and he asks: “Can you stay there?”. After a few minutes, Namjoon enters the room, followed by Yoongi. Namjoon stops in the doorway when he sees Jimin and Taehyung. Yoongi has to jump to see who’s in the room. He pushes Namjoon aside to have a better look “Well, well, well”, he smiles, “aren’t you the fans from the meet and greet. It seems you impressed Hobi and Jungkook a lot, hearing their stories from last week”, he adds.

“Have you heard this guy sing?” Namjoon and Yoongi both shake their head. Bang PD turns to Taehyung and asks “Can you please sing your song for us again?”. Now with Yoongi and Namjoon in the room, Taehyung is even more nervous. He rubs his sweaty hands over his pants, takes a deep breath to steady his nerves, and starts playing again. When he starts singing the first notes with his jazzy voice, Yoongi and Namjoon's faces light up in surprise. Namjoon turns to Bang PD and says “Isn’t this the type of voice we are looking for? Anyway, I like his timbre: it’s warm and deep, sometimes husky and thick, which is a rare quality”.

Now it’s Jimin’s turn to sing. He does not know if he will be able to control his nerves. He looks with angsty eyes to Taehyung. Taehyung is quick to understand, and he asks the producer if he can accompany Jimin on the synthesizer. He nods to Jimin to calm him down and Jimin takes place at the mic. Bang PD asks “What are you going to sing for us?” and Jimin answers “The song I’m going to sing today is ‘Fix you’ from Coldplay.” Taehyung starts playing the song and Jimin begins singing. The first notes are a bit unsteady, but he closes his eyes to shut out everybody in the room, and his voice stabilizes. Jimin has an angelic voice that captivates everybody in the room.

Bang PD does not say anything immediately. He sits, looking at the boys with a deep frown on his forehead. “You did both very well, and we are very pleased to have such talented guys audition for us, but that’s not enough, as we are thinking of letting you join BTS. You will get a lot of singing lessons and a lot of dance lessons, but we need to be sure that you will get up to speed with the other members very quickly. Therefore, we need to test your knowledge of BTS songs. Are you familiar with BTS music?” They both nod feverishly, and Taehyung laughs “We know all the songs by heart because we sing them almost every day”. That makes the CEO laugh. The producer takes place at the synthesizer and starts playing a song. Taehyung recognizes it first and starts singing, Jimin joining in immediately after. After a minute, the producer starts another song, and they continue like that for several songs. When they sing “Run”, Jimin can show off that he has not only a beautiful and fragile voice but that he can easily reach the higher notes of Jin and Jungkook. By the time the producer sets in “Bulletproof”, Jimin and Taehyung forgot that this is an audition and they show off how well their voices synchronize. They are enjoying it too much. In his enthusiasm, Jimin also shows off his growl, which he only reserved for the bathroom concerts with Taehyung until then. He’s having so much fun that he does not notice that Yoongi’s head turns in surprise.

After half an hour of testing their knowledge, Bang PD and the producer leave the room to discuss the possibilities. Namjoon and Yoongi take this opportunity to talk to Taehyung and Jimin and they chatter and laugh. Jimin is still wearing his dance shirt, so he moves to the side of the dance studio to change his shirt. He does not notice that he’s followed by Sonsungdeuk. It’s only when has taken off his dance shirt that he sees Sonsungdeuk sitting on the chair next to his backpack. Sonsungdeuk’s eyes wander over Jimin’s bare chest.

He notices that Jimin becomes a little insecure and shy under his gaze so he says: “You can put on your shirt, you know. I notice that you have a very toned body, so I’m just curious. Do you work out a lot? How much do you dance on a weekly basis?” Jimin explains “I go to the gym once or twice a week, not more than that. But I dance a lot and teach dance classes. I teach ballet to children, and I teach modern dance and hip hop to teenagers and young adults. Taehyung follows the hip hop class so he has the basics. Of course, modern dance is my main focus as I major in it. I graduate within a month. In between classes and after classes I create my own choreographies and dance many hours a day. I’m not happy if I cannot dance.” He adds with a shy smile. Sonsungdeuk asks: “If you would get the chance to join BigHit, would you be able to stop teaching?” Jimin shrugs “They already know that this can be my last year teaching classes as I was counting on auditioning for several dance companies abroad after my exams”. At that, Sonsungdeuk gets up and pats Jimin on the shoulder “I’m going to find Bang PD”. Jimin returns to Taehyung who seems to have the time of his life chatting and laughing along with Namjoon and Yoongi.

After half an hour Jimin and Taehyung are called to follow Bang PD to his office. They say goodbye and Namjoon throws them a lot of thumbs up while leaving the studio.

~*~

Seated in Bang PD’s office, waiting for the CEO to talk. He offered to get them something to drink, which they refused politely. Bang PD settles down folding his hands on the bureau in front of him.

“You boys are really talented; I will give you that. According to Yoongi, you’re dynamic with the BTS members is something very interesting. But of course, this is not the only thing. We were looking for one additional member. We did not find one today.”

This shocks both Jimin and Taehyung. With all the good feedback they got they thought that at least Jimin would get through. That's how this little world works, Jimin thinks. He lets his shoulders hang in disappointment, looking down to avoid the gazes of the others in the room.

Unbothered by their reactions Bang PD continues: "We found two”.

Jimin's head shoots up. He sees the man in front of him smiling mischievously. He then turns to look at Taehyung whose mouth is a gaping hole. He grabs Taehyung’s shoulder and shakes it slightly to get his attention. His best friend turns to him, tears forming in the corner of his eyes. They grab each other’s hands and start screaming like two young schoolgirls. Jimin can’t believe it. They like him, his voice, his talent. They didn’t think it was too feminine for a boy. They want to hear more. Not only that. He could experience all of this with his best friend. Taehyung, after many years of torturing himself because of something he had no hand in, finally will be able to do the thing he has always dreamed of.

“But, there are a few things...”

Bang PD continues explaining to them what is excepted of them. They will graduate soon so that is nothing to worry about, but side jobs, like Jimin’s dance classes, have to be given up. They're expected to focus solely on training. They will get extra dance and vocal lessons, with who will be discussed later on. At some point, they will need to move in with the other members.

The CEO tells them that they will have to work hard, harder than the other members. Both Taehyung and Jimin will be put on a diet. He then goes over somethings they aren’t allowed to do, like dating, doing drugs, and other actions that could harm the reputation of BTS or one of the members.

After his speech, he hands over their contract. He gives them the time to read the contract before they sign it. When they hand over the signed contract, he looks both boys in the eyes. “Congratulations, and welcome to the BigHit family”.

When they go home, they are all giddy and full of joy and anticipation. At a certain moment, Taehyung shoves his elbow into Jimin’s side “You know what, I had a lot of fun today. Thank you for believing in me and supporting me Jimin-ie. You're the bestest friend ever”. That night they decide to sleep in Jimin’s bed, talking until early in the morning about what had happened and what will happen.

Chapter Text

Both Taehyung and Jimin are accepted to join BTS. The first days after the audition they cannot believe that their dreams are coming true. It feels so unreal. They are very excited but as they signed a non-disclosure agreement with BigHit they cannot share their enthusiasm with their college friends. So, they have to keep their joy within the walls of their small apartment. They jump on the couch and on their beds. They play BTS music and dance and sing to it while laughing their heads off.

After a few days, they descend from cloud nine as they still have to finish a few projects that they have to turn in by the end of the week. And they also have to study for their upcoming exams. They are afraid that they will have to pull more than one full-nighters. On one of those nights after an exhausting study session, they slump on the couch, tangled into each other. Taehyung lays on his back on the couch and Jimin lays on top of him. Taehyung starts playing with Jimin’s hair and sighs: “What are we going to do if we don’t pass our exams and we are not able to graduate?” Jimin contemplates for a few minutes and answers: “I know it would not be a problem for BigHit if we have to take a few courses to next semester, but I would prefer not to have to do that”. He looks back at Taehyung. “Remember the little talk we had with Bang PD in his office? We will have to work hard, very hard. The other guys already work at least 12 hours a day. And we have to catch up, so we will have days of 14 to 16 hours “. Taehyung sights “I don’t think I will be able to combine both”. Jimin adds: “So there is only one option: we have to do our utmost to graduate. If we have to pull full-nighters, we will pull full-nighters”.

And that’s what they do: they work their asses off and motivate each other as much as they can. Waves of exhaustion and despair transition into waves of ecstasy. After a few weeks of hard work, they finally see the end of the exams. That night they go out for a couple of drinks but decide not to get wasted because the day after they are going to take an early train to their respective families. They want to see their parents before starting their life as a trainee.

On Monday they start their lives as trainees. They are expected in the BigHit building at 8 AM. They are welcomed by the manager of BTS and get a lecture about rules and expectations. They don’t get to see the other BTS members: they have individual dance and singing lessons to gauge their level and possibilities.

Official “working” hours for the BTS members are from 8 AM till 6 PM but in practice they all work much harder, coming in very early to work out, write songs, or practice dance, leaving late to work on their personal projects like mixtapes.

On their first day, Jimin and Taehyung have to meet up with Hoseok as of 6 PM to start working on the dance routines for the upcoming comeback. When they opened the door of the practice room, they are greeted with applause by all BTS members. At that Jimin smiles shyly, putting his sweater paws in front of his face, only eyes visible, while entering the practice room. But Taehyung is the contradiction of shy and makes big bows with a big boxy smile on his face. Namjoon organized a small welcome drink with snacks and non-alcoholic beverages, which made Yoongi grumble.

After almost half an hour all members leave the practice room, except Hobi, Taehyung, and Jimin. They need to ramp up as quickly as possible. On the first day, Hobi works them through the basics of the choreography of “No more dream”. As this song is one of their hugest successes until now, they want to keep it on their setlist of upcoming concerts. It is also a choreography they will work on the next day together with the other BTS members.

Around 10 PM Hobi calls it a day: “Alright guys, time to go home.” He turns to Jimin: “Jimin-ssi, we’re really lucky that you’re joining the dance line”. Jimin beams happily at the praise. Then Hobi turns to Taehuyng: “To be honest, I’m impressed. I had no expectations. I thought: in any way it cannot be worse than Namjoon” He doubles in laughter and grabs Taehyung’s shoulder. The latter does not know if he must laugh along or not. But Hobi quickly adds: “You’re doing great. Really, I’m impressed”.

While taking a sip from their water bottles, Jimin asks: “Is it OK if we come around 7 AM tomorrow morning? Tae and I can start practicing the steps we learned today.” Hobi answers: “I like that attitude! I will also be there at 7 AM then.” “Oh no, Hyung! That’s not what I meant!” Jimin reacts. But Hobi shakes his head “I prefer to be there to make sure you get it right. It’s not a big deal anyway.” “Thanks, Hyung”, Tae adds. They put on their jackets and Hobi dims the lights when they leave the practice room. They say goodbye and Jimin and Tae run to the nearest subway station in order to catch the last train home.

When they come home, they rush to the shower and flop on the couch. Too tired to cook a decent meal, they settle for a bowl of instant ramen.

~ * ~

Jimin and Taehyung are thrown into the exhausting life of a trainee as of the second day. As promised, they arrive at 7 AM at the dance studio. Hobi is already there, stretching while waiting for them. Jimin and Taehyung start stretching their bodies and Hobi learns them a few breathing exercises. Then they go through the routines they learned yesterday evening.

During the day they follow the same schedules as the other BTS members: individual dance and singing lessons, but also with the whole band. But not only that. The free time they used to have as college students is now filled with meetings about their role in BTS, the history of the band and the company, the whole K-pop industry, and how they are expected to behave in public and at interviews.

Having two additional members is also a lot of work for producers and choreographers: songs and choreographies need to be adapted to allow for 7 members instead of 5. One of the numbers they are working on is “No more dream”. Sonsungdeuk comes up with a brilliant idea: he wants Jimin to be picked up by one of the members to help him run over the backs of the dancers and the other members. Jimin is chosen because he is the lightest out of all of them. Well, aside from Yoongi, but he makes it very clear that he is not going to do that. The person picking up Jimin must be very strong because it all happens very quickly and nobody wants accidents. When the added move is being introduced, the question of who will pick up Jimin is being asked more towards the hyungs, especially J-hope. But nobody seems keen on that idea. Out of nowhere, Jungkook speaks up, telling everyone that he wants to do it. Sonsungdeuk hesitates, but when he sees that none of the other members is offering to do it he agrees. Jimin side-eyes Jungkook and notices a small smirk on his face. That makes Jimin smile at himself.

They start exercising that specific part. In the beginning, it’s rather stiff because Jungkook does not know how he can best pick up Jimin, but after several tries, it becomes smoother. He lifts Jimin higher and higher, and it quickly becomes clear that Jungkook likes fooling around. Each time he lifts Jimin, he comes up with another joke. The first time he plays a trick on Jimin, he pats him on the but after putting him back on the ground. When he sees that Jimin does not mind jokes, he becomes bolder. The next time he does not put Jimin back on the ground but keeps him in his arms, bridal style, and a big smile on his face. That makes Jimin laugh and gives him a slap on the chest. The next time Jungkook tickles Jimin during the lift and Jimin reacts with a pinch in his but after being put on the ground. They bought start laughing and giggling which makes the dance coach sight and the other members grumble.

‘Guys! If you’re not going to take it seriously, I will replace Jimin with Yoongi. Alright?’

Yoongi loudly protests, yelling at them that they better behave, or else. After the choreographer and Yoongi’s little outbursts they apologize. For the rest of the practice, they take it very seriously.

Another older song that they keep on the setlist is “Fire”. Both Jimin and Taehyung pick up the steps rather quickly as they already practiced it during the dance course Jimin teaches. But synchronizing the dance steps within BTS is of completely another level: Sonsungdeuk films the performance on a regular basis. When he pauses the recording, everybody’s step must be in complete synchronization.

In the morning, the boys dance for 4 hours non-stop repeating their dance moves, perfecting each move. They are all drenched. There is a lunch break of half an hour. There are shower facilities if they want to take a shower before moving to the singing courses. But most of the boys just put on a dry shirt before the break. Lunch consists of rice cakes and protein bars, washed away with water and energy drinks.

After 8 PM they stay with Hobi in the practice room to work on hip hop techniques and synchronization. It is often around 2 PM when they return to their apartment. The last train home is long gone and the walk home takes about 40 minutes. It is on one of those nightly walks that Taehyung and Jimin conclude that it is better to move to the dorms as soon as possible. They decide to talk to Namjoon the day after.

During the lunch break of the next day, they walk up to Namjoon.

“Namjoon-hyung, can we talk for a minute?”

“Sure, Jimin.”

Namjoon points at the ground indicating for them to sit down. A staff member goes up to them giving them all a towel, a protein bar, and a bottle of water. Jimin sees Taehyung thinking that this is actually so disgusting that they have to work their asses off and then they get a single protein bar as lunch. That plus the rest of their diet – consisting of just salads - is definitely not enough to sustain anyone. Luckily, he keeps the harsh words for himself.

Jimin clears his throat. Yesterday, he and Taehyung had a long talk about how they’re going to phrase everything. ‘Well, Taehyung and I were wondering. The distance between the company and our apartment is not far, but with those late-night practices with J-hope-hyung, we miss the last train. So, we have to walk and that takes at least 40 minutes'. Jimin takes a bite from his bar, chewing slowly while thinking what to say next. He glances over at Namjoon, who was gulping down some water. He swallows and looks at Jimin, waiting for him to continue. Jimin looks at Taehyung, he forgot everything they talked about the night before. Slightly panicked he pleads with his eyes for Taehyung to continue. Taehyung takes a breath, surprised by the change of their plan. Namjoon quickly interrupts, already knowing where this might be going. ‘Taking a long walk home at night after a long and tiring day is one thing, but it is also dangerous, and we don’t want you to take risks. I will talk to the managers to see when you can move in with us’. He stands up to throw away his empty wrapper. He comes back, extending his hands to hoist the two up. He smiles at them both; the warm smile makes Jimin feel at home. ‘By the way, you don’t have to be nervous or afraid to talk with me. We've been practicing together for a while now and I'm the leader of this group. So don’t worry, okay?’, he pats them on the shoulders and heads over to the others for the rest of practice.

Jimin and Taehyung look at each other, relieved at how easy that was. They high-five each other. Jimin can’t wait to move in. Not only will transportation be less tiring, but it will also give them a chance to get to know the other members outside of their training schedule.

After the conversation with Namjoon, they move to the music studios for their vocal training.

~ * ~

During the evening sessions, J-Hope inserts a break of 10 minutes at each stroke of the clock. When they take a break, they sink down near the wall and grab their water bottle. Sometimes they just sit there, completely exhausted, and sometimes they talk. During one of those breaks later that week, Jimin thanks Hobi for passing the video of his dance performance to BigHit management. Hobi grins “Well, you deserve this, you are great. You have a lot of charisma. I’m sure you will do great during concerts.” He takes a sip from his bottle and continues with a smirk, “but it’s not me who is your biggest fan: Jungkook kept pushing and nagging that I should show the video to our management. He was going to do it himself, but he assumed that it would have a bigger impact if I requested to have you audition because I am the main dancer.” Jimin looks away from J-Hope and cannot help smiling to himself.

~ * ~

The week passes by in a daze. The BTS members work 24/7, but on Sunday the schedule is less tough. Dance practice starts only at 9 AM, so they can stay in bed a few hours longer. They will also finish earlier today because Jimin and Taehyung are moving into the dorms. They decided to continue paying rent for their apartment for the upcoming month in order to have time to empty the apartment and to decide on what to keep and what to throw away.

After the rehearsals, a staff member drives Jimin and Taehyung back to their apartment. That morning they already packed the most important stuff like clothes and a few personal items into boxes.” The staff member helps them to bring down and load their stuff into the car and drives them back to the dorms.

When they arrive at the dorms, they are welcomed by all the BTS members. Even Yoongi, who normally spends his Sunday evenings in his studio, is there.

Hobi and Jungkook help to unload the car and put down the boxes in the hall. Namjoon welcomes them and does a tour around the dorms for Jimin and Taehyung to show them around. Hobi and Jungkook follow in their trial. Namjoon explains: “We will eventually move to a bigger dorm in the near future, but we had to work out a temporary solution to share the available rooms. And when we say a temporary solution, it means that we played paper, rock, scissors”. They all laughed at that. “Yoongi won, so he as a room for his own. I already share a room with Jungkook. We also discussed you two sharing a room together, but we thought that the integration will be smoother if one of you shares a room with Jin, and the other one shares a room with Hobi”. Hobi adds with a big smile on his face “I propose you also play the game. The winner can share a room with me.” Taehyung and Jimin start giggling. Of course, they are going to play the game, as this is the way decisions are taken in BTS. It's an intense game, but in the end, Jimin wins. They go back to the hall where they left their stuff. Hobi helps Jimin to move his stuff to his room, and Jungkook helps Taehyung to bring him to Jin’s room.

Once the new members have unpacked their stuff, they return to the living room where the others are waiting for them.

Jin prepared a special meal to welcome the new members.

‘Wow Jin-ssi, you really are an amazing cook’, Taehyung compliments.

‘Ya! You say that as if you are surprised’, Jin replies swinging his chopsticks at Taehyung. He quickly shakes his head: ‘No, no that’s not what I mean. I mean-’. Namjoon nudges his shoulder against the sputtering boy next to him. ‘Don’t panic, he is just joking. By the way, now that we’re all living together there is no need to be so formal. I think we all agree that you can call us hyung from now on'. He looks at both Jimin and Taehyung. Around the table, there are sounds of agreement. ‘Namjoon’s right. We're all your hyungs now’. Everyone's head turns to Jungkook, who has a mischievous smirk. ‘Aish, you brat!’, Yoongi grumbles and J-hope is quick to give the maknae a corrective slap on the back of his head.

“Well, I’m the eldest, so I’m responsible to feed my dongseangs’, Jin changes the topic, ‘That’s also the reason why you get just one protein bar for lunch: that way I’m sure you are hungry and you eat whatever I serve”. Everybody starts laughing.

Jimin and Taehyung really enjoy the home-made dinner by Jin: they hadn’t had a good meal since last weekend. The ambiance at the table is enjoyable and light. The 7 boys are very relaxed and laugh a lot. Jimin and Taehyung look at each other with glistering and hopeful eyes. They really enjoy being part of this group of friends. They feel welcome and hope they will blend in easily.

After dinner, Jin gets up and jokingly says to Jungkook “I’m really surprised that there are leftovers. Jungkook is like a recycle bin: he eats everything that is left”. Jungkook grumbles and gives Jin a slap on his butt. Jin turns to Jimin and Taehyung “You see how he is? No respect at all for his hyungs.” Jungkook follows Jin to the kitchen to do the dishes, while Jin puts the leftovers in the fridge. Jimin offers to help with the dishes, but Jin shoves him back to the living room: “No, absolutely not, kitchen time on Sunday evening is me-time with my favorite dongsaeng.” Jin and Jungkook continue bickering in the kitchen.

Yoongi bought snacks and soju, and quickly they all start joking and laughing. Sometimes they hear shouting and laughter from the kitchen. Namjoon shakes his head and says “they are always teasing each other. Sometimes I ask myself who really is the youngest.” That, Jimin and Taehyung know from the countless compilations they watched on YouTube.

When Jungkook finishes his kitchen duties, he asks Taehyung to play video games in his room. Jimin watches their retreating backs with a bit of disappointment but he got distracted by Namjoon and Hobi to join their conversation. They talk about their dreams and ambitions. When Yoongi repeats for the Nth time that he wants to perform at and win a grammy, Hobi starts laughing and throws his whole body on Jimin’s knees, slapping his hand on Yoongi’s knees. It is obvious that both are a bit drunk. “You have no idea how many times he already said that!”. Yoongi smiles and looks fondly at Hobi: “You’ll see… “and then he adds with a smirk “We have the best rappers, the best vocal line, and now with Jimin, the best dancer”. The pout on Hobi’s face is priceless and makes Jimin snort. Now it is his time to double in laughter. That’s another thing he has in common with Hobi: they both laugh with their whole body.

After a while, Hobi sees that Jimin starts spacing out the conversation and notices his eyes wandering to the door of Jungkook’s room. He gets up and pulls Jimin up by his hand: “Come on, let’s bring them some snacks and soju. They will be thirsty by now.” Jimin smiles at Hobi and answers grateful “Good idea, let’s check what those two are up to.” When they enter the room, they are greeted by two playful kids. They are both sitting on the ground, legs crossed, knees knocking against each other.

Hobi and Jimin take place on Jungkook’s bed, also cross-legged. Jungkook offers them to play along but they are no match for the two youngest. After some time Hobi wishes them good night. Jimin wants to get up from Jungkook’s bed to follow Hobi, but Hobi assures him “You can stay if you want. Just make it not too late and not too loud: we have a tight schedule tomorrow.”

After half an hour Namjoon enters the room making clear that he wants to sleep. Jungkook saves the game and drags the two others to the living room. He opens the last bottle of soju. Taehyung jumps onto the couch. Jimin follows suit and dives on top of him. Having no room left on the couch, Jungkook dives on top of the two others, chest pressed against Jimin’s back. He feels hips against his ass, and thighs around his own. Jimin feels caged and his cheeks become a shade redder. Jungkook starts tickling Taehyung with one hand and Jimin with the other hand. But Jimin can’t stand tickling so his laughter becomes louder and louder. Jimin’s crystal clear and contagious laugher rings through the living room and soon all 3 of them are laughing and squeaking. The weight of the two struggling boys on top of Taehyung becomes a bit too much, so Taehyung starts tickling and pinching Jungkook to get him off the couch. Jungkook crawls up from the couch and lifts a squirming Jimin from Taehyung by wrapping both of his arms around his waist. When he puts Jimin down feet on the ground, he gives him a slap on his ass.

‘Hey! I'm your hyung!’, Jimin giggles.

Jungkook realizes that his move could be a bit out of line, so he turns around with a small blush on his cheeks: “Let’s have a last swig of soju, and then it’s time to go to bed”. He passes the bottle of soju to Jimin and they all take a sip. “On our new life as BTS!” Taehyung toasts. “On our new members!” Jungkook answers. He takes a swig, and adds “I like my hyungs very much but I’m glad you both are closer to my age. You both are more playful than the other hyungs and I like that. It feels more like home now.” When they finish the bottle, they place the empty soju bottles that are still lingering around on the kitchen counter, and then they go to their respective rooms.

Jimin puts on a T-shirt and boxer shorts and then goes to the bathroom to brush his teeth. He knocks on the door but Jungkook is already in the bathroom. He opens the door and invites Jimin in. Jimin hesitates and wants to return to his room to wait for his turn, but Jungkook whispers “If it’s just to brush your teeth, you can come in, you know. With 5 members in a small dorm, we sometimes have to use the bathroom together. Now, that we are 7, that will happen more often.” He wiggles his eyebrows while he smirks at Jimin. Jimin puts some toothpaste on his toothbrush, and looks at Jungkook through the mirror with a mischievous smile: “No problem, Tae and I often shower together.” Jungkook chokes in his own toothpaste and looks at Jimin, also through the mirror. When he sees the smirk on Jimin’s face, he grins and shoves his elbow in Jimin’s ribs, but he cannot hide the flush on his cheeks. When Jungkook is ready, he wishes Jimin good night, and Jimin answers with a wink “Goodnight Jungkook-ah. See you in the shower tomorrow”, earning a snort from the younger.

He does not know where this shamelessness comes from. Probably from all the soju they downed tonight. He head palms himself. There is a big chance that he will regret the whole conversation he just had with the youngest. But that’s a problem for later, now he will go to bed with a smile.

Chapter Text

The kitchen counter is a bit cramped for 7 members. But Jin assures the newcomers that it does not happen often that all members have breakfast together. Most of them get up and leave the dorms at different hours. Breakfast consists of cereals or a protein bar. Jin shows them where to find a bowl, a spoon, and a cup. He offers them a cup of coffee or tea. Jungkook shows them where to find the milk in the fridge.

Jin explains during breakfast “Each member is responsible for his own breakfast. When you’re finished, you make sure that you rinse your bowl and cup. Some members tend to forget that, especially one” he says sternly while rubbing through Jungkook’s hair. “Hyung…” Jungkook mumbles, red flushing his cheeks.

Jin warns them that it is better not to skip breakfast, even if they are in a hurry. “We don’t want you to faint during dance practice”.

The four of them leave the dorms together. The three other members are already at BigHit. They chat about everything and anything while walking to the studios. The dorms are a good 10 minutes’ walk from BigHit.

They arrive in the practice room joking and laughing. Namjoon looks up from his phone from the other side of the room. Jungkook places his bag next to Yoongi’s, and Jimin and Taehyung place their bags next to Jungkook’s. Yoongi grumbles “So much fun so early in the morning?” Jungkook huffs “Not everybody is in a bad mood in the morning”, and shoves his elbow in Yoongi‘s side. When Jimin pulls his hoodie over his head, his tank top accidentally comes off partially too, flashing a good part of his six-pack. Jungkook tries not to stare. But he must not be as successful as he hoped because he feels a hand pushing under his chin. He then realizes that he is staring and – unfortunately - with an open mouth. Yoongi snorts “Good way to make it obvious”. Jungkook scratches his neck in embarrassment.

During a break, Jungkook starts imitating Jin’s dance moves. Taehyung joins in immediately while Jimin doubles over while laughing. Then Taehyung starts imitating Jimin’s dance moves. Jimin jumps on Taehyung’s back and tries to bring him down on the ground, wrapping his legs around Taehyungs legs in order to immobilize him. That’s Jungkook’s cue to start imitating Jimin. “You, brat!”, Jimin shouts laughing. He releases Taehyung immediately and jumps on Jungkook to bring him down. He’s hanging like a koala at Jungkook’s right arm. But Jungkook is too strong and stays upright. “Tae Tae, please help me!”. Taehyung jumps on his feet and jumps on Jungkook from the other side. For a few seconds, Jungkook stays upright with two koalas hanging from his arms. But Taehyung has long limbs and succeeds in tangling his legs in between Jungkook’s legs. That makes him stumble and with joined forces, the two new members are able to put down Jungkook.

Sonsungdeuk claps his hands to recall the members that it’s time to resume working on the choreography. The four elder members scrabble on their fits and take their positions. But the 3 youngest members are too busy cracking up, pushing, and shoving each other around. The dance coach whistles on his fingers and shouts “Can the maknae line stop fooling around please?”

The hyungs are all laughing and Jin says “Well, I’m grateful that Jungkook now has other toys to play with. Hopefully, we get more rest now.”

Sonsungdeuk gives them another break. Yoongi immediately drops on the floor, looking like he just passed out. Namjoon sits down next to him with a deep groan. It is quiet for a bit but then Namjoon whispers: “What are they doing now?”. Yoongi gets up to see what the other means. A deep sigh escapes from him as he sees the three youngest cradled together closely in the corner. Jimin and Jungkook are inspecting each other’s faces, while Taehyung is pointing at different places on their faces. It looks like he is keeping some type of score. “What are you doing now?”, he asks in disbelief. Jimin is in the middle of looking closely at Jungkook’s lower lip. Jimin turns to Yoongi and answers with a smile “We are comparing our moles”. At that same time, he feels a finger scratching his neck “Oooh! You have a mole here too!”. Yoongi shakes his head and sighs: “You guys, incredible with what you come up with to enjoy yourselves”. He lays back down and says to himself: “One of these days, I swear-”. “Oh hyung, let them be. At least we will have more rest from Jungkook’s shenanigans”, Namjoon snickers, looking at the maknae line.

As of the second week, the choreographies of Fire, Run, and No more dream are regularly repeated, but they also start working on the choreography of a new song “Black swan”. The choreography for the new song involves all 7 members but focuses on the modern dance capabilities of Jimin who will personate the black swan.

The song includes a dance break for Jimin. De dance coach gives him carte blanche to fill in the dance break. Jimin is very proud of that and works very hard. As the evenings are filled with catch-up dance lessons by Hobi, he prefers to work on his dance break early in the morning, before the other members seep in for the joined dance practices. Jin noticed that Jimin didn’t take breakfast when he left that morning at 6 AM. He approaches Jimin.

“Hey, Jimin I think you didn’t take breakfast this morning. You know that’s not a good idea, right?” Jimin answers “Yes, I know, but I didn’t want to make any noise in the kitchen and I wanted to leave as soon as possible.” Jin rumbles through his bag and hands over a cereal bar and a milk carton. Jimin replies gratefully “Thanks hyung! I’ll make sure to take one with me every morning.” Jimin sits down next to his bag and starts eating the cereal bar.

Jungkook hears the conversation while he was busy tying his shoes. He turns to Jimin: “You say that you leave at 6 to start practicing? I often leave at 6.30 to work out in the gym before dance practice. If it’s OK for you, I’ll get up a bit earlier as of tomorrow. We can walk to the studio together.” Jimin looks up to Jungkook with a grateful smile “You really want to do that? Thanks! To be honest I don’t like to walk alone in the dark.” Taehyung tunes in, popping in front of them without making a sound: “Jimin-ie is afraid of his own shadow”. Jimin whines “Thanks for your contribution, Tae”, and shoves Taehyung aside.

~ * ~

Jungkook also starts to stay behind for the extra evening training with Jimin and Taehyung. He focuses on Taehyung who needs additional training on hip hop style and synchronizing while Hobi continues to work with Jimin because Jimin will become one of the main dancers and that requires more skilled training.

But with Jungkook in the practice room, the atmosphere loosens up with jokes and pranks thrown all over the place, to J-hope's dismay. But one evening Jungkook is so tired that he decides to lay down on a sports mat during one of the breaks. Taehyung decides to tease him and starts playing with a large bouncing ball. He kicks in the direction of the maknae, and it lands right on top of Jungkook’s head. The younger jumps up making Taehyung shriek, turn around, and run away. Jungkook is not going to let it go and he starts chasing Taehyung around the practice room, through the hallway to enter the practice room via another door. When the younger one catches him, they both fall down exhausted. They struggle for a while. Hobi and Jimin cannot stop cackling and Jimin dramatically falls and proceeds to roll on the floor while laughing. When Hobi resumes the dance practice with Jimin, the two other boys decide to calm down and they fall asleep in each other’s arms from pure exhaustion. Jimin thinks: “So cute… “, but he cannot help himself wishing it was him.

~ * ~

On Thursday evening, Hobi cannot stay for the extra dance training. The first idea was to let Jungkook give the extra training, but Namjoon is working on a new song for the vocal line and wants to take advantage of the “free” evening to try things out with Jin and Taehyung.

Jimin prefers to continue working on his dance break, more specifically on the part where he is the black swan. He changes his clothes for a tight-fitting black shirt with a low V-neck and black legging to make it easier to get into his role. He dances barefoot. He starts the music and starts dancing. When Jimin dances, he is in his own world, music pulsing through his veins. He slides smoothly across the dance floor. He starts over and over again, perfecting every move and changing some other parts.

When Jungkook comes down from his own studio, he notices that there is still light in the practice room. “Strange”, he thinks, “I thought that Hobi was not giving dance practice tonight” otherwise he would have stayed to spend more time with Taehyung and Jimin, especially Jimin.

He smiles to himself at the idea of the elder’s beautiful, captivating smile. And if he’s honest with himself, he also thinks about that perfect round ass that haunts him. He looks through the window in the door and sees that it is only Jimin who is practicing. He stays there for a while to look at Jimin’s graceful movements, but he feels a bit sneaky like that. He decides to go in when the music stops. He catches Jimin sighing. Jimin is so caught up in his thoughts, that he does not notice the younger immediately. When Jungkook asks “How is rehearsal going?”, he jumps in surprise. With his hand clutched to his heart, he starts giggling. Jungkook moves up towards the dancer. Jimin sighs and passes his hand through his hair, giving Jungkook a good view on his beautiful neck. Jungkook gulps while his eyes hover over Jimin’s adam’s apple and partially exposed collarbones. When Jimin looks at him, he immediately focuses his eyes back on the other’s face. If Jimin caught him ogling, he acts as if he’s oblivious. Then he answers “I don’t know, it’s as if there are certain moves that I can’t get right. I tried to film myself, but I can’t get a complete view of the dance. Jungkook proposes “I can film you if you want. If I hold the camera, I can follow your movements and you will get the complete picture”. Jimin’s face lights up and gratefully accepts the proposal.

And that’s what they do for the coming hours: Jungkook films while Jimin dances. Then they look at the film together, discuss points of improvement, and start over again. With each review, they stand closer. In the end, there is no personal space between them anymore. And it feels natural as if they know each other for years. With each rehearsal, Jungkook becomes more entranced by the dancer.

After Jimin went for the Nth time through the dance break, he sinks to the ground with his arms and legs widespread. Jungkook takes a towel and walks up to him to sit down next to him. He starts dabbing the sweat from Jimin’s face and neck. “Everything OK?” he asks, “Not too tired?”. Jimin answers with a soft voice “I think I overdid it, my legs and arms are sore, and my shoulders ache.”

“I can give you a massage if you want”. Jimin huffs. Jungkook continues “I’m good at it, ask the hyungs. We have a physiotherapist available during lunch break and after singing practices. But Yoongi spends most of his time with him because Yoongi had a severe accident when he was younger, and the tough choreographies put a lot of burden on his shoulders. Therefore, the physiotherapist taught me how to give massages to relieve the pain of the other hyungs while he takes care of Yoongi.” Jimin lifts his head towards Jungkook and inspects his face in surprise. There is no hint of a joke on the younger’s face, so Jimin supposes that he speaks the truth.

Jungkook takes Jimin by his hand and biceps and helps him on his feet. The younger’s touch is so gentle that it leaves Jimin breathless. “I propose you take a shower while I gather a few things”. When he comes back to the practice room, he finds Jungkook sitting against the wall on the sports mat he used to sleep on last week. The younger looks up from his phone when Jimin approaches. He scrambles to his knees and asks Jimin to lay down on his back in the middle of the mat. “I’m going to start with your calves and your tights. Then you can turn on your stomach so that I can massage your back and your shoulders”. Jimin lays down. “I’ll start with your right leg. Can you bend it for me?” Jungkook starts working on the calve of his right leg while Jimin starts asking questions about Jungkook’s time as a trainee and as a member of BTS. Usually, Jungkook is not very talkative, but once he starts talking, there is no end to it. Jimin immerses in the story. He bends his arms to lean backward on his arms to be able to look at Jungkook.

They often smile at each other and their eyes lock regularly. After one of those smiling stares, Jungkook compliments Jimin: “I’ve never seen someone with such a beautiful smile”. Jimin laughs at that “Yeah, a lot of people say that. But I like the compliment, especially when it comes from you. And I like your smile too”. “Oh, is that so…” Jungkook replies with a coy smile but never losing eye contact. Then he focuses back on his hands and works his way up to the dancer’s thighs. “And I’ve never seen such thick thighs”, he says full of admiration. “Hoseok is also a dancer, but his thighs are not as muscular as yours.” But when his hands move a bit too close to the elder’s crotch for his liking, Jimin cackles “I don’t have a sore muscle there”, and he swats his hand away. They both blush at the idea. Jungkook blinks rapidly at the other’s crotch but averts his look right away “Not a good time to get hard”, he thinks. He lays Jimin’s right leg flat and bends the left leg. He starts again with the calve and works his way up to Jimin’s thigh, but this time he pays attention to not move too high up the inner thigh.

When he’s done with the legs, he asks Jimin to turn on his stomach. Jimin sighs inwardly, now he cannot look anymore into those beautiful doe eyes that always look back. Jungkook takes place over Jimin, a knee at each side of Jimin’s waist. Jimin lifts his head and looks a bit startled at Jungkook. The latter notices it and is quick to reassure him “I don’t want to give you the wrong idea. I could sit next to you while massaging, but then I cannot apply the same strength with my both hands. And I will be the one that ends up with a backache.” he adds laughing. Jimin nods in understanding. Jungkook starts massaging Jimin’s neck. He cannot help noticing that the boy in front of him has one of the most beautiful necks he has ever seen. To be honest, he never paid attention to someone’s neck before. But Jimin’s neck is something else. Before he knows it, he is rubbing his thumb softly over the mole there.

He gets back at the task at hand and works his way down to Jimin’s shoulders and then his back, untying all nods his hands can find. And Jungkook did not lie: his hands do wonders. They don’t speak anymore: Jungkook concentrates on his work and Jimin enjoys the treatment. While massaging, Jungkook cannot stop admiring Jimin’s body: his eyes glide over his muscular arms, his elegant wrists, and small hands while feeling the muscles in shoulders and back relax under the touch of his hands. While working down Jimin’s back, the younger moves backward on his knees, his ass accidentally touching the other’s ass. “Oh no, this is not happening”, he thinks in embarrassment. Luckily Jimin does not look bothered by it. He feels an upcoming desire to sit down to feel Jimin’s ass against his, but he fights it and moves further back so that their asses are not touching anymore. But it’s not easy to get rid of that giddy feeling in his lower stomach. When his hands move further down to Jimin’s lower back, he notices how small the dancer’s waist is.

When he’s finished, his thighs are trembling from staying upright on his knees. With his other hyungs he sits down on their asses while applying a massage, but he didn’t dare to do that with Jimin, remembering his worried reaction earlier. So he is relieved when he can sit down next to Jimin. He takes a last admiring look at Jimin’s perfect ass, before tapping the elder’s shoulder. He asks “Did you like the massage?” but he gets no reaction. He pokes his finger in Jimin’s side, but the elder does not move. It looks like Jimin is asleep. He gently shakes his arm to wake him up: “Jimin, wake up, we have to go home.” Jimin grumbles, rolls on his back and starts wiping his eyes. Jungkook smiles at that: “Jiminie hyung is cute when he sleeps”. Jimin stumbles on his feet, but his legs give in. Jungkook wraps an arm around his waist to stabilize him. Jimin thanks him for the massage: “Thanks Jungkook-ah, my neck, and shoulders are feeling much better, you really have golden hands.”

They take their belongings and leave the practice room but once outside, Jimin is still unsteady on his legs. Jungkook turns his back to Jimin and offers: “Jump on my back, I’ll carry you home.” Jimin hesitates but the offer is too tempting, so he jumps on the younger's back. They don’t say much during the walk home, and after a few minutes, Jungkook feels Jimin’s body relax. He smiles to himself because he really likes the feeling of Jimin’s arms around his neck and the warm breath in his neck. He overthinks the last two weeks: he likes all his hyungs very much, and with Taehyung he feels like they can become really good friends, but the feelings for Jimin are different. Thinking about Jimin with his beautiful smile and his eyes that turn in crescent moons warms his heart; thinking about Jimin’s mischievous smiles and lingering touches of tonight sets him on fire. In the morning he wakes up a little bit happier than usual, thinking of all the fun he will have with Jimin next to him.

When he enters the dorms, he kicks out his shoes and enters the living room with a sleeping Jimin on his back. Both Hobi and Taehyung jump up from the couch: “What happened? Is he sick? Is he injured?” Jungkook whispers: “No, no, he’s sleeping. Can you help me to put him down?” Hobi takes off his shoes, and Taehyung helps him on his feet to take off his vest. He places his shoulder under Jimin’s arm and guides him to the couch.

Jin asks “What have you done to the poor guy?” Jungkook answers thoughtfully “Well, I think that he’s a bit overworked, with all these extra dance hours. And with that dance break for Black Swan, he dances even more. So when he collapsed on the floor and complained about sore muscles, I proposed to give him a massage.”

Jin gets up from the couch and says to Jungkook “I have some leftovers from tonight’s dinner, I’ll warm a bowl for you two.” Jimin slowly wakes up in the meantime. Hobi asks him mischievously “And did you like the full-body massage?” “Full body massage?” Jimin questions “How many clothes did he ask you to take off?” “What?’ Jimin asks confused, while Jungkook whines “Hyung!”. “I’m joking!”, Hobi starts laughing, hitting Taehyung’s knees and body falling all over Taehyung’s lap. Jimin notices the confused look on his friend's face and he clarifies “He’s actually quite good at giving massages. The muscles in my shoulders and legs were so sore, and that’s all gone now. I really feel relaxed now.” When Jin returns with two bowls, they eat while having a pleasant conversation about how the newcomers have experienced the past two weeks. After having finished their late-night dinner, the five boys retract to their rooms.

~ * ~

Jimin meets Jungkook in the bathroom again. While brushing their teeth, Jimin looks at Jungkook through the mirror, bumps his shoulder against Jungkook’s, and asks playfully “And when do I get that full body massage?” Jungkook answers with a mischievous smile “When you’re ready to take off your clothes”. Now it is Jimin’s turn to snort. “Goodnight Kook-ah, see you tomorrow”. Jungkook smiles to himself “1 – 1 for the bathroom flirting contest”.

When Jimin lays in his bed he has a big smile on his face while he thinks back at the massage, especially at the first part of it. Who would have thought a month ago that popular Jungkook of BTS would be sitting between his legs while giving a massage? He will definitely get that full-body massage. And if he has to take off his clothes to get it, he will do it, but he will make sure that he’s not going to be the only one naked. And with these enjoyable thoughts, he falls asleep.

In the other room, Jungkook also thinks back at the massage with an even bigger smile on his face, staring at the ceiling of his room. He’s going to make work of luring Jimin into a full body massage. He sees himself already taking off Jimin’s shirt, taking off his own shirt. He wonders how it would feel skin against skin. The idea alone makes it a bit difficult to fall asleep.

Chapter Text

It’s been a month since Jimin and Taehyung joined BigHit and started training with BTS as the new members. The comeback is getting closer, which means more practicing, less eating, and frequent all-nighters. It starts to weigh down on Jimin and Taehyung, as it is their first comeback and it’s not like they have been training for a long time. But they don’t give up. They show their willpower and desire to show what they're worth, meaning that they’re working hard and improving a lot in a short span of time.

Jimin and Taehyung have varying schedules. There are singing lessons with the singing coaches for the whole group and also individual ones. During the individual lessons they learn singing techniques and Jimin feels that his voice becomes better and better. The singing coaches also work on accentuating what makes his voice so specific. He has a mellow and angelic voice and the more lessons he takes, the higher notes he can reach, blowing everybody away.

Taehyung, on the other hand, has a warm soulful baritone. It radiates warmth and comfort; it fits perfectly with Taehyung’s personality. After a month of singing lessons, the members agree - and the singing coaches alike - that his voice will sweep the fans off their feet and will bring them in a deep trance.

~ * ~

During a meeting earlier that month the members got to know what songs they’re going to perform for their comeback stage. Of course, they will perform the new songs on music shows. Before the music and award shows they will hold a number of mini-concerts for ARMY to introduce the two new members. During the mini-concerts they will perform four new songs; Black Swan, Autumn Leaves, Pied Piper, and jump and also three older songs: Fire, Run, and No More Dream.

Autumn Leaves is a slower, more emotional song. There will be no choreography, it is more focused on the vocal capacities of the seven members; each member can showcase his strengths. There is also a lot of synchronizing, between the vocal line, but also between the vocal and rap line. During practices for this song, it becomes very clear that the voices of Jungkook and Jimin blend very well and that it opens a lot of possibilities for the future.

Black Swan is not an upbeat song, but it requires a lot of skill. It is more a modern dance choreography, which is something new for the members and Taehyung. Not for Jimin though, he is a master in modern dance, that’s why this performance will be focused on his skills. The complete choreography requires also a lot of input from his side.

Jump is in the genre BTS is used to. These practices are the most exhausting. The extensive choreo with the dancing and rapping makes them all tired in no time, especially Jimin and Taehyung who still have to adapt to all the hard work. Not that they didn’t work hard before. No, they always worked hard, but never to that extend. This song gives Taehyung the opportunity to showcase his lower voice during his own part. During one of their vocal practices, while fooling around with Jungkook who was standing next to him, he surprises everyone by starting with an intense growl. They quickly convince him that he should definitely do this during the shows. That day Taehyung could not stop smiling.

Pied Piper is another story. When Jimin first heard the song, he was swept away. The title really represents the feeling it gives you. And he knows because he followed BTS as a fan before. The choreography is a bit more sensual. They are told to dance like they’re trying to seduce the audience. It is a bit difficult for all the members; Yoongi, Jin, and Namjoon are a bit awkward at the beginning, though Jin is making a lot of progress. Jungkook and J-hope on the other hand are not having too much trouble but Taehyung keeps making small mistakes. And regarding Jimin, Sonsungdeuk tells him that he is overdoing it, that he has to tone it down a bit. “You must look sensual, not like you are trying to sell sex”. That remark is enough for Taehyung and Jungkook to pester Jimin with it for the rest of the day.

During one of the practices, Jimin once again is told that he is being too sexy. ‘Jungkook please come forward’, their coach sighs waving over the youngest. The frustration dripping from his voice is also clearly showing on Jimin’s face. He just doesn’t get what he is doing wrong. Why is their coach saying that it looks like he is trying to sell sex? He is not! Jungkook comes standing next to Jimin. ‘Jimin, come stand next to me and watch Jungkook’s face’, Jimin walks over to his coach, his cheeks turning a light pink out of embarrassment. ‘Jungkook, show him how it is done please’. Jungkook nods and gets in position for the chorus. The music begins and Jimin starts focusing on Jungkook’s expressions: his little smirk that’s a bit mischievous, his lip-bite that is not too exaggerated but looks very natural, and the way his body is moving on the beat – even though he isn’t supposed to look at that-. Damn, Jeon Jungkook is so fucking sexy. When the chorus finishes, Jimin’s cheeks are a burning red color. He tries to act it off like he got very hot all of a sudden, which is not a lie if he’s honest. Now it’s Jimin’s turn. He tries his best, doing what he witnessed Jungkook doing, but clearly, it still isn’t what the coach wants. The coach starts scratching his hair in thought. He claps his hands: ‘Okay everybody, a little break. Jungkook please fix whatever is going on with Jimin. Jin good work, you’re getting better, keep it up. Taehyung comes to hear please, we’re going to work together on the mistakes you’re making. They all split up. The hyungs move to the back to drink from their bottle of water, trying to catch their breath. Taehyung and the coach take the center, where Taehyung has the necessary space to move. Jungkook and Jimin retreat to a corner.

Jimin giggles a bit nervously, it’s a situation he never thought he would be in. ‘Uhmm, I don’t really know what I’m supposed to fix, to be honest', Jungkook smiles shyly, big doe eyes looking down on him. This is not the same Jungkook from moments ago. The boy standing before him shyly shuffling his feet is somebody else than that sexy man who was dancing not even a few minutes ago. ‘Me neither’, Jimin answers with a mischievous smile. Quickly he puts one of his tiny hands up covering his mouth. A hand wraps softly around Jimin’s wrist and pulls it down. Jimin looks up at Jungkook trying to lock eyes with him. The younger’s large hand wrapped around his small wrist makes him feel things he hasn’t felt for a long time. ‘You always do that, covering your mouth. Why? You have a pretty smile’, Jungkook laughs softly. ‘I-…', but as soon as Jimin wants to answer – even though he doesn’t know what to say – the coach interrupts, announcing the break is over. Jungkook turns back to Jimin: ‘Listen, don’t overdo the lip bites or things like that, don’t overdo the body rolls either. Your eyes are the key. I've been looking at you, the way your eyes can give off such strong emotion is impressive. Add one of those pretty smiles on top and you’ve got it. He sticks out his fist, Jimin bumps it with his own and they go over to the others. After their short intermezzo, Jimin has no problem with his expression anymore.

Jimin and Taehyung surprise everyone with their hard work and with how well they can keep up with dance and vocals. Their contributions are not left without any praise. The others take every opportunity to compliment them, especially J-hope. His enthusiasm and the support from the others give them always that extra kick to keep going.

~ * ~

Only one week is left before they start the photoshoots and recordings for the teasers and the MVs. Jimin, Taehyung, Jungkook, and J-hope are wrapping up their last recordings for the song. Jimin isn’t completely satisfied with one of his parts in Black Swan, so he wants to try one last time. After his last trial, he searches for approval in Jungkook’s eyes, who looks fondly at him. With the applause from J-hope and Taehyung, he decides that he is done. They exit the recording studio, walking towards the elevators to go to the dance studio.

‘Tae-hyung, how did the meeting go? Do you have your stage names yet?’ Jungkook asks. Jimin and Taehyung were pulled away yesterday for a meeting about their stage names and their roles in the group.

‘V!’, Taehyung says in a low voice, smiling while sticking a peace sign in Jungkook’s face. The maknae slaps it away cackling. It is not that funny, but the two are going at it since they entered the recording studio. Jimin catches J-hope eye-rolling at the two, but the smile forming around his lips gives away what he really feels.

‘And you Jimin?’, Jungkook breaks off his play-fight with Taehyung to give him the opportunity to speak. ‘Hyung’, J-hope corrects him with a stern look. ‘Yes, sorry. What about you hyung?’, ‘I’m just sticking with Jimin’. ’Nice! You can join Jin-hyung and my team then’. He goes for a high-five. Jimin goes for it, but they seem to miss each other's hand, Jungkook’s slightly slapping the elder’s cheek. Before Jimin can react, two large hands are cupping his face. ‘Oooh! I’m so sorry hyung! I didn’t mean to hit you! Does it hurt? I'm so sorry!’. Jimin steps backward in slight panic: standing this close to Jungkook is not a good idea; he’s afraid that the others will notice that the younger makes him flustered. These days Jimin is being more affectionate, especially towards J-hope and Taehyung, but with the youngest, it is a bit different. And it’s not that Jungkook initiates a lot of skin-ship since that night in the practice room.

‘Yes, I’m okay, it’s okay, The other two are laughing their asses off at the scene unfolding before them. Before Jimin can do something, they are saved by the elevator doors going open on the floor they have to be at. J-hope and Taehyung – now going as V – hurry out of the elevator. Jimin starts following them but stops in his tracks as he notices that Jungkook stays behind in the elevator and pushes another button.

‘Aren’t you practicing with us tonight?’ Jungkook shakes his head ‘No, I’m going to spend some time in the recording studio tonight’. Jimin takes a step towards him. He doesn’t notice that he’s back in the elevator and that he’s not blocking the elevator censor. He raises an eyebrow curiously and asks, ‘What are you working on?’. ‘Well, I like making song covers. You probably know that already since you were a fan at first...’, Jimin cringes a bit even though he is right. ‘And... yeah, I don’t know. This one isn’t really working out. Jimin is about to ask which song he’s working on, but he’s interrupted by a ding and the elevator doors closing. Jimin turns around: ‘oh no!’. It's not the end of the world, but it is a bit inconvenient that he now has to go to the floor where Jungkook needs to be, and then go back to the one they were just at, meaning he will be too late for practice, and he hates to be late and getting scolded.

Jimin accepts his fate and leans against the elevator wall with a big sigh. Jungkook looks at him and an idea pops up: ‘Why don’t you help me out with this song?’, ’I-, Why me?’. Jimin doesn’t get it. Why would Jungkook want his help? His voice isn’t that good and Jin has more experience. ‘It’s a duet you see-’, Jungkook starts explaining while rubbing his hands together, getting shyer with each word. ‘and you have a more feminine voice.’, Jimin frowns. Jungkook quickly shakes his head, making it obvious he didn’t mean to offend Jimin. ‘There’s nothing wrong with that. You have a very beautiful voice, angelic at times, and it suits you well. The elevator doors open again when they arrive on the fourth floor. Jungkook blocks the doors from closing and looks at him with pleading eyes: ‘Please, let's try it at least. And if you don’t like it, or if you don’t feel comfortable with it, I’ll try to find another solution. What do you think, hyung?’.

How can Jimin say no to that. Those big doe eyes, soft voice begging him, and that last hyung. Everyone knows that Jungkook isn’t as inclined to call Jimin ‘hyung’, as he does with all the rest. Namjoon had already taken him aside, telling him that he has the right to put Jungkook in his place if he wants to. But Jimin doesn’t mind. Does Jungkook do it to pester him or because he has a lack of respect for Jimin? Maybe. Does it make Jimin feel special? A bit. So hearing that hyung must mean Jungkook really wanted his help. And why not, if this means he can spend more quality time with Jungkook?

‘Okay, let’s try. The face of the youngest lights up, smiling from ear to ear. He grabs Jimin’s wrist pulling him through the hallway to one of the recording studios. ‘Thank you, thank you so, so much! I will text J-hope-hyung that you’re helping me out with something and that he does not have to wait for you’. They enter the studio, Jungkook leans against the door pulling his phone out to send the quick message.

‘Okay, let’s start! The song I'm covering is we don’t talk anymore. Do you know it?’. Jimin thinks for a moment, but shakes his head: 'No I'm sorry, never heard it'. Jungkook scrunches his nose and then walks over to the computer on the other side of the room. ‘Then let’s start with listening to it. I already have the lyrics printed out, he opens YouTube and starts playing the song. Jimin comes closer and gets offered the chair to sit in, which he gladly accepts. While Jimin is listening to the song and tries to find out which part Jungkook wants him to sing, the youngest enters the other room to get the lyrics. Jungkook takes a bit longer than expected, the song is already over so Jimin replays the song to get familiar with the melody.

~ * ~

What they don’t know is that, when J-hope received Jungkook’s message, he shared it immediately with Taehyung. They had laughed at the turn of events, snickering over how suggestive the message really sounded. Hobi snickers “Jungkook has found a new reason to buy alone-time with Jimin.”

~ * ~

Finally, Jungkook comes back, holding his phone up. ‘J-hope-hyung says it’s okay, Jimin nods taking the sheet of paper with the lyrics.

When they sing the song for the first time, they laugh a lot and it does not sound very good. Jimin gets shy throughout the first dry run, and when he gets shy, he gets very clingy: he touches Jungkook’s arms, his back, his waist, puts his head regularly on Jungkook’s shoulder, and Jungkook snickers and squeaks through his part of the song, not used to being touched that much. But they both have a big smile on their faces.

The more they sing the song, the better it sounds. They realize that their voices blend surprisingly well. They start looking at each other during the parts where they synchronize their voices, and after a few trials, they seem to lose themselves in each other’s eyes.

And that’s not the only thing where they find each other: they also learn that they are both perfectionists and that they are not quickly satisfied with the result. After a few trials, they agree to record the song. They listen to the result, shoulder against shoulder. When the song ends, Jimin leans into Jungkook’s space, hand on his shoulder, and asks hesitantly “are you ok with the result?”. Jungkook turns to him, scratches his neck, and says: “Honestly? No, not yet. What’s your opinion?”. Jimin laughs, bringing his hand to his mouth “I’m glad you’re not ok with it. I really don’t want this to end up on YouTube.” Jungkook sits down in the chair in front of the computer to replay the recording. Jimin leans against the desk in front of Jungkook. The younger regularly stops the recording to discuss what can be improved. While discussing they both seem to gravitate to each other because at a certain moment their knees are touching.

They agree on several working points, and they start rehearsing the song again. It’s far after midnight when Jungkook proposes to record the song for a second time. They listen to it together and are somewhat but not completely satisfied. Jungkook looks at Jimin and says: “I’m still a bit hesitant about the result. If you don’t mind, I would like to ask Namjoon for advice.” Jimin nods. “Let’s see if he is still in his studio.” Jungkook moves towards the door but he notices that Jimin stays behind. He opens the door and asks “Don’t you want to join me so you can see his studio?”. It takes Jimin exactly two steps, eager to see Namjoon’s studio. Jungkook nocks and waits for Namjoon to answer. When he hears “Come in!” he opens the door and lets Jimin enter first. Jimin looks around with big eyes while Jungkook asks Namjoon if he wants to come over to listen to their recording. “Of course!” he answers, always eager to help his members out. When they are back in Jungkook’s studio, the younger invites Namjoon to take place in the seat in front of the PC. Jungkook sits down on the desk on the left side of Namjoon. This way he can register Namjoon’s facial expressions when he listens to the recording. Jimin follows Jungkook’s example and takes place at the right side of Namjoon. Namjoon listens attentively, but his face does not give away a lot of emotions, so Jimin starts biting his nails.

When the song comes to an end, Namjoon takes a deep breath before talking “One thing is sure, you and Jimin’s voices absolutely work together, no question about that. It’s, … I don't have enough words to describe the emotions they unleash”, and he places his right hand on his heart. Jimin breaks in a burst of shy laughter, bends over, putting his head on Namjoon’s shoulder, his small hand around his biceps. Namjoon stiffens a bit at that, but he knows that Jimin likes skinship, and he tries to get used to it. When Jimin is done laughing, he takes place on the desk again. After a while Namjoon continues “Jungkook, you know how much I appreciate your talent… but wow, Jimin…”, and he places his right hand on Jimin’s thigh, “you made a lot of progress since you arrived. This song has so much potential, although I think it still needs some work.” From the corner of his eyes, Jimin sees Jungkook shuffle. Jungkook looks away from Namjoon and seems to poke his tongue around in his mouth.

Namjoon plays the recording again and stops it regularly to indicate the working points. Jungkook and Jimin thank Namjoon for his help. When Namjoon leaves the recording studio, Jungkook turns to Jimin “What do you think? Is it ok to call it a night and work further on it tomorrow evening?”. Jimin walks over to Jungkook who is now sitting at the table. He watches as Jimin comes closer. Jimin places a hand on his knees and says: “I’m sorry Jungkook, but I still have those dance practices with Taehyung and J-hope-hyung. I can’t abandon these extra training hours”.

Jungkook tries, but cannot hide his disappointment and looks down, pouting when hearing the words. The younger looks so sad, Jimin starts feeling bad. He leans against the other’s knees and puts a hand under Jungkook’s chin forcing him to look up. He cups his small hands around Jungkook’s jaws and while looking in these big doe eyes he says “Hey, I really enjoyed working on this cover song with you, and I want to finish it too, but I can’t stop following the dance practices Bighit has told me to follow. You know that.”

They stare in each other’s eyes for a very long time. Neither of them moves. It looks like Jungkook is leaning in but then he breaks the stare and looks away. He scratches his neck and says quietly “let’s go home”. Jimin nods and looks at his feet while taking a step back. While Jungkook turns the PC off, he swallows a lump down, a little bit disappointed. Jimin isn’t sure if he is reading the situation correctly, but it looked like Jungkook was leaning in for a kiss. When they take the elevator down, Jungkook continues to look at his feet, he doesn’t dare to look Jimin in the eyes. They leave the recording studio in silence.

On their walk home, Jimin breaks the heavy weighing silence and says softly “I had a lot of fun tonight”, and he bumps his shoulder softly against the shoulder of the younger. Jungkook looks at him with a shy smile on his lips and nods “Me too, I really like working with you”. The silence continues. Jimin leans into Jungkook’s shoulder and lays his hand on his lower back “You know what? Another night off won’t kill me. Let me follow the extra dance practice tomorrow night. And the evening after we can work on the song again. What do you think about that?” Jungkook’s eyes light up, as far as it is visible in the dark streets of Seoul. Jungkook grabs his arms: “Are you serious?! Omg, Jimin you just made me the happiest person on earth!”. Out of nowhere, Jimin feels strong arms wrapping around his small body, hugging him tightly. For a second, he forgets to think. Jeon Jungkook is embracing him! As quick as those arms are around him, they vanish again. Jungkook looks shocked at his impulsive action, thinking he crossed another boundary. He turns around, continuing his walk home. Jimin has to speed up so he can walk next to Jungkook who seems to avoid eye contact again.

Then Jungkook speaks up: “That extra night with me won’t kill you, but Hobi-hyung sure will”. They both grin.

They continue their way shoulder against shoulder, their hands rubbing against each other. Before entering the dorm, Jungkook closes his hand around Jimin’s hand for the briefest of time, squeezing it slightly, and then they go inside.

~ * ~

When Jimin exits the bathroom after the afternoon sessions, he receives a text message from Jungkook that he arrived at the studio. He is in the same studio they were in two nights ago. Jimin is excited and hurries up. He has not the patience to wait for the elevator and takes the staircase, taking two stairs at once.

When he arrives at the door of the studio, he is surprised to find Jungkook leaning against the door frame. He opens the door bowing when Jimin passes by. ‘Milady’, he says with a smug grin. Jimin immediately turns around and gives him a slap on his rock-hard chest.

‘Don’t start with me'.

He enters the room smiling at Jungkook’s startled face. When Jimin notices he isn’t following he sighs: ‘I was just joking. Come sit down. You look like a lost puppy’. Jungkook strides towards the table and Jimin, with a pout on his face. ‘Not funny’, he whines which makes Jimin laugh. At the beautiful sound, Jungkook’s eyes light up, his pout disappearing like snow in the sun.

‘Okay, let’s go to work Jimin-ssi', Jungkook did not intend to make a joke. But the older one burst out laughing throwing his head back. ‘What, what, what?’, Jungkook’s confusion grows with every ‘What’. Jimin tries to answer, but he can’t control his laughter. Through a few breaths, he is able to utter some words. ‘Why... why are you saying that so weird!’, Jungkook huffs: ‘What weird?’. Jungkook does not get what Jimin means. He said a completely correct and logical sentence. Then it downs on him. He smiles, feeling like a fox knowing how to play with his prey. So he starts teasing, not giving the elder any rest.

‘What do you mean, Jimin-ssi?’

‘Why are you laughing, Jimin-ssi?’

‘Ah Jimin-ssi, you should really focus’

‘Ooh, Jimin-ssi'

‘Jimin-ssi!’

Jimin can’t stop laughing. Gasping for air, but combusting again at every ‘Jimin-ssi’. There is literally no reason for him to react like this, it’s just a polite way to address him. But it’s just the way Jungkook says it. How bad he wants to; he can’t explain why it sets him off that much and so sudden. Jimin suddenly feels himself toppling over. He loses his balance, crashing onto the ground. ‘Are you hurt’, all the playfulness in Jungkook’s voice disappears. Jimin stays down, finally relaxing. The shadow of a figure cast over him. He smiles at Jungkook. ‘Yes, I’m fine', he rubs his face trying to come to his senses. ‘Let’s get to work’. Jungkook offers him a hand and helps him back on his feet. Jimin starts setting up the computer, not noticing Jungkook who is looking him over. Jungkook makes a mental note. ‘This might be very useful in the future, he thinks.

The next two hours they spend their time more seriously. They record a few times, putting Namjoon’s advice in action. Finally, they decide that they are done with that part. Jungkook starts assembling and editing everything together, Jimin looking over his shoulder, like a little kid who is interested in what is happening. When Jungkook is done he plays it for Jimin. Jimin gets goosebumps. He did not know his voice can sound like that, especially while harmonizing with Jungkook’s beautiful voice.

Jimin didn’t notice that he had been listening with an open mouth. When the song ends a big hand squeezes his cheek, shaking his head o so lightly. ‘I guess our Jimin-ssi likes it’. Jimin turns around, his small hand grabbing Jungkook’s wrist and pulling it down softly. He doesn’t let go of it, not yet. ‘Like it? I freaking love it!’. Out of excitement, Jimin starts blabbering non-stop: ‘When are we going to upload it? I'm so excited! But only if you are ok with it, of course. What will the reactions be like? Positive, no doubt. Who could hate a song you sang...’ and he slaps his hand against Jungkook’s chest. Jungkook looks at him with adoration. This Jimin who looks like an over-excited puppy is something different than the seductive Jimin in dance practice. Jungkook doesn’t mind, he likes both Jimins. Jungkook gets shocked by his own thoughts. As friends, of course, he thinks. He likes both Jimins as a friend and as a Hyung. Nothing more. Sure? No.

‘Earth to Jungkook-ah. Did you hear what I said?’

Jungkook snaps back to reality, seeing a small hand wave before his face. He tries to catch it, but the hand is quickly pulled back. His focus is now on the smiling face of the boy to who the hand belongs. ‘Uhm’, Jungkook turns around in embarrassment. He didn’t mean to stare. ‘Of course, I heard what you said. I was just thinking what the title could be. I can’t place your name beside it, not yet’. Jimin didn’t think about that. His and Taehyung’s identity is supposed to stay hidden until they are presented as the newest members. Jimin puts his chin on his hand, thinking how they can overcome this small obstacle. ‘Oh wait, I just ask a producer. We also kind of need their permission to upload it to our YouTube channel', Jungkook chimes. Jimin looks up: ’Wait, permission? And you come up with this now’. ‘I forgot, oopsie’, Jungkook scrunches his nose.

It's been 10 minutes and they finally have a response from one of the producers. The cover is approved, and everything is filled in on the account. They just have to push the upload button. Jimin and Jungkook are staring at it, in complete silence. After a while, Jungkook decides to hit the button but Jimin stops him. ‘Let me hold your hand, please. Or else I think I'm gonna faint’. Jungkook looks at the boy next to him. He raises an eyebrow but offers his hand. Jungkook doesn’t know why, but Jimin needing to hold his hand for support makes him feel good and happy. Holding hands tightly, Jungkook presses ‘upload’.

5%

10%

50%

75%

90%

95%

99%

UPLOADED

~ * ~

Exhausted, both Jimin and Jungkook arrive at the dorms. When walking home they had decided to wait until the next morning to look at the reactions. Even though they are super curious, they manage to not open their phones and look up their cover song.

Jimin is brushing his teeth in the bathroom. His eyelids are slowly closing and opening. He feels himself falling asleep, but he tries to complete his nightly routine. Jungkook enters to brush his teeth. While brushing he looks suspiciously at the elder who was quietly dozing off. The toothbrush hanging loosely in his mouth. Jungkook smiles at how cute sleepy Jimin looks. After a few times nodding off and snapping awake, Jimin decides to pull down the toilet seat and take place on it. This doesn’t help much; he almost falls asleep. Jungkook starts pitying him. He finishes brushing his teeth, goes with a comb quickly through his hair, and then squats down in front of the elder. No bathroom flirting contest tonight. He softly grabs Jimin’s face with one hand and with the other his toothbrush.

‘This is no place to fall asleep, Jimin-ah', his fondness is seeping through his voice, leaving formalities behind. But not on Jimin’s watch: ’Be careful. I’m two years older than you'. Jimin was trying to sound strict but his sleepiness doesn’t let that happen. Jungkook giggles at the cuteness of it all. ‘Not now. Let me be the hyung for once’. He puts down the toothbrush and gives Jimin some water. After that, Jungkook also helps him washing his face and combing his hair. When his routine was completely done, Jimin tried to get up planning on stumbling to his bed to pass out. Jungkook on the other hand doesn’t let him. In no time he sweeps Jimin off his feet, carrying him to his room. A little yelp escapes Jimin’s mouth, but nothing else as he is too tired to react. At Jimin’s door, Jungkook tries to enter as quietly as possible to not wake up J-hope, who is Jimin’s roommate. Searching soundless for a bed in the complete darkness is difficult, but Jungkook manages. He puts Jimin down, the older one already fast asleep. Jungkook covers him with a blanket he finds at the end of the bed. But he doesn’t leave. He just sits on the edge. Even though he can’t see Jimin, he hears his steady, deep breaths. It calms Jungkook. He suddenly gets the itch to caress the sleeping elder. Stretching his hand out, he feels the soft hair slipping through his fingers. He starts stroking his hair, his whole body filling up with warmth. It makes Jungkook not want to leave, so he doesn’t. He gets under the blankets on the other side, face towards Jimin’s back. He carefully wraps an arm around his small waist. Feeling Jimin’s body against him makes him feel at ease. It makes him happy to hold the older in his arms, but there is also some kind of fear. If Jungkook is feeling what he thinks he’s feeling, and if Jimin feels the same, this can cause a lot of problems. His anxiety starts to rise, but he tries to focus on the steady breath of the boy in his embrace. Not long after, Jungkook falls into a deep sleep, a little smile forms on his lips.

~ * ~

Jimin wakes up confused. The last events of the night are fuzzy. He sits up trying to remember how he managed to get into bed when he remembers quite well that he almost fell asleep on the toilet. He turns to look at the other side of the bed. ‘Jungkook, how did I-’. Jungkook isn’t there. Strange, Jimin thinks, he recalls the warmth of another body next to him. Was it a dream then? Jimin shakes it off and makes his way towards the small kitchen. He is starving.

Yoongi, Taehyung, and J-hope are all sitting at the table, chomping down on sugary cereal or a protein bar. Jimin takes place next to Taehyung and pours himself a generous amount of the cheap cereal. It’s quiet, everyone obviously still tired.

‘You two came home late’.

Jimin looks up from his breakfast meeting J-hope's questioning gaze. The others at the table stop their actions. They obviously want to know too, but J-hope was the only one brave enough to say anything. J-hope looks at the others around the table and adds “It was even so late that Jungkook didn’t find the way to his own bed”. Yoongi snorts at that.

Jimin answers softly ‘Oh, I'm sorry if we woke you up hyung. We tried to be as quiet as possible'.

‘You didn’t wake me. I just saw this morning that Jungkook was sleeping in your bed. So, it must have been a lot of fun. Fun enough to skip another extra dance lesson?’ J-hope stands up walking towards the sink. He washes his bowl and spoon and takes place again in front of Jimin, arms folded. Yoongi resumes eating and scrolling on his phone, ears still sharp to catch everything the two are saying. Taehyung on the other hand does not hide his curiosity. He stares at Jimin, chin on his hand and his protein bar cast aside. Jimin feels like he is being scolded by J-hope, and Taehyung the little shit he is is enjoying it. ‘Hyung I thought you were okay with me skipping another practice. You should have told me if you weren’t. I wouldn’t have done it in that case’. Guilt overwhelms Jimin, he can’t shake off the feeling that by spending another evening with Jungkook, he is disappointing the dance leader. It is quiet and then out of nowhere J-hope bursts out laughing when he sees Jimin’s pout. ‘Ah, Jimin-ah, I'm just joking. Of course, I don’t mind you making a cover with the maknae, especially when I see how happy it makes him’. The three others look confused at J-hope. This is a turn of events neither of them expected, thinking J-hope was serious. The latter stands up, making his way to Jimin to embrace him. He keeps apologizing until he is seated back in place.

There is no time for the others to react if they are even able to because Jungkook comes crashing into the kitchen.

‘Jimin!’, he shouts. In his excitement, he manages to hit his hip against the counter.

‘Hyung’, Yoongi and J-hope say in unison.

‘Yeah, yeah’, Jungkook waves them off while rubbing the sore spot on his hip. He stands next to Jimin, who is looking at him not knowing what to say or do. He feels three pairs of eyes on him which makes him a bit uncomfortable. Ignoring the tsk’s from the hyungs who do not like all these informalities, Jungkook pushes a phone in his hands. ‘Hyung, look!’, he says. On the phone was their cover song playing. Jimin looked at the views and the likes. He can’t believe his eyes. The song has been up for one night and the video is already nearing the 2M views. Seeing the amazement on Jimin’s face, Jungkook scrolls down to the comments. These are filled with hearts and compliments.

J-hope and Taehyung also quickly browse to the song on their phone to read the comments along with them.

Fans are praising Jungkook’s vocals and are theorizing who is the other voice, who sings so angelically and fits so well with Jungkook. Some fans say it’s just another K-pop idol while others theorize it’s one of the new members who will soon be introduced during the comeback of BTS. And of course, there are the ones crying that it’s probably Jungkook’s girlfriend. It makes Taehyung and Jimin so excited over their comeback where they will be introduced to the fans.

~ * ~

Throughout the day, the maknae-line takes every opportunity to look on SNS. Taehyung teases them with some of the comments. There really are a lot of people that think he is Jungkook’s girlfriend, Jimin thinks. This makes the insecurity about his voice rise up again. Seeing all those reactions assuming he is a girl, gives him an irky feeling. At the end of the day, Jimin isn’t as excited anymore as the other two.

During one of the breaks, Taehyung approaches Jungkook. He knows his best friend very well and sees immediately when something is bothering him. Jimin can’t hide anything from Taehyung, even if he tries his utmost.

‘Jungkook-ah, have you noticed that Jimin is getting bothered? He even looks a bit sad’.

Jungkook looks at the boy stretching in the middle of the room. Jungkook marvels at Jimin’s ass which is on full display while stretching his hamstrings. For a second he forgets the question he had been asked, but Taehyung pokes a finger in his waist bringing Jungkook back to reality. ‘No, I didn’t notice, sorry. But of course, I don’t know him as well as you do’, ‘Well, he is. And my guess is because of the comments assuming he is your girlfriend’. Jungkook frowns, not understanding why that would bother Jimin. ‘Jimin has been bullied a lot because of his high voice. They kept calling him a girl and said some pretty nasty stuff to him. Since then, his voice has been such big insecurity for him. I’m sometimes still surprised he dared to audition. So-’. Jungkook doesn’t need to hear more. At the mention of Jimin being bullied because of his beautiful, angelic voice, his blood starts boiling. He walks away from Taehyung, who is still in the middle of his speech, towards his hyung who is now laying on the ground.

‘Hyung, can I ask you something in all honesty?’. Jimin looks up confused. ‘What do you mean?’, he asks, going back to stretching. Jungkook looks at him. The way Jimin can bend himself so easily in different positions turns him slightly on. He shakes his head mentally. ‘Not the time to thirst over him, Jungkook’, he scolds himself. ‘The comments about you being my girlfriend... It bothers you. Right?’, Jungkook hesitantly says. Jimin stops what he is doing, mid-bent with his nose against the ground. After a few seconds of silence, he sighs and gets back up. He turns around to face Jungkook but keeps his eyes on the ground. A single strand of his brown hair hangs in front of his face and Jungkook feels a great urge to brush it back in place. His hand goes out to do just that, but at the same moment Jimin looks up. Quickly Jungkook pulls his hand back. Jimin’s eyes are filled with sadness. ‘I know it shouldn’t bother me, but I don’t like being called a girl and hearing I have a feminine voice. I’m a boy, always have been. Okay, I don’t dress very masculine and I'm not manly built like you or Namjoon-hyung. And yes, my voice is pretty high. But that’s not something I could choose. And...’.

Jungkook places a hand on Jimin’s shoulder to calm him down before he starts crying. ‘Please don’t ever feel bad about your voice. It is so special, beautiful, angelic, ethereal, it synchronizes exceptionally well, not only with my voice but with the voice of all members … Do I have to go one?’ He smiles at Jimin, who gives him one back. ‘Do you really think so?’. ‘Did you really ask that question? To me? If I wasn’t serious, I wouldn’t want to make this cover with you. Or I wouldn’t have gushed to the hyungs how mesmerizing your voice is.’. Jimin seems to calm down and looks happier now, which makes Jungkook happy too. He stands up offering his hand to hoist Jimin up. ‘By the way, you are way too good to be my girlfriend’, he adds with a mischievous smile. ‘Aisshh’, Jimin swings his leg towards the smirking Jungkook, but he is already dashing out the practice room.

‘Jungkook-ah, where are you going!’, J-hope yells. A faint ‘bathroom’ comes from the hallway. ‘This kid, he had the whole time’, J-hope shakes his head. ‘Ah, hobi-ah, leave it be. The boy was busy’, Jin laughs. With that everyone’s head turns to look at Jimin. Seeing all those stares, Jimin looks down in embarrassment, his cheeks heating up.

Taehyung moves towards Jimin and asks “What did he say? That looked like a serious conversation for once.”. Jimin smiles at Taehyung and answers “You always have the right words to cheer me up, but now you have serious competition.”

Chapter Text

Today there is a photoshoot planned for the comeback of BTS. Jimin and Taehyung are nervous because it is their first photoshoot. Jimin left earlier with Yoongi that morning because BigHit decided that they will get a new hair color. They will go to the shooting location in a separate car, while the others will go in the van.

Jungkook is already dressed and ready. He wears a black and white chequered shirt that hangs open over a white t-shirt and black slacks. He hangs around with Taehyung in a room between the dressing room and the set while they wait for the other members to be ready. ‘When is it going to be my time’, Taehyung whines. He falls like a drama queen to the ground, spreading all his limps. Jungkook looks up from the game on his phone: ‘I thought they said you will be last, after Jimin’. Another whine comes from the boy on the floor. Then another. And another. Jungkook looks up again, getting the hint that Taehyung wants some attention.

When Jimin appears in the door, Jungkook is blown away by his appearance. The stylist noonas turned the black-haired boy into a blond angel. He’s dressed in a white t-shirt in a very thin fabric and with a large v-neck exposing his beautiful collarbones and a large part of his chest. Dressed up like this, and with blue-grey lenses, he is the embodiment of ethereal beauty.

‘Wow’, Jungkook says under his breath. Taehyung snaps his neck towards the sound and smirks when he sees Jungkook. Jungkook looks like he is ready to devour Jimin.

When walking up to Jungkook and Taehyung, he sees the look of admiration in both their eyes. He shivers under the admiring gaze of Jungkook who gives him a full body check before locking eyes with him. Jimin’s shy, expectant smile changes into a mischievous grin. And Jungkook can’t look away. At first sight, you could think of Jimin as an innocent angel, but that boy walking up to him is nothing less than a sinful creature.

With his eyes still on Jungkook, he says to Taehyung “Taehyung-ah, it’s your turn”. “Finally!’, he calls out. Taehyung walks up to him, looks at his t-shirt, and says “I hope they’ll give me something more decent to wear. I can see your nipples through it.” And at that, he pinches Jimin’s chest. Jimin quickly crosses his arms over his chest while sticking his tongue out.

Taehyung chuckles and walks away while Jimin stumbles further in Jungkook’s direction, stopping right in front of him. Jungkook is leaning against the back of a couch. When the tips of their shoes touch, Jimin nudges his right foot in between the younger’s feet to make him spread his legs a bit so that he can stand in between them. He feels Jungkook’s thighs against his. Jungkook keeps locking Jimin’s gaze but then he sights and grabs Jimin by the waist, getting him to stand even closer. He rests his cheek against Jimin’s chest. He feels the muscles hidden underneath the thin fabric. Jimin feels Jungkook’s warm breath, he can’t help but shudder. He places one hand on Jungkook’s head and starts caressing through his hair. Jungkook looks up to Jimin to meet his eyes, chin resting on the place where his cheek was a second ago. Jimin looks down and lowers his gaze to Jungkook’s lips.

“Are you doing this on purpose?”

Jimin’s breath catches in his throat when he hears the low voice coming from Jungkook. “Jimin, you have to stop this. I can’t hold it anymore. You drive me crazy, you know that right?”, he whispers still in that low voice. Jimin doesn’t reply but lowers his head a bit more while tugging at Jungkook’s hair to get his mouth in the right angle. For a second he thinks of lowering down and press his lips against Jungkook’s soft-looking one’s. He feels himself going down, but stops himself. This is dangerous territory, Jimin thinks.

Jungkook looks longingly at Jimin’s full, luscious lips and then into his eyes. “Hyung...”, he feels tears pricking in the corner of his eyes. He wants to kiss Jimin so badly, but he knows it’s a bad idea. He wants to tell Jimin everything. That Jimin is beautiful. That Jimin makes him happy. That he likes Jimin. That he wants Jimin. But he just lowers his head and nods it in defeat.

“I’m sorry, I got carried away. We can’t do this. It’s not okay. You’re Jungkook, a member of BTS. I’m Jimin, a soon-to-be member of BTS.”. Jungkook feels his heart squeeze together. “We have to consider our career, and what’s even more important, the career of the other members. We can’t risk their success because of us.” Jimin lifts Jungkook head by cupping his chin in his hands and bows his head until his forehead touches Jungkook’s forehead. After a few seconds the younger replies in a low voice “I guess you’re right. It’s stupid of me to hope for something more”.

Jimin feels a bit hurt, but he knows Jungkook is right. It is not that long that he and Tae have joined BTS, and he cannot be the cause to be thrown out of the band. Jungkook sniffs, still trying to keep the tears at bay:” I like you, hyung”. Jimin places a small kiss on Jungkook’s forehead and slowly backs away. Jungkook takes his hand and caresses his fingers as long as he can until Jimin is too far and Jungkook has to let go of his hand.

~*~

The photoshoot consists of individual photos, photos of the whole band, and photos in subunits. Now that they are seven, there will be 3 subunits. For the subunits they let faith decide by pulling a paper. Hobi, Jungkook, and Jimin form a subunit of three, while Taehyung forms a subunit with Yoongi. The third subunit consists of Jin and Namjoon.

When the individual photos are taken, the other members try to rest. Some of them fall asleep on their chair. They are all worn out by the heavy schedules. But the maknae line prefers to stay together. The sadness Jimin and Jungkook felt from their little moment subside the longer the time goes on. They look and laugh at each other’s photoshoot. Anyway, the teasing helps to calm down the nerves of the newcomers. They get a lot of praise from the photographers: Taehyung for being a natural beauty and Jimin for being very photogenic.

When they look at Jimin’s photos, Jungkook shoves his elbow in Jimin’s side and teases him “You’re going to kill ARMY with your sultry looks”. “Is that why you like me so much lately?” Jimin quickly replies. Taehyung looks from one to the other with a questionable look on his face. Taehyung notices that the dynamic between the two has changed, and not in a direction that he practicably likes. He’s used to Jimin’s flirting antics, but he feels that he’s putting more effort into it than usual.

The subunit of Hobi, Jimin, and Jungkook goes pretty flawless. They have a lot of fun during the shooting, especially Jungkook and Jimin. Jungkook likes fooling around, but he’s always pretty serious about his job, and a photoshoot is part of the job. But this time it looks like Jungkook is more playful than professional. It’s not that Hobi does not like the playful interaction between Jimin ad Jungkook: he always had a week spot for the maknae, and Jimin is such a ball of happiness that he liked the boy from the first moment they met. And seeing them getting along so well, warms his heart. On the other hand, Hobi also feels like he’s just third-wheeling, but he tries to fit in as well as possible. He also notices the dynamic that is around the two and gets a bit weary. Jimin and Jungkook have recently been very clingy and flirty with each other. And not in the way all the boys are for the fanservice that is to an extend asked of them. Even off-camera they are by each other’s side, constantly messing around. Yes, Taehyung is with them most of those times and they goof around with him too. But there is obviously a different dynamic towards Taehyung. He makes a mental note to talk about it with Namjoon later on today or tomorrow.

~*~

To promote the two new members, they make an extra subunit of Taehyung and Jimin. Jimin is wearing his white t-shirt while Taehyung wears a blue shirt with purple spots that hangs open over a plain white t-shirt. The shirt contrasts beautifully against Taehyung’s golden skin, dark brown eyes, and dark hair. The photographer takes two types of photos: the first type of photos is playful with wide smiling Jimin and Taehyung. They both have a very beautiful smile, but quite different: Jimin’s smile is very bright while Taehyung’s smile is boxy, but nevertheless as charming as Jimin’s smile.

The second set of photos plays the exotic card where the photographer captures Jimin’s captivating beauty and Taehyungs mysterious looks.

The photographer is blown off his socks by Taehyungs natural beauty. He sees a lot of opportunities for advertising.

It’s already evening when they have to shoot the photos with the 7 members. They need to change clothes and have their makeup fixed. This will take time, so BigHit was so kind to have food delivered to the location. It’s not that they are allowed to eat a lot because they still need to fit in their pants.

‘Ah, I’m starving!’

J-hope runs to the table where their food the buffet is stalled out. He grabs the chopsticks and gives them out to the rest. “Suga-hyung! Come eat!”, J-hope calls out when he notices that he still has an extra pair of chopsticks in his hand. Jimin, who had just taken a big bite of jjajangmyeon, tries to swallow it quickly. “He is with the stylist-noonas, hyung”, Jimin answers, almost choking. J-hope makes a sound of understanding and grabs a bowl for himself. They are all seated on the chairs the staff had placed there. “Make sure you don’t spill on your clothes, boys”, a manager tells them when he passed by. “We would never, manager-nim", Jin replies. He is about to take a huge bite, but the noodles slip between his chopsticks nearly landing on the floor. When the manager sees it happen, he gasps in panic. “I’m getting napkins, and a bib for you Seokjin”. The members stay quiet until the manager left. “Manager-nim almost killed you, hyung”, Namjoon remarks. Jin who is still a bit shocked about the almost catastrophe sets the bowl under his chin in order to not let it happen again. “You don’t say”, he takes a bite.

Everyone is enjoying the take-out, something different than the usual chicken breast with plain rice. Jimin on the other hand tries to subtly take as few bites as possible. He smiles at people he makes eye contact with, trying to convince them that he will devour it all. He doesn’t want to and he is not going to. Jimin is sure that if he eats it all, he will be bloated and very unattractive for the last photoshoot. And his already existing bad body image is not helping. No one is noticing it, Jimin thinks. But someone is noticing it. Jungkook who had placed himself on the chair next to Jimin, for reasons only he knows, notices that Jimin's bowl is barely getting empty. His suspicion grows when he sees the older one about to take a bite and then putting his chopsticks down a few times. Taehyung had told him about Jimin’s not always a healthy relationship with food and his bad body image. Jungkook puts two and two together. He knows what Jimin is trying to do and he is not going to let him.

Because the whole day has been busy, there was barely any time to eat. Jungkook was able to put a whole protein bar in his mouth before leaving, but Jimin said he overslept and used that as an excuse to not eat. The thing is Jimin had not overslept. Jungkook knows this because before going to the kitchen to quickly stuff his mouth he had sneaked into Jimin en J-hope's shared room. He wanted to show Jimin a funny theory a fan had made about their cover if he was awake. Which he was.

While the hyungs including Yoongi -who just came back from hair and make-up-, are listening to Taehyung who is telling a crazy story about some girl from college, Jungkook turns to Jimin. “are you enjoying your meal, hyung”, he asks. Jimin, who had taken the opportunity to stop eating by listening to Taehyung, turns his attention to Jungkook. When he sees the caring look in the maknae’s eyes, he feels caught.

“I’m not that hungry, to be honest”

“Bullshit”

Jimin is surprised by Jungkook’s stern voice. He sees Namjoon look at them from the corner of his eyes and then turning back to Taehyung. Jimin doesn’t know what to say, Jungkook caught him red-handed. ‘I just don’t want to look fat in the pictures”, he lowers his voice. He doesn’t want the others to hear. “Please don’t tell me you actually believe you will look fat on pictures because you ate a meal. Especially because you didn’t have breakfast, nor lunch”. Jimin looks down. “I know that... it’s just difficult sometimes”, Jimin tries to swallow the tears that are trying to escape. He doesn’t want to ruin the make-up and having to explain to the stylist-noona why he cried. The sad expression on his hyung’s face breaks Junkook’s heart. He gets it. If you would tell it to the group, they would all get it. Damn, if you would say it to any random idol, they would get it. That’s how fucked up the industry is in this area.

Jungkook takes another good look at Jimin, heart-eyes on full display. But Jimin doesn’t see it. He is too busy looking at his almost untouched bowl of food. Jungkook sighs and grabs the chopsticks slowly out of his hands, not missing the opportunity to slide his hands over Jimin’s fingers. Jimin looks up: “What are you do-”. He is cut off by Jungkook feeding him some noodles. The delicious taste hitting his tongue. Having food in his mouth makes his body react, Jimin feels how hungry he really is. He chews the bite, that was slightly too big. He swallows with some difficulty, the jjajangmyeon is still a bit hot.

Jungkook laughs because Jimin has some sauce on his lips and around his mouth, which gives him a silly look. He grabs a tissue from the table and softly wipes it away. Jimin just looks at him, letting himself get taken care of –what a rare occurrence is- certainly not by the maknae.

They keep this on for several more bites. Giggling and sharing little touches in between, not noticing that everyone is looking at them. But Jimin and Jungkook are so deep in their own little world that they don’t notice the worried looks shared between the hyungs and Taehyung.

~*~

When they are all fed and dressed, they line up for the final photoshoot. They are all wearing jeans and polos in different colors. While they are waiting for the photographer to finish his setup, Jimin finds himself crouching down in front of Jungkook. Jungkook – as always looking to make fun of his hyungs - starts to pull at Jimin’s suspenders. The other members keep their breath when they look at Jimin to see if he gets annoyed by the maknae’s behavior, but Jimin seems to go with everything the youngest does. Yoongi finds the game with the suspenders too tempting, and he also risks a pull at the suspenders of Jimin. Bad idea, he realizes, when Jimin glares at him and sees the dancer’s eyes travel to his own suspenders. Lucky for him he’s quick enough to let his own suspenders down from his shoulders. They all burst out in laughter.

The photographer shouts above the laughter “OK guys, let’s line up for the last shoot. You are all wearing different polos and pullovers, but certain accents come back in each other’s clothing. So let’s find a good line up”.

The members start looking at each other and discussing the line-up. Jungkook is wearing a white polo, while Jimin is wearing a red polo, but the stripes on the collar are the same: red, white, and blue. So Jimin signals to Jungkook to stand before him. Jimin places his hands on Jungkook’s waist to guide him to stand before him. The younger playfully takes both hands and places them on his chest and keeps them there, just to make Jimin flustered.

It’s payback time for all the times Jimin made him flustered today. When they have to stand one after the other, he leans on J-Hope and pushes his ass backward. Jimin has to place his hands on Jungkook’s waist to keep him in place so that he does not bump into Jin behind him or that that ass in front of him does not come in contact with his own crotch. Jimin is so flustered that he looks from Jungkook’s ass to the photographer with a big question mark in his eyes. Does the photographer really want him to stand this way?

It’s already after midnight when they wrap up and enter the van to return to the dorms. Most of the members fall asleep. The three youngest members sit in the back of the van. Jimin sits next to the window, Taehyung next to him. Jimin falls asleep with his head against the window, and Taehyung with his head on Jimin’s shoulder. Jungkook moves in his seat to get a better look at Jimin. The elder is looking so cute when he sleeps with his mouth a bit open, that he snaps a picture of him. To not make his other hyungs suspicious, he also snaps a picture of Taehyung sleeping on Jimin’s shoulder. For the rest of the drive home, he keeps staring at the picture of sleeping Jimin. He feels tempted to put it as his lock screen. But that might be weird, he thinks.

Jin and Jungkook packed the leftovers from the buffet: there were a lot of leftovers because the members paid attention to what they ate during the photoshoot. Now that they are home, they are all hungry and they eat the rest of the buffet while discussing the events of the day. Jimin isn’t taking his leftovers because he still tries to pay attention to his diet, but sometimes he picks a piece from Taehyung’s bowl. Jungkook, who sits at his other side, shoves him a piece from his bowl into his mouth.

~*~

That night, Jungkook enters Jimin’s room that he shares with Hobi, and joins him under the sheets. It’s not the first time that this happens, it has happened a few times before, when the younger cannot find sleep. But this time it is a bit different. Previously, when the younger boy crawls into Jimin’s bed, he lays with his back against Jimin’s chest, and Jimin will wrap his arm around Jungkook’s waist. Although the younger is larger, he likes to be the little spoon. But tonight, he faces Jimin and whispers “Hyung are you sleeping?” “Not anymore” Jimin whispers back. He opens his eyes and he sees that Jungkook is staring at him. “What’s the matter?”, Jimin asks, “can’t sleep?”.

After a few seconds, Jungkook whispers: “I don’t know what’s happening to me, hyung. I never felt this way before. I thought that I would be attracted to girls, not that it ever happened, but I just thought that the right one didn’t come along yet. But now I’m not sure anymore. Every time I look at you, my stomach starts to flutter. I don’t know what to think about it.” Jimin looks at him but doesn’t reply. He rolls on his back to face the ceiling. What can he say?

As no answer comes from Jimin, Jungkook whispers: “What about you hyung?”. Jimin sighs, this won’t be an easy conversation. “I’ve always been attracted to boys, but that’s not something I yell from the rooftops. It took me a long time to accept it. But now I am OK with it”. A heavy silence falls. you can only hear their breathing and J-hope's occasional snores.

“Have you ever been with someone?”

Jimin looks at him and answers slowly: “Yes, but that’s a long time ago. It didn’t end well, so I’ve been very cautious since then. When I go to parties with Tae, I like the attention that people are showing me, boys and girls, alike. I like to flirt to push their buttons, but I never go further than that. I don’t like one-night stands.” Jungkook looks a bit hurt when he replies: “what about me? Are you just pushing my buttons, or is it a bit more?”. Jimin turns to him again and starts to caress through his hair: “This morning you said that I shouldn’t get feelings for you.” “Yes, I know…. And I still believe that we can’t do anything with it… but I just want to know if it’s mutual. It kills me not to know. As you just admitted it yourself, you tend to flirt with people, and I’m afraid that it’s just that”. Jimin sighs and looks to the younger “I always admired you, I’m your biggest fan you know” and he sends him a blinding smile, looking him right into the eyes. “And yes, in the beginning, I flirted with you to win you over. Can you blame me? I just got the opportunity to work with my ultimate bias”. Jungkook bites his bottom lip, a little smile appearing after the last sentence. Jimin looks at him, adoration spilling over in his expression.

“But I never wanted to hurt you. I really care about you now; I like you a lot.” After a few minutes, Jungkook whispers: “If I wouldn’t have stopped you this morning, would you have kissed me?” Jimin gets that mischievous smile on his face when he replies “Maybe…” He withdraws his hand from Jungkook’s hair and caresses his cheek before withdrawing his hand completely. They continue staring into each other’s eyes.

After another few more minutes the younger extends his hand and caresses Jimin’s sharp jawline and passes his thumb over his nose and then over his beautiful full lips. Jimin has the most beautiful lips he has ever seen. Then he whispers “Can I kiss you?” Jimin is in shock “Uh?”. “Please, hyung…” the younger pleads. As Jimin still doesn't replies, he scoots a bit closer and presses his lips on Jimin’s, but immediately pulls back. Jimin has beautiful plump lips and they feel so soft, so he kisses him again. It’s only after a few kisses, that Jimin starts to kiss back.

A few minutes of sharing small kisses goes by when Jimin asks the younger “Have you kissed someone before?”. The boy shakes his head, and Jimin smiles against his lips “So, I’m your first?” The boy nods looking at him with big doe eyes. “Then I have to do my best to make you feel good.” It’s now Jimin who initiates the kiss. He moves his hand back to Jungkook’s hair to pass his fingers through his beautiful black strands. When Jungkook parts his lips to breath, Jimin brushes his tongue against the younger’s lips and slowly slips his tongue in his mouth. In the first instance the younger stiffens but then his tongue touches Jimin’s tongue and the kiss deepens. They kiss like that until they are breathless. It’s pure bliss. Jimin presses his hand against Jungkook’s nape to get him even closer, and Jungkook places a shaky hand on Jimin’s waist. Their legs are strangled together, but Jimin avoids having their crotches touching. He cannot trust his reaction if that would happen.

They kiss the night away mapping each other’s mouth out till their lips are all swollen. When they break the kiss, Jungkook places his chin on Jimin’s chest and Jimin lets his chin rest on Jungkook’s head. The younger sights: “Kissing you feels so good, I never thought kissing would make me feel like this.” And after a few seconds, he adds: “But what now? What are we going to do?” Jimin thinks about it and whispers “I know now that you like me, and you know that I’m attracted to you. That should be enough for us for now, I suppose.”. He kisses the boy’s head “I think it is best to keep this as our little secret for a while until we figure out what to do about it, and how serious this is between us. Let’s get some hours of sleep now, otherwise, we will be too exhausted tomorrow”. Jimin gives the younger boy a last kiss, and they fall asleep in each other’s arms, Jungkook almost immediately with a content smile on his face. It takes a while for Jimin to fall asleep as he thinks about Taehyung who is so happy now, and who had such a difficult time recovering after being rejected as a trainee. He does not want that to happen again, this would kill him.

~*~

In the morning it’s a bit awkward between the two of them. Small shy smiles are sent back and forth over the breakfast table. When they clear the table, Jimin cannot withhold himself from passing his hand over Jungkook’s lower back traveling downwards to one of his ass cheeks. Taehyung notices Jimin’s skinship and automatically feels the change in mood, so he follows his friend to his room when they have to get ready for practice. Taehyung makes Jimin sit down on his bed and asks “What are you doing, Jimin?”

“I don’t know Tae “, he replies with his head in his hands, “yesterday night he came to my bed. At first, we were talking, but then we started kissing. He asked if he could kiss me, and I was so stupid to let him. I couldn’t stop myself, I just wanted to know how it feels to kiss him“.

“Wait, you kissed him! You know that’s a bad idea, right?”

“Yes I know Tae, but it felt so right. You know that I don’t fool around, and usually, I have no problem guarding my boundaries. But with him, it feels different.”

“It’s not that I don’t understand, but what surprises me, usually you fall for older guys, large and strong, a guy that can take care of you. Someone like Namjoon, if you would choose one of the members. Jungkook is nothing of all that. OK, he’s beautiful and he is muscular, but I don’t think he’s the type of taking care of you. He’s still so young, even childish sometimes…”

“I know Tae, but I feel attracted to him. And he makes me laugh... and he took care of me yesterday, sort of…”

“Yeah, we laugh a lot. But isn’t that because we are euphoric about being members of BTS now? I don’t want to interfere with your love life, or say what you can and cannot do, but do you think it is worth risking it all? Are you sure it’s not just a fanboy crush?”

Jimin wraps his arms around Taehyung and lays his head on his shoulder, his nose in his neck “I know it’s a bad idea“.

Tae adds “I’m afraid that it’s not only a bad idea, but it could also be dangerous to pursue a relationship with Jungkook, for your career, his career and even the future of BTS.”

What Taehyung is saying is right, Jimin knows that. But the memories of last night linger in his head. A flash of Jungkook’s smiling face with big doe eyes appears for his eyes. Jimin can’t do this. He can’t ruin innocent Jungkook’s future. Jimin sighs “I’ll talk to him.” They stay silent after that, but after a few minutes Tae taps him on the shoulder: “Come on Minnie, we have to get ready for dance practice”.

~*~

When they all walk to the dance studio, Hobi throws his arm around Jimin, making Jimin jumping up from his thoughts “Everything OK, Jimin-ie? You look a bit distracted this morning.” “No, no everything is fine, a bit tired, but we all are, I suppose.” “Did you had to cuddle baby Jungkook asleep again tonight? I saw he was sleeping in your bed when I woke up”. Jimin feels his ears redden, but he tries not to look caught when he answers “He couldn’t sleep after the excitement of the photoshoot”. Hobi slaps him on the shoulder and snorts “Perhaps you should flirt less with him, you get him all flustered” and Hobi starts laughing loudly while hanging on Jimin’s arms. Jimin feels the red spreading to his cheeks and he decides for himself that it is better to keep a bit more distance between him and Jungkook as of today.

~*~

During the morning dance practice, Jungkook notices that Jimin is a bit distracted: normally they glance playfully at each other through the mirror. During the first break, he tries to tease Jimin, but the only thing he gets is an apologetic smile, and Jimin refuses to look him into the eyes. His heart aches when he sees the confusion on the younger’s face. But he also notices that Hobi keeps an eye on both of them, and his eyes also meet Taehyungs eyes. How long will it take for the other members to notice something is going on?

During the second break, Jimin wants to avoid a situation as during the first break, so he walks to the bathroom. He leans against the sink while overthinking the whole ordeal. He bends over to rest his forehead on his hands and unleashes a frustrated groan. It’s at that moment that Jungkook enters the bathroom. He places his hand softly on Jimin’s waist and turns Jimin around to face him. “What’s the matter, Jimin? Are you having second thoughts?”

Jimin sighs “I had a long talk with Taehyung this morning and we think that this whole situation between you and me can be very dangerous not only for us but also for all BTS members. We always wanted to become an idol. Are we going to risk it all? And if we decide to do this and we are fired then that’s our business. But we cannot do this to the other members, they have done nothing wrong.”

“Neither have we”, Jungkook goes over in defense mode. Unintentionally he grabs Jimin’s waist again. This makes the boy squirm in his hold. When he notices Jimin’s discomfort, he immediately loosens his grip.

Jungkook sighs and rests his forehead against Jimin’s. “You can’t do this to me. You can’t just play with my head like this. First saying that we can’t do any of this, then telling me you like me and kissing me, my first kiss ever by the way, back to pushing me away”. Jimin looks down, guilt overtaking him and bringing him to tears. “I’m sorry! I wasn’t thinking right. You make me do impulsive stuff that I regret afterward”.

Jungkook steps back, Jimin’s words stabbing in his heart mercilessly. “You regret it?”. The meaning of his words finally gets to Jimin. He shakes his head wildly, that’s not what he means. “No, no, please, don’t think that. I don’t regret anything. I used the wrong words. I’m just afraid of the implications. You know how they think about people like us”. Jimin reaches out to Jungkook, wanting to feel his comforting touch. Jungkook, on the other hand, steps out of reach. He is still processing everything that has been said.

A painful silence falls between the two boys. Jimin takes another step in Jungkook’s direction. This time Jungkook does not back away. Jimin places his forehead against the other boy’s shoulder before he whispers: “You don’t know how it feels when people look at you like you’re the biggest piece of filth they’ve ever seen... I’ve been there and it hurts so fucking hard... Even people you think are friends turn on you…We will never be able to hold hands in public, we will never be able to kiss in public...” A small sob escapes from Jimin’s lips.

Jungkook then takes a deep breath and nods. “I’m sorry you had to experience that kind of hurt. You deserve so much more than that.”. After a few seconds, he continues “I know you’re right Jimin, but it stings. I’ll try to keep a bit more distance but please, let’s stay friends.”

“Of course, silly. I don’t have the intention to avoid you.” Jimin tilts his head with a small smile to look at Jungkook with his teary eyes. Jungkook stays still, wanting to wrap his arms around Jimin. But he wipes the tear that rolls down from Jimin’s cheek instead. Jimin continues “We just have to be careful. We just have to make sure we communicate enough so that we don’t end up hurting each other. We’re in this together.”

Jungkook nods and asks “So, Taehyung knows about us?”, “Yes, he’s my best friend, but don’t be afraid, he’s not going to spill the tea to the others. Let’s go back now before the others start wondering where we are. Hobi is already suspicious”. They smile at each other. A heavyweight lifted from the conversation that almost ended in the wrong direction. But there is no happy end to the conversation. Another weight is added instead. They can’t out their feelings for each other and decide to go through the pain of just being friends.

Jimin gives the younger a last small peck on his lips. When Jungkook turns to the door to walk out of the bathroom, he gives him a pet on his ass in the hope to shift the atmosphere to a lighter and more fun one. After their talk, both do their utmost to return to normal.

Chapter Text

Today they are going to release their first mini-album with the new members. The track-list contains Black Swan, Autumn Leaves, Pied Piper, and Jump. Everyone is nervous, especially Jimin and Taehyung. Knowing how ARMY is very protective over the boys, nobody is sure how they are going to react to the changes. Of course, everyone hopes it’s a positive one. All the members and a couple of staff members gather in a meeting room. They all take a seat. At the head of the table is the head in charge. His laptop is in front of him and his screen projecting on the white wall at the back so everyone can see. The time is here.

The mini-album is sent into the world. A manager tells them, but especially Jimin and Taehyung, to wait at least half an hour to check social media. This is to give the fans the time to process and react to everything. The album seems to be a success: the streams on Spotify, Deezer, and the YouTube channel of BigHit increase with the minute. Twitter explodes with praises for the new album and the voices of the new members. A day later, Jin excitedly shares with them that they broke their own record of most views in 24hrs.

~ * ~

The first week of the comeback is packed with giving interviews (some are pre-recorded), and a comeback stage for Black Swan on a variety of music shows.

The second week will consist of fan signs and musters in Seoul, Daegu, and Busan.

~ * ~

Their first interview and comeback stage is for Mnet. The new members are introduced during the interview, and on the comeback stage, they present the song, Black Swan.

“Hello everyone! I’m Jisoo!”

“And I am Jonghyun!”

“Today we are your mc’s”

The hosts do some aegyo and throw a few finger hearts. It's a bit cringy, everyone knows that, but it’s a must for the show. They then turn to BTS, to introduce them including the new members, and their comeback.

“Why don’t you all introduce yourselves”, Jisoo proposes like with every introduction.

Yoongi begins as he is positioned next to Jonghyun. It’s short and powerful, but it is obvious Yoongi is already tired of having to introduce himself. Then Namjoon and Jin introduce themselves from the back. They are a bit more enthusiastic. Namjoon is his charming self as always and Jin even gives a wink and throws a finger heart. He is always the best at these things. Next up is J-hope, who is standing next to Yoongi. He twirls around, makes a deep bow, and says his iconic catchphrase.

“I’m your hope, you’re my hope, I’m J-hope"

After a lot of laughing, Jungkook –standing behind Jimin- introduces himself, waving and bowing slightly, the shy boy coming through whenever he has to do such things. Finally, it’s time for Taehyung’s introduction. While he was listening to the others, he couldn’t help but smile and laugh while his heart almost jumps out of his chest. When they were in the dressing room, Jimin caught him practicing what he will say. On the way to the stage, he teased him about it. Well, now it’s his turn.

“Hello everyone, I’m V, one of the new members and I'll be accompanying the vocal line.”

Taehyung makes a V-sign in front of his right eye and bows deeply. Now it’s Jimin’s turn. He rubs his sweaty hands on his pants as subtle as possible. He swallows the lump in his throat, his heart beating. Nervously he smiles and waves to the camera.

“Hello everyone, my name is Jimin, the other new memser- member. Sorry. I will also accompany the vocal line and I’m part of the dance line too”.

He stuttered. Omg, his first introduction and he stuttered. The other laugh, but Jimin just feels embarrassed. Two big hands grab his shoulders shaking them a bit. He looks up and sees Jungkook’s comforting smile. Jisoo tells him that it happens to everyone and that they both did well and then quickly resumes the interview.

There were a lot of questions about the suddenness of the addition. BTS was an established group for three years and now BigHit decided to put in two new members. Jimin and Taehyung were asked about their trainee days, so they had to explain they had barely any –BigHit had decided to keep Taehyung’s past hidden, for now. Jisoo and Jonghyun both looked a bit skeptical at those words.

When the night ends, they get their first win. It's the first encore stage, so they decide to keep the craziness a little bit at bay. Just singing and laughing with each other. After the show, Jimin excuses himself to go to the bathroom. On his way back he gets a little lost and bumps into Jisoo.

“Hey Jimin, how does the first win feel?”, she asks him. She is a very pretty woman and even with no camera, she is charming and very kind. She looks like a very genuine person, Jimin thinks. He hopes he will get a chance to get to know her better. “It feels so great! But I just can’t believe I screwed up my very first introduction”. “Hey don’t worry about it, it happens to the best. Listen, I think you saw our expressions when you stated to have no trainee experience", Jimin nods. He doesn’t know where she is going. “We all thought that it was a very unprofessional decision of BigHit. I was almost afraid it would mean the end for BTS. You get where I'm coming from, right?”. Jimin just nods, finding no words to say to her. He has given it a thought too, what if they destroy BTS. Many will be sad, he and Taehyung included, but of course, there will be others who will gladly see the downfall of BTS. “But when I saw the stage. Wow. Blown away”, she giggles, “You and V are incredibly talented. You don’t need to worry at all. Just keep working hard, okay? I’m rooting for you”. The turn of their conversation surprises Jimin. The excitement from the beginning had downed but it ignites again because of her last words. He bows deeply, trying to show how thankful he is: “I will. I- Me and Taehyung will work super hard. Thank you for the support and your kind and encouraging words Jisoo-sunbaenim". Jisoo laughs again, lighting up her pretty face: “No need to be so formal, someone told me you’re 2 years older than me. Just call me Jisoo”. “Well, then you can say oppa to me. If you want too of course”. They say their farewells. Jimin resumes his walk to the dressing room, deciding to share the news with the other members.

~ * ~

BigHit releases a set of photos of the photoshoot on the official BTS Twitter account, and the new members post a number of selca’s: Jimin and Taehyung place an individual selca, but also a selca of the both of them. Jungkook places a selca together with Jimin, and one with Taehyung on BTS’s personal account, the others just tweet their congratulations. Once again Twitter explodes now that the new members have a face, and of course, with the content they get, new ships will be born. Jimin’s dance performance in Black Swan is a huge success.

~ * ~

On their way to the first fan sign in Seoul in the van, it is very obvious that Jimin and Taehyung are very nervous. Hobi and Jin try to lighten the ambiance by telling funny anecdotes.

Usually, a fan sign always starts with the members answering questions of the fans. But this time the two new members are introduced first. When Jimin takes the mic and tells them he’s a major in modern dance, a small number of fans start shouting “Black swan!”. The shouting becomes louder as more fans tune in. Jungkook starts imitating Jimin’s solo and J-hope is quick to follow.

One of the questions for Jungkook is to rank the members by their looks. “Oh, this is an easy one”, he laughs. “Last year it was Jin hyung but he has been outshined. This year first place goes to Jimin.” And he smiles his wide bunny smile. A sigh and a: “as expected”, comes from Namjoon, but the fans are not paying attention to him. Everyone cheers as they see Jimin smile his shy smile, making the fan’s hearts melt.

Then Jungkook walks over to Taehyung and lays his arm around the other boy’s shoulders. “Although I must admit that Tae-hyung is also quite a catch”. And the fans roar even louder at that.

Of course, he also gets the question of who the second voice is on his cover “We don’t talk anymore”. When he answers that it is Jimin, fans ask to sing a small part of the cover.

Namjoon adds that Taehyung has also a fantastic voice. The fans beg him to sing something for them. Taehyung sings a little of his cover of Adele’s “Someone like you” and it is well received by the fans. And in no time photos and movies are posted on Twitter.

~ * ~

Later that evening, and the evening after, they have a mini-concert in Seoul, where they perform everything they have been practicing for.

Between Jump and Fire, there is a short break for a change of clothes. Well, they only change their vest and shirt. The members start opening their shirts and start undressing as soon as they leave the stage, to be back as quick as possible. Jimin runs after Jungkook. When the younger’s shirt is off, he looks at the broad naked back of Jungkook. Jimin is so impressed that he stops in his track. Taehyung, who follows suit after him, bumps into him. “Mmm,” he whispers in Jimin’s ear “impressive, but MOVE”. Jimin continues running towards the rack with fresh shirts. He feels Jungkook’s eyes on him while he picks his own and puts it on. He’s a bit puzzled by the gaze of the younger and forgets to keep the wires of his microphone under his shirt. Jungkook notices it and quickly helps him by putting the wires under his shirt. When they turn to go back to the stage, Jungkook keeps his hand on Jimin’s lower back while they run.

As the night progresses it doesn’t look like Jimin’s first concert. He is a natural, hyping up the audience and engaging with the fans. He shows some impressive dance skills. Jumping in splits and doing body rolls that make even the fathers in the audience gasp for breath.

During No More Dream, when Jungkook lifts Jimin to run over the backs of the dancers and the team members, the crowd goes wild.

When Namjoon wants to start his little talk to thank the fans, the crowd starts to shout the fan chant. Quickly they notice that Kim Taehyung and Park Jimin are already included in the fan chant. Jimin and Taehyung’s hearts warm with the love they’re already receiving from the fans. They smile at each other.

When the members take their start position for the last number, Jimin runs to Taehyung and takes him in a big hug. They walk over to one of the stage cameras to send finger hearts to the fans.

They finish the concert with Run. When the part comes where Jungkook synchronizes his voice with Jimin’s, Jungkook moves over to Jimin and stops in front of him. He starts softly punching Jungkook’s chest for fun. But suddenly he is grabbed by the waist and pulled against Jungkook's side. Their size difference is very visible in this position. Jimin throws his arm around the taller boy as they harmonize the high notes. The crowd whistles and shouts and a lot of phone cameras flash. Immediately photos of the two of them are spread via social media. They also send finger hearts to the stage camera in front of them before they separate.

The concert is a huge success. The members are very excited when they enter the van. They talk over each other while they reflect on small stupidities that occurred that day and relive the funny moments.

When they come home, they review the concert and discuss small adaptations. They are exhausted but are overall pleased with how everything went. Namjoon proposes to use the bathroom 2 by 2 to have a quicker turnaround as the next day will be heavy again. Taehyung notices that Jungkook’s eyes move in Jimin’s direction, and earlier today he also noticed their glances when they looked over each other’s naked chest during the shirt changes, so he quickly stands up and takes Jimin by the wrist. He asks Namjoon “Is it OK if Jimin and I go first?”. When Namjoon answers “Sure”, they both move to the bathroom together. Taehyung doesn’t miss Jungkook’s disappointed look.

~ * ~

The weekends with a fan sign and a concert in Daegu and in Busan. They travel by night bus to be able to get some rest.

During the concert in Daegu, Jimin’s voice falters during Jump. When they go for a change of clothes, Jimin starts crying because he is disappointed in himself. He does not follow the other members on stage immediately because he doesn’t want the fans to see his tears. Before Jungkook enters the stage, he turns around and sees that Jimin is not behind him. He runs back to see Jimin in tears, surrounded by a few staff members who are doing their utmost to calm him down by offering him water, massaging his neck, waving cool air in his face, and re-applying his make-up. He scoots them away and takes Jimin in a bear hug to comfort and to encourage him. When Jimin calms down, he takes the elder by the hand and they rush together to the stage. Before entering the stage, they knock their fists together. Jungkook shouts: “Fighting” and Jimin answers.

~ * ~

They receive a lot of love from the Korean fans and when they look on Twitter it seems that the international ARMY’s have welcomed the new members too. On one of the fan signs, Yoongi pointed at a fan with a camera in the audience, telling him that it’s a new fan account dedicated to him.

After a week of interviews, fan signs, and performances, the BigHit management gives the BTS members two days off to recuperate and to have a bit of fun, before they leave for Japan.

On the first day, most of the members decide to stay in the dorms and to doze off on the couch or to rest on their beds.

Jungkook comes to find Jimin in his room. Taehyung lounges next to Jimin on his bed, so Jungkook lays down at Jimin’s other side. The bed is a bit too small for the three of them, but they don’t mind being pressed to each other.

Jimin was talking about their life before BTS and he tells a story about a bowling game they had. Jungkook laughs a lot while Jimin and Taehyung tell their story. “You’re laughing now Jungkook-ie, but I tell you, the owner almost killed us”, Taehyung raises his head to look at Jungkook. Jungkook tries to compose himself: “Okay hyung, but still. How are you able to get a bowling shoe stuck between the pins”. He managed to say it just before he bursts out in laughter again. When he is done laughing, he says “I like playing bowling, but I haven’t since I became a trainee. The hyungs are not into bowling”, he says while looking at the ceiling. Jungkook looks at Jimin and asks “Would you perhaps like to go out playing bowling with me tomorrow evening? I would really, really like that.” Jimin looks at Tae and asks “Is that OK with you? You can come along if you want.” Taehyung understands that the younger wants to spend some quality time together with Jimin, so he answers “Don’t worry about me, Minnie, you know I hate bowling since then. And it’s not good for my fingers if I want to continue playing the piano. Go ahead, I’ll pester the hyungs in Jungkook’s place.” They all start laughing.

~*~

The day after, Jimin gets ready for his evening out with Jungkook. He hears a knock on the door of his room and shouts “Come in!” Jungkook opens the door and looks in awe at Jimin who wears the violet v-neck sweater he wore the evening of the contest. “Damn!”. Jimin raises an eyebrow, secretly liking the informality of the younger. “Sorry, you just look really good!” He takes place on the bed and adds hesitantly. “I’m really flattered that you dress up like that for me, but unfortunately that’s not a good idea. You can better wear a hoodie to cover your head because otherwise we risk being recognized.” Jimin looks in his wardrobe to pick out a black sweater. “This one?” Jungkook nods.

After a few minutes, Jungkook adds “We will also be accompanied by two staff members. I’m sorry about that. I asked the management if I could go out alone with you, but they refused. I hope you don’t mind too much. Unfortunately, you will have to get used to never be alone anymore….” Jimin sits down next to Jungkook and takes his hand in his lap “It’s true I didn’t expect to have a babysitter around us, but I don’t mind. I’m going to spend a fun evening with you and that’s what counts”. He offers him a big smile and they both get up and leave the room.

The staff reserved the lane the furthest from the entrance door in the hope the two members will not be recognized. They move over to their lane to put on the bowling shoes, also reserved by the staff on beforehand. Jungkook starts teasing Jimin when he sees the size of the elder’s feet. When he sees the pout on Jimin’s face he has to fight back the urge to kiss it off his face.

They start playing. Jimin is the first one to play a strike. Once Jungkook gets in the rhythm, he plays strike after strike. Each time Jimin plays a strike, he dances a cute little dance. They have a lot of fun and they enjoy their time together. They cannot stop looking into each other’s eyes while playing, and they are in their own little world.

Jungkook finally wins the game but with a not that big difference in points. Jungkook does not hesitate to show his admiration: “Aish Jimin-ssi, you’re going to defeat me!”. Jimin runs up to him, standing on his tiptoes to put a hand on his mouth. His small hand barely covers Jungkook’s big smile. “Don’t be so loud. People will hear”. Jungkook grabs Jimin’s wrist, pulling his hand down. He takes a step closer and lowers his voice: “Mmmh, yeah, we don’t want that”. The two bodyguards look up, hearing what has been said and quickly looking away again. Jimin’s cheeks go red hearing that deep voice, it’s hot and it makes him a little bit aroused. He slaps himself mentally, he can’t feel like this, they made a deal to stay friends for the future of BTS.

Jungkook takes a step back, looking Jimin up and down with a smug smile. He likes how Jimin looks when he is flustered. But I need to stop, he thinks, we decided to just be friends. But hey, a little teasing doesn’t harm anyone.

After the game, they don’t want to go home yet. They have too much fun together and they like to be in each other’s company without the other hyungs around them. They stroll around the streets passing multiple food stalls. The two bodyguards keep a good eye on them from the shadows. After passing a stall with delicious smelling tteokbokki, Jungkook feels his stomach growling. He looks at Jimin and asks: “Are you hungry? Because I know a small but very good place where you can eat the best Korean fried chicken.” Jimin hesitates at first because they can’t have that following their diet plan, but then he thinks that it won’t hurt to sin for once, so he agrees and they enter the warmth of the small but cozy restaurant. The restaurant is almost empty at this time of the evening, and the two boys take a table at the back of the restaurant, as far away from the windows as possible. The two staff members take place at a table on the other side of the restaurant to give them some privacy, it’s not their intention to overhear the conversation.

They talk about everything and anything. They also find out that they are both from Busan. They throw words in satoori to each other, and they can’t stop laughing and making fun of each other.

When they walk home, it is dark outside and Jimin shivers in his sweater. Jungkook takes off his warm vest and helps Jimin in it. He wants to close the zipper but stops himself to look at the staff that has stopped a few meters behind them. They are not alone, so he does not dare to do something too familiar. They continue their walk home in silence, shoulder against shoulder. When they arrive at the dorms, they wish the staff members goodnight, thanking them for taking care of them and go up the stairs. When they arrive at the front door of the dorms, Jungkook reaches for his pockets in his vest, that Jimin is still wearing, while gazing into his beautiful eyes. The latter feels the other’s breath on his face when he looks back in those big doe eyes and he feels hands moving around his tights while searching for something in the pockets, resulting in a reaction somewhere higher in his crotch. He cannot prevent that a small gasp escapes from his lips. He just hopes Jungkook didn’t notice it. Once Jungkook has found the keys, he holds them up to Jimin with a big smile on his face. He then turns to the door and starts fumbling with the keys. Jimin stands on his tiptoes and throws his arms around his shoulders, pressing his chest against his back and nuzzling his face in his neck: “Thanks for the date, Jungkook. I really had a lot of fun”. Jungkook stops fumbling and turns around to find a pair of dark orbs looking at him. Jimin unconsciously licks his lower lip and that’s enough for Jungkook to throw all the good intentions overboard. He wraps his arms around the smaller boy’s waist and starts kissing him. Jimin does not think twice and kisses back, caressing the younger boy’s hair with one hand. When their lips part, their tongues intertwine, and they deepen the kiss. It feels so good. Jimin pries his arms in between the two of them, just to be able to unzip the vest. At first, Jungkook looks a bit confused but continues to chase Jimin’s lips when he feels that the elder just wanted to pull him closer.

When they break apart to breathe, they hear stumbling in the stairway. Jungkook immediately releases Jimin with a terrified look on his face. He turns his back to Jimin to open the front door but his hands are shaking so it does not work out from the first time. It is Yoongi who comes back home from having passed his free time in his music studio. “What are you guys doing here?” Jimin is quick to reply “We have been bowling” and he throws a big blinding smile at Yoongi, to cover his discomfort of being almost caught. Yoongi looks back and forth between the two of them and says to Jungkook “Since when are you such a gentleman?” “Uh?” is the only thing the younger can answer. Yoongi clarifies “I thought you didn’t like to share clothes”. They both get red ears, and Jimin stutters: “I- I got cold, you know”. At that same moment, Jungkook manages to open the front door. He rushes inside pulling Jimin after him, leaving Yoongi, who is shaking his head, behind.

They kick out their shoes and Jimin takes off the jacket. Taehyung jumps from the couch to retrieve Jungkook and drags him to the couch. “Please, come and play Mario Kart with me because Hobi-hyung is absolutely useless!”. “Hey!”, Hobi shouts. Jimin smiles and takes place on the ground in front of his pouting hyung, and rests his cheek on his knees. Hobi caresses through Jimin’s hair and asks “How was your night out? I hope he wasn’t a too big pain in the ass. Did you beat him? I hope so, so he can finally be humbled”. Jimin laughs and answers: “Well, I threw some strikes but he won in the end. But! But the difference in points was not that big.” Jungkook huffs at that “You are a good player Jimin...”, “Hyung”, snaps J-hope. “Finally, someone that can challenge me. But in the end, I won, like always. Nobody can beat the bowling master!”. He looks at Jimin with his big bunny smile. This earns him a wack from Taehyung who is eager to start playing.

“Can you all shut up! I want to sleep!”, Namjoon’s muffled is heard from his and Jungkook’s room. They all release the breath they have been holding. Namjoon scared the crap out of them, yelling like this out of nowhere. They look at each other and start silently laughing among themselves.

They don’t stay up too late because the day after they have to follow their tough schedules again. That night Jungkook comes back to Jimin’s bed because he can’t find sleep. It’s the first time since the night they made out. Jimin pulls the covers away to allow Jungkook in his bed. He covers the younger up and places his arm around his waist, and his chin on his shoulder, just like they were used to do. “Just sleeping” Jimin warns. “No worries, hyung, feeling your warmth is enough”. A few minutes later he whispers again “Sorry I broke our agreement, hyung”. “Don’t worry Kookie, I didn’t exactly stop you…. Let’s try harder tomorrow…” “I like you hyung”. “I like you too…”.

Chapter Text

After an exhausting day of filming for their variety show ‘Run BTS’, Yoongi takes Jimin apart: “Jimin, I want to discuss something with you. Would you like to join me for dinner?“. Of course, Jimin accepts “But I’m going to take a shower first and change into something more acceptable.” Yoongi replies with a bright smile and twinkles in his eyes: “We are just going to grab a bite, it’s not a date, you know.” Jimin is a bit taken aback and his cheeks get a little pink “I know, but I don’t like to walk around the city in my sweatpants. I prefer to be descent”, “OK then, let’s pass by the dorms first.”

They leave the practice room together. Jungkook looks from his phone when the two are leaving. He is about to ask where they’re going, but the pair is already out of the door. When Hobi sees the maknae’s pout he laughs. He turns to Taehyung: “Well, I guess you have 2 dance coaches now”. But Jungkook jumps up and grumbles: “Sorry hyung but I think I’m going to work on my mixtape.” He takes his belongings and stomps out of the practice room. Hobi looks at Taehyung, and snorts: “Someone is jealous”, and Taehyung who was not really paying attention to the shift in the younger’s mood, mutters: “Mmh, probably”.

Almost 20 minutes have past and Jimin is still not ready. Yoongi scrolls through his phone, checking on ARMY on his secret stan account. Finally, Jimin enters the living room. He is dressed in a casual white, long-sleeved shirt, tucked in a pair of ripped skinny jeans. A Chanel necklace hanging around his neck and matching earrings dangling from his ears. A fan, to Jimin’s surprise, gifted him this set as a welcome gift. Apparently, they got one for Taehyung as well, as he publicly announced on Twitter that he will never take them off.

Yoongi looks him over after jumping up from the couch. “You really know how to make a man wait. But it’s sure worth waiting for.” Jimin’s ears get a bit red. Is Yoongi flirting with him, seriously? He writes it off as bros-being-bros. They give each other compliments all the time.

They walk towards the door in order to put their shoes back on and leave for the restaurant. Jimin opens the door and is about to step out, but Yoongi stops him: “Don’t forget to take your jacket because you will not get mine on the way back”. Jimin giggles but he gets a bit uneasy. He thinks back to that night, how he just threw away the agreement of staying friends and how Yoongi almost caught them.

Once on the street, Yoongi says: “I know a small restaurant not far from here where they make the most delicious lamb skewers. Do you like that?”. “Yes, but I didn’t know you like lamb, hyung”, Jimin replies. “Really? It’s a bit of a habit of me to go eat out lamb skewers whenever I have to discuss something with one of the members. I’m glad we can maintain that tradition.” Jimin furrows his brows. “Well, I hope you never have to discuss something with Taehyung, because he isn’t that keen on lamb's meat”. Yoongi thinks for a bit: “Mmm, our Taehyung-ie is a one of a kind, isn’t he” Jimin who had been walking slightly in front of Yoongi, changes speed to walk next to him. “What do you mean by that”, he is ready to defend his friend even against Yoongi. Yoongi sees his expression and laughs.

“Ah, don’t worry Jimin-ah. I don’t mean it in a bad way, not at all. I’m afraid, if I ever have to discuss something with him, I will easily overlook things. Just because he is Taehyung. Our Taehyung-ie is a real charmer”. Jimin relaxes. He is glad he misunderstood Yoongi. He doesn’t want any tension between him and Yoongi, because he is sure he will always take Taehyung’s side.

When they enter the small restaurant, they take a table for two in the back of the restaurant, and again the two staff members that accompany them, take a table at the front. When they get seated in front of each other, Jimin offers Yoongi one of his signature bright smiles. Yoongi answers with a smile and twinkling eyes.

They start talking about everything and anything and Jimin unconsciously slips into his flirting mode. Yoongi is very laid back and is full of stories. Jimin enjoys his time with the rapper, he would never have thought the guy was such enjoyable and talkative company because in the fandom he is known as a grumpy granddad. But Yoongi doesn’t flirt back, at all. It’s like he’s oblivious to it. So, he thinks of stepping up his game, what’s wrong with a little bit of fun. He licks his lower lip, places his elbow on the table, and leans his chin in his hand while listening to the older. He takes a sip of his drink through a straw while looking Yoongi in the eyes. Yoongi snorts “You really are a piece of work, Park Jimin”. Jimin’s head quirks up. Yoongi leans back when he adds with a big smile: “But you can save your flirting for Jungkook.” Jimin looks embarrassed, he didn’t mean to get caught, so the older is quick to continue: “He adores you. I like to see him opening up now that you and Taehyung are around. And I’m not going to lie, you are very attractive, but… I prefer watching your cat and mouse game with Jungkook” At that moment, their lamb skewers are served and they start eating, so the older does not finish his sentence.

After a few minutes Yoongi changes the conversation “You know, besides my work for BTS, I have a mixtape under the alias of August D”. Jimin nods eagerly because of course, he knows, he’s a big fan of his work. “Within a few weeks we have a performance with BTS and BigHit allows me to perform one of my August D songs. I have a song that I didn’t release yet because it needs a second voice. Till now I didn’t find that voice that I have in mind. But I'm kinda curious about how your voice would fit in it...”. Before Yoongi is able to finish his sentence, he is interrupted by Jimin: “What about Tae?”.

Yoongi takes a bite from the skewers. He chews slowly, so he can think about his answer. “I already thought about that, but I'm not searching for a low baritone”. Jimin opens his mouth to say something but is stopped by Yoongi putting his hand up. “I know that Taehyung can hit high notes, but that’s not what I have in mind. I think this song would fit you well. I’m not looking for the angelic side of your voice though, but for the rougher and edgy side of your voice that I sometimes hear coming through. Do you think you want to try this out with me?”.

The ball is dropped and now it’s Jimin’s turn to say something. But he doesn’t know what. So Jimin takes his time eating some skewers and rice, and taking a big gulp of his tea. He thinks about it for a while. Yoongi is very talented, Jimin is not going to lie. His work is amazing, but not really his style. Also, Jimin isn’t sure how right Yoongi is about his ‘rougher and edgy’ side. He looks up, meeting Yoongi’s eyes. The older is waiting for him, but in a way, Jimin doesn’t feel rushed.

"I’m not sure if I will be able to deliver what you expect from me…. But I’m willing to work hard….”. The rapper is quick to comfort him: “If you don’t take chances, you will never know. Let’s try it out. And if it doesn’t work out, no hard feelings. There will be chances enough to work together in the future.” Yoongi lays down his chopsticks and says: “If it’s ok for you, I would like to start rehearsing as soon as possible. Since the extra hours with Hobi are done, we can use that time. If you don’t mind of course”. Jimin shakes his head.

After dinner, Yoongi asks “Are you into soju? I really would like to have a drink.” Jimin accepts eagerly. Jimin also likes to have a drink once in a while, and he didn’t get one since they moved to the dorms. The conversation changes into deeper topics and Jimin discovers that there is also a dark side about Yoongi, just as he has. He almost never shows his darker side, he has the habit of hiding it well, but with Yoongi, it feels like he can share a few of his insecurities, insecurities of which the rapper was already aware of, it seems. He starts feeling really comfortable around the older and he finds he is able to show the real Jimin.

When they leave the restaurant Yoongi asks “Are you tired? Or is it OK to stop by the studio first so that you can hear the song I want to work on with you?” Jimin hesitates. “To be fair hyung, I'm a little tired. Working now will make me feel overwhelmed tomorrow”. “No worry, Jimin-ie. Let’s go home then, I need some sleep too”, Yoongi ruffles Jimin’s hair and makes his way towards the bar. He pays for their dinner and moves with Jimin towards the exit, signaling the bodyguards that they are leaving.

~*~

Jungkook lies on his bed when he hears a soft knock on his door. When he looks up, Jimin is standing in the doorway “Can I come in?”. “Hi Hyung, yes of course.” It’s already very late but Jungkook is still awake, while Namjoon is snoring.

Jimin suspects that the younger stayed up to see him come back. They are not committed to each other and he does not have to justify his actions, but he understands that Jungkook is curious to know how the evening went.

Jimin walks up to his bed and Jungkook tries: “that was quite a date…”. Jimin crawls on the bed next to Jungkook, snuggles his head into the crook of the younger’s neck, and places his hand on the hand that is lying on his stomach in an attempt to take away the discomfort of the younger. “That was not a date, you silly.”

After a few minutes, he adds: “I’m doing a collab with Yoongi on a new song of him. That’s all”. Jungkook answers: “Good for you…”, but he cannot help feeling a bit jealous. It is silent for a little, Jungkook asks in a soft pleading voice: “Can you please stay the night with me hyung?”, and Jimin has it not in his heart to refuse.

~*~

“I’m really looking forward to our little collaboration. Let’s kick some ass.”

When Yoongi opens the door of his studio, he says with a proud smile “Welcome to my sanctuary”. Jimin looks around with big eyes. It is so different from Jungkook’s studio and from Namjoon’s studio. It contains far more equipment than the other studios, and Jimin feels very humble and honored to be let in because he knows that not everybody is allowed to set foot in this studio.

“Please do not touch random stuff. I think you know I don’t let a lot of people in”, “No, of course, hyung, I respect that completely”. When Yoongi turns towards the computer, Jimin quickly lays back a tiny figurine, guilt overcoming him.

Yoongi plays the demo of ‘Tony Montana’. Jimin likes the flow of the song. The demo contains a number of gaps that need to be filled in by Jimin. He asks if he can hear it again to pay closer attention to the lyrics. As always Yoongi’s lyrics have a more profound meaning. When the demo finishes a second time, there is silence.

After a minute Jimin says “Wow! Your lyrics always cut deep. I almost feel guilty that you asked me to collaborate on this song. I don’t want to mess up your work.“

Yoongi huffs and says “I’m sure you won’t mess up. But you will have to learn to rap a little though.” Jimin’s eyes grow and he starts scratching his neck. If that had been told to him beforehand... Yoongi continues “During the vocal training they learned you how to use your head voice. But I want you to use the rough edgy side of your voice, the side of your voice that you use when you growl. The kind of rapping I want from you is what they call vocal rapping.”

Yoongi quickly explains the difference between rapping and vocal rapping and gives him a speed course rapping. He teaches him how to use his lower voice and he really likes it. In the beginning, he has some timing issues when rapping the text Yoongi has given him, but Yoongi claps in his hands to keep him in the rhythm: in the beginning, his clapping is rather slow in order to give Jimin the time to adjust to the words. After a few trials, he speeds up his clapping until Jimin raps in the correct flow. After an hour of exercising, he raps and growls along with Yoongi and they jam together. He even surprises Yoongi - and of course himself - when he starts harmonizing with Yoongi’s rapping by rapping a little bit higher than Yoongi. He even dares to add a few high-pitched words. But Yoongi cut him off.

“Fun what you’re doing Jimin-ah, but I don’t want that part in the song”. Jimin is embarrassed. He totally forgot this is Yoongi’s song and he is the one who decides what goes in it. “Sorry hyung, I let myself go. Not doing it again, promise...” Yoongi, who feels Jimin shutting down, nudges his leg. “Hey, when I say I don’t want that in the song, doesn’t mean I don’t like it. You can do it when performing it live. I’m sure it will rile up the fans”. Yoongi tilts his head and raises his eyebrows, trying to show Jimin he appreciates the contributions. Jimin gives back a little smile.

When Yoongi closes the door of his studio many hours later, Jimin says “Thank you for this opportunity to work on this project with you”. Yoongi smiles at him and he answers “Mmm well, I know how to pick the right ones. If I say so myself.” Jimin turns around, looking at Yoongi with an open mouth. He can’t believe the shameless words that have come out of Yoongi’s mouth. Yoongi just smirks and passes him by towards the elevators.

When they leave the building, Jimin grabs Yoongi’s arm and they walk to the dorms in comfortable silence. When they enter the dorms, they kick off their shoes. Yoongi wishes him good night and enters his room. He leaves Jimin in the middle of the dark living room.

Jimin tiptoes to his bedroom but before entering, he wonders if Jungkook would still be awake at this time of the night. He silently enters the younger’s room but his bed is empty. Jimin silently enters his own bedroom and finds Jungkook sleeping in his bed. He goes to the bathroom to get ready for the night. He crawls into his bed next to the younger and wraps his arms around his waist, his mouth and nose against the other’s shoulder. Normally, he likes to be the little spoon but with Jungkook he often is the big spoon.

~*~

The next evening Yoongi and Jimin plan to finish the song. Yoongi records a number of takes to be able to mix the best parts together. He does not need Jimin’s assistance for that.

Jimin wishes him good night. He leans against the door of Yoongi’s studio after having closed it. He didn’t dare to say that he hates walking back to the dorms on his own. He looks into the empty hallway and suddenly has an idea. He walks up to the door of Jungkook’s studio in the hope the younger will be there working on his own projects. When he arrives at the door, he hears the sound of Jungkook’s voice which makes him smile in anticipation. He softly opens the door. The younger one stands in the middle of his studio, singing with his eyes closed, so he does not see the elder coming in. His voice sounds so beautiful and full of emotions, that Jimin holds his breath while he listens, with his back against the closed door.

When Jungkook finishes singing he opens his eyes and sees Jimin there. Jimin knows nothing else to say then: “Wow, that was amazing!”. Jungkook says with a shy smile: “My wish just came true.” Jimin’s face flushes a bit red: “I- wow Jungkook what is that for a pick-up line”. Jungkook takes off his earphones: “I’m covering the song ‘2U’.” Jungkook repeats the lines: “When it comes to you, there’s no crime. Let’s take both of our souls and intertwine.” while walking up to Jimin, his eyes locked with the other’s gaze. He takes the elder by the hand and makes him sit down in the chair in front of the PC. Jimin asks in a teasing tone: “Can I hear it from the beginning?”.

“OK, I wanted it to be a surprise for you, but I don’t mind singing it for you now”.

While Jimin is sitting in the chair still looking at him, Jungkook moves over, turns the chair so that the other is facing the PC, and leans over Jimin to operate a number of handles. They are both aware of each other’s proximity and radiating body heat. Jungkook explains to Jimin which button he needs to press when he gives the start signal and moves back to the mic in the middle of the studio. Jimin turns the chair to look at him in full fanboy mode. When Jungkook finishes singing the song, Jimin looks at him with his mouth a bit open and big eyes filled with adoration.

Jimin stands up, clapping enthusiastically. Jungkook throws him a look: “Why are you so hyped? It’s not that good”. Jimin places a hand on his chest acting overdramatically shocked: “Not that good? Jeon Jungkook are you kidding me? This is really good! You’re so good! I can’t get enough of hearing you sing”. Jungkook smiles shyly at all the praise he is getting from the elder. “But it is not good enough yet”, Jungkook whines while setting up his equipment to record again. He cannot deny that Jimin’s state of adoration makes his heart flutter.

Jungkook tries to keep his focus on his work and moves over to the PC again. He grips the armrest of Jimin’s chair to turn it back to face the PC, but this time Jimin sets his foot on the ground to block off the spinning. So Jungkook has no other choice than to stand between Jimin’s legs to get to the keyboard. Jimin turns the chair slightly to make it more difficult for Jungkook to reach the keyboard. Jungkook huffs and moves one leg closer to the desk and leaves one leg between Jimin’s legs. Bad idea when Jimin is in a playful mode: he moves his knee against Jungkook’s leg and moves his knee softly upwards against his inner thigh. He intently looks up to Jungkook’s face to see him blush. While laughing and giggling Jungkook manages to operate a few more handles. He returns Jimin’s gaze and commands “You push the start button when I signal that I’m ready” and in the meantime, he softly pinches Jimin’s waist. When Jimin groans almost inaudible, Jungkook smiles and thinks: “payback time”.

They repeat the process multiple times: Jungkook operating some handles and buttons while leaning over Jimin and explaining what he’s doing, and Jimin pressing the start button whenever Jungkook signals he’s ready, both in full flirting mode. After a number of trials, Jimin asks if he can try something. Jungkook can’t say no to the puppy eyes thrown his way. Hesitantly he agrees. It's not that he does not trust Jimin, on the contrary, he is sure that what the elder will add will be good. The thing is that Jungkook isn’t sure if he will be able to finish everything in time, like planned, with all the teasing and flirting.

Jungkook restarts from the beginning. He glances at Jimin a few times, not sure when he will join in. In the middle of the song, Jimin moves towards Jungkook and the mic and synchronizes the “mm mm mm” while slipping an arm around Jungkook’s waist. They keep standing like this until the song is done and the recording is automatically stopped. Even after that, Jimin keeps his arm lingering around Jungkook’s waist.

Suddenly there is a knock on the door and Yoongi enters. In a hurry Jimin and Jungkook step away from each other, almost knocking over the microphone. They both look a bit caught. Yoongi snorts: “I already thought that I would find you in here. I can hear you laugh from the end of the hallway”. The two boys sheepishly look at each other and then mumble an apology to their Hyung. Yoongi shakes his head: “Care to hear the finished song?”. Jimin jumps in Yoongi’s direction with a big smile on his face: “Yes of course!”. In three steps he is out of the door. Jungkook stays behind with a pout on his face. Yoongi turns to him: “For God’s sake, Jungkook, are you going to stay there? Don’t you want to hear what I’ve been up to with your boyfriend?” Jungkook’s cheeks turn bright red and sputters out some inaudible ‘not my boyfriend’ and ‘don’t know what you’re talking about, in defense. Jimin chokes on his own saliva after Yoongi’s statement. Yoongi, on the other hand, is waiting with a stoic face for an answer. Jungkook stammers: “Yes, of course, Hyung”, and he moves towards Yoongi. Before they both step into the hallway where Jimin is waiting, Yoongi stops the younger and whispers “It’s the way you look at him. Your heart eyes give you away”. Jungkook turns even redder but doesn’t answer.

They enter Yoongi’s studio and listen to the finished song. They are all in awe. Jungkook can’t believe his ears.

When they leave Yoongi’s studio, the rapper calls Jungkook back: “Do you have time tomorrow evening to have lamb skewers with me?” The younger scratches his neck and answers: “Of course Hyung, you want to do a collab with me too?” Yoongi smiles knowingly and replies “Yes, you can call it a collab, but it’s another kind of collab. Do we have a date?” and he wiggles his eyebrows. Jungkook smiles shyly at him and answers: “OK Hyung, I’ll make time for you”.

When they come back to Jungkook’s studio, Jimin closes the door softly behind them. When he turns to move back to the chair in front of the PC, he finds Jungkook right behind him with large dark eyes. He sees his own desire reflected in the other boy’s eyes. He takes a step forward and places his hands on Jungkook’s waist. He notices that the younger lowers his gaze towards his lips. “So... boyfriend?”, he says while lifting his hand to Jungkook’s jaw and moves his thumb over the mole under the other’s lower lip and brings his head closer to his. He kisses him softly and passes his tongue over the boy’s lower lip and the mole. The younger sighs, encapturing Jimin’s tongue in his mouth. They kiss until they are breathless. Jungkook untangles himself from the elder’s embrace and whispers: “Let’s go home”. Jimin nods and Jungkook moves to shut down the PC.

They leave the studio in silence, sweater paws hiding their entangled hands.

~*~

Tonight, it is Jimin who asks if it is ok to sleep in Jungkook’s bed. He wants to go to his room to get changed for the night, but Jungkook offers him a t-shirt and boxer shorts in order not to wake up Hobi. When Jimin comes back from the bathroom Jungkook can’t help but feel a little aroused by the sight of the smaller boy swimming in his t-shirt and the neckline slightly sliding from his shoulder, but he fights it down, taking deep breaths to calm himself down.

He moves to the side of his bed to make room for the elder. Jimin clambers next to Jungkook and wraps his arms around his waist to spoon the younger.

But Jungkook turns in his arms and he can see the elder’s glistening eyes in the dark looking at him. After a minute or so the younger scoots closer to softly caress his eyebrows, his nose, his jawline, and his chin. Jimin lets him do this but doesn’t answer the touches.

Then he feels soft lips against his and he automatically answers the soft kisses. After sharing a few soft kisses, he opens his mouth to pass his tongue over de bottom lip of the younger, who immediately allows him into his mouth to deepen the kiss. Kissing each other like that feels so good that they almost forget everything that surrounds them. Almost, because Jimin keeps in mind that Namjoon is sleeping in the same room and he does not want to get caught.

Jungkook scoots a litter closer to feel more of Jimin against his body. It’s then that he feels that the younger is half hard and the reaction in his body is immediate. He stops the younger one from coming closer and breaks the kiss. “Kookie, we cannot do this. Namjoon is sleeping in the other bed”, Jimin says while fighting his own desire. Jungkook sighs in his shoulder, whining a little bit. He caresses the younger’s cheek and places a few pecks on his forehead. Finally, he whispers: “Let’s try to sleep.” Jungkook nods and wraps his arm around Jimin, but they are both restless, too aroused to find sleep. Jimin sighs and decides to go sleep in his own bed. Jungkook is disappointed but he understands that it is the only solution to get some sleep.

Both in their own beds, they stare at the ceiling for a long time, Jungkook wondering and Jimin worrying where this is going.

~*~

“Jungkook! Are you ready?”

Yoongi walks into the living room and is met by Jungkook on the couch already wearing his jacket. “Yes, I’m ready hyung”, he gets up taking big steps towards the door. “Hold on a minute”, Yoongi stops him. He is surprised by the maknae’s eagerness to go out. Yoongi strides over to the kitchen to pour himself a glass of water. Jungkook is already tying his shoes, not wanting to waste time because he is starving. He skipped lunch today to go all out on the lamb skewers. Yoongi calmly drinking his water. He washes the glass and puts it back, then goes to Jungkook, who is standing there like a lost puppy at the door and puts his shoes on.

When they step outside they greet their bodyguards. Jungkook doesn’t recognize one of them, he is probably new as a replacement for another one. Apparently, there was a bodyguard being bribed by the press to tell them some juicy stories. The press always tries to find some sort of scandal. It came out and BigHit fired the man and sued him. Poor guy, Jungkook thinks, probably trying to earn some extra money for his family. But now that he thinks of it, what if one of these bodyguards catches a sliver of his and Jimin’s conversations and decides to sell it. ‘BTS members Jungkook and Jimin GAY?!’ would be written all over the internet. He shakes off the dreading feeling. BigHit handled it.

They arrive at the restaurant. A waitress greets Yoongi, telling him that she missed him. Yoongi laughs: “I was here literally a few days ago, noona”. “Well, I didn’t work then”, she snaps back. She points at a free table and busies herself with coming on to the handsome fellows who are standing behind them. They quickly brush her off, pointing at Yoongi and Jungkook to indicate they’re their bodyguards. She apologizes and rushes away.

They settle at the same table Yoongi always sits at. Before Jungkook can sit down, Yoongi is already waving at a waiter to come over. “Welcome back hyung! Same as always, right?”, the waiter smiles at him. He is very tall with a handsome face. The pair of glasses he is wearing are duct-taped from the side, but he seems to pull it off. Yoongi nods at him and they both turn to look at Jungkook. “Some hot water for me, please”.

When the waiter is gone Yoongi raises his eyebrow: “First time seeing you trying to be healthy”. “What do you mean by that?”. Jungkook said this a little bit sharper than intended. Yoongi laughs, shrugging his shoulder: “Don’t worry your pretty head. I’m just kidding.” Jungkook pouts and starts to play with his chopsticks. A silence falls between them, while they’re waiting for the food. It’s comfortable though, with no awkward tension between them. There has never been anything like that. Yoongi and Jungkook understand each other on an emotional level. They both have it difficult or just don’t like sharing their feelings. This binds the two introverts often together in comfortable nights full of silence. The only difference between them seems to be Yoongi’s ability to observe his environment and draw sharp and correct conclusions.

The waiter is back to set everything up, goes back to the kitchen to get the food, and sets it all on the table. He quickly winks at Yoongi before he takes his leave. Yoongi scoffs at the waiter’s silly antics. He places the skewers on the grill and sits back in his chair taking a swig of his non-alcoholic beverage. Yoongi takes a deep breath and looks from his position at Jungkook. Jungkook does not move. He keeps staring at the meat getting grilled, his mind wondering why his hyung needs to discuss something with him. He goes over the past days: he did his chores, he behaved well, didn’t bother the hyungs, and even wrote some music. There is nothing worth discussing.

The air gets filled with the delicious smell of lamb. Yoongi sits up to check on it and motions to Jungkook that they can start eating. Jungkook gladly picks up his chopsticks and stuffs some pieces in his mouth. But because they’re too hot he does what everyone does: trying to breathe in some air through his mouth to cool the food down. Yoongi shakes his head laughing: “What are we going to do with you?”. It is a rhetorical question, Jungkook knows this so he doesn’t answer and just blows on his next piece.

“You’re really growing up. I remember you as this little boy with big eyes. Scared of the big city, but ready to show it what you got. I think we also put a lot of pressure on your shoulders by calling you the golden maknae. And now you’re an adult, and you do well, very well. You have no idea how proud all your hyungs are.”, Yoongi does not touch the food. It seems he was waiting for the food to start talking. Probably to put Jungkook at ease. But why? To be sentimental and reminisce the old days? Jungkook can do that without being lured in with delicious meat.

“Sure that drink is non-alcoholic, hyung?”

Jungkook shifts on his chair, getting a bit uneasy. The feeling that this dinner is some sort of a trap starts to creep on him so he tries to shake it off with some funny remarks and awkward laughs. But Yoongi doesn’t budge. He seems oblivious to the fact that the younger are starting to get uneasy but he won’t back off. He is going to tell Jungkook what he has on his mind, whether the younger wants to hear it or not.

“But I always wondered when our little maknae would start getting crushes...”

“Hyung, what are you talking about?”

Jungkook cuts him off. Panic starts rising. Does Yoongi suspect or knows something about him and Jimin? Did he catch them kissing? What is he going to say? Will he say how wrong it is for two boys to have feelings for each other? Is he going to threaten him, that if they don’t break it off for the sake of the group, he will tell Namjoon? Or worse, that he will tell Bang PD?

He feels himself getting smaller and smaller with every horrifying thought. Yoongi notices and decides for a different approach, a more direct one.

“Look Jungkook-ah, I'm going to get straight to the point. You and Jimin-ah, what is exactly going on between the two of you?”

Jungkook doesn’t answer though, he just looks down at the hands in his lap. He feels nauseous, his hunger is long forgotten.

“I see how you look at each other... The way you act and talk... It’s more than being good friends, or even best friends.”

Yoongi tries to catch the younger boy’s gaze, but Jungkook refuses. He stays as still as possible, trying to deny it by staying quiet. Yoongi sighs, finally taking his first piece. He nibbles at the lamb, trying to give Jungkook the time to say something. But to no avail.

“I hope you know there’s nothing wrong with having feelings for each other.”

The younger slightly moves in his chair at those words, indicating that he is listening. Yoongi relieved that Jungkook is listening to him now, leans forward and lowers his voice. This forces Jungkook to come closer if he wants to hear what Yoongi has to say.

“We are all thought the story about when a boy meets a girl, they fall in love, get married, get kids and live happily ever after. Well, there is another version of boy meeting boy or girl meeting girl. But we are told this is not natural, against God, an abomination: such people will never get a happy ending. But that’s not true. Liking a boy is okay, Jungkook. Please know that and please know that I support you. I will never turn my back on you, especially not for something like this. And I think I can speak for all the members..., I hope. The only thing I want to advise is, that you think before you act. Is it a crush? Or is it more than that? If it’s just a fling, I advise you to fight against it. But if Jimin is the love of your life, and you want to pursue a relationship with him, you will eventually have to talk to the members and to BigHit. The outside world is still rather homophobic, and BigHit will need to be able to protect you, Jimin, and the whole of BTS. I know you don’t want to think about an eventual breakup right now, and how that could possibly affect BTS. But if it comes to terms, will you still be able to continue working together as professionals? I want you to think about that too.”

Jungkook opens his mouth to say something but words are stuck in his throat. Yoongi takes a deep breath, eats a few more pieces of lamb, and gulps down his drink.

“I want you to be happy Jungkook, and if your chance at happiness is with that precious dancer, I will not stand in your way. Just be careful, OK? And don’t hesitate to come to me if there are any problems or questions.”

Jungkook looks up to Yoongi and nods softly: “Thanks for your advice, Hyung. I’ll think about your words.”

Yoongi gives a reassuring smile that gets answered by Jungkook. His hyung’s words have calmed down his racing heart and set his mind at ease. Knowing he has Yoongi on his side gives him reassurance, but he can’t push himself to talk about his feelings. Yoongi notices that his words seep in, but that he will not get a word out of Jungkook, so he changes the subject to put him more at ease. He made his point, he made it clear to the younger that he is at his side, and that was the purpose of the evening.

During the rest of the dinner, they talk about Jungkook’s recent writing. He excitingly tells Yoongi that he almost finished a song and already has an idea for another. For the rest of the night, they make small talk and when they are all done, Yoongi goes to the bar and pays again. They leave with their bodyguards on their heels.

Arriving at the dorms they thank the staff as always and enter the little building. They say goodnight and split into their separate bedrooms. “Hey Jungkook”, comes from the dark. Jungkook turns around to see Yoongi standing in his doorway. The older looks at him and says in a soft tone that he rarely uses: “I love you, you know”. Jungkook giggles at the love confession.

“Love you too, hyung. Good night!”

“Yeah, good night.”

Chapter Text

Yesterday Jungkook asked him to dance with him for his coming-of-age ceremony. Jimin didn’t think twice and accepted eagerly. But now that he thinks about it, he’s not so sure anymore. He likes to dance, and rehearsing with Jungkook is always a lot of fun, but the dance the younger wants to perform is a very feminine dance and that is not exactly what he likes to do. Yesterday evening, while sitting on Jungkook’s bed while Namjoon was still at the studio, they looked at several videos on YouTube together, shoulder against shoulder, and that must have clouded his judgment. Not to talk about the stolen kisses now and then…

When he thinks back about yesterday’s evening, it puts a little smile on his face.

Today is Saturday and their dance coach is not coming in today. Hobi is going to work with Namjoon, Jin, Yoongi, and Taehyung who have some catching up to do with the difficult choreography. In the meantime, Jungkook and Jimin will start working on the coming-of-age choreography.

After an hour or so, a camera crew enters the practice room. BigHit asked them to film today’s activity in the practice room. If Jimin could crawl into a hole in the ground, he would do it. Jimin plasters a smile on his face and glances at Jungkook through the mirrors. The boy is happily executing the dance moves, so he follows along half-heartedly. And even if Jimin is executing the choreography a bit sloppy, he still is very graceful so Jungkook cannot stop smiling and cannot keep his eyes off him.

Jungkook, who decided to wear a thin white shirt, becomes the victim of teasing from the hyungs. They point and laugh at how visible his body is at some angles. Jimin looks from a distance, he tries to wave some cool air to his burning cheeks. When Hobi holds a break and passes by to joke around and opens an extra button of Jungkook shirt, Jimin just gives up trying to hide his blushing and tries to blame it on the hot practice room. Now he becomes the one getting teased.

As the hours pass by, they get tired of this coming-of-age dance. When the camera crew is long gone, and when the other members dispersed to do other things, Jungkook asks if Jimin could teach him the choreography of ‘Own it’. He already looked at the recording several times and is very eager to learn it.

They start exercising. Jungkook looks at Jimin through the mirrors to copy his movements. Jungkook quickly picks up the sensual choreography. When Jimin feels that they start synchronizing their movements rather well, he wants to create a more intimate atmosphere. He starts experimenting with lightning and decides to dim the lights in the practice studio. In this light, Jungkook’s hour-glass body is clearly visible through his shirt. And Jimin loves that sight. He is totally mesmerized by the younger and feels a bit more aroused than he should be. During another practice round Jimin tries to focus on the dance to calm himself down, but the universe isn’t working with him at this moment. The dimmed room, Jungkook’s illuminated body moving on the beat and the words uttered from the speakers are all very arousing. He feels himself getting hard. He tries to hide it as well as possible but after a certain time, Jungkook notices the bulge in his jeans.

When Jimin sees that Jungkook throws a bit too many glances at his crotch, he stops mid-dance. Jungkook stops too and lets his eyes travel upwards Jimin’s body and wiggles his eyebrows when their eyes meet. It’s obvious that Jungkook noticed his “problem”. Jimin lets himself glide on the floor, arms and legs splayed on the floor, panting. Jungkook gets up to stop the music and sits down with his back against the wall, not far from Jimin. He lets his eyes wander over the elder and then reaches for his bottle of water to take a sip. Jimin lifts himself on his elbows to look at the other boy. He can’t help but stare at his bobbing Adam’s apple. When the younger put his bottle down, he gazes right into Jimin’s dark longing orbs, his eyes glistering in the dimmed light of the dance room. The tingling in his stomach is immediate and travels downwards. Jungkook takes the smaller boy by one of his feet and pulls him towards him. They both giggle. Jimin crawls next to Jungkook with his back against the wall, eyes closed. Jungkook lays his left arm across his stomach and reaches for Jimin’s left biceps. He pulls the other closer and turns his head to the right. When his nose touches Jimin’s ear, he licks delicately at his earlobe and softly sucks the dangling earring in his mouth. Shivers run down Jimin’s spine. Jimin slowly turns his head to face Jungkook. The younger boy let the earring slip from his mouth and let his lips travel Jimin’s jawline. When their lips touch, Jungkook softly licks Jimin’s lower lip. Jimin gasps and this time it is Jungkook who slips his tongue into Jimin’s mouth. Jimin turns his upper body towards Jungkook to place his right hand behind Jungkook’s nape and deepens the kiss. They kiss until they are both breathless.

Jungkook breaks the kiss and whispers in a low voice: “What are we going to do about your little problem?”. Jimin feels his cheeks getting a shade redder. He feels embarrassed that it is so obvious. He turns his head to grab his phone to put the song “Own it” on repeat. Then he turns his head back to Jungkook and starts kissing again, now exploring Jungkook’s mouth. After a while, he gets on his knees without breaking the kiss, and places his thighs around the other one’s upper legs, straddling him. At that moment Jungkook stops fighting down his own hard-on. The kissing becomes a bit more intense. Jungkook runs his hands up the strong thighs of the dancer until he reaches the back of his ass, and pulls him closer, seeking more contact.

When their crotches touch, Jungkook unconsciously thrusts his hips up to seek more friction. Jimin softly moans in Jungkook’s mouth and thrusts back. That uncontrollable feeling of attraction that they have been fighting for so long takes over their brain, and they forget everything around them.

The younger does not know what he is doing, his hands moving along Jimin’s body, sometimes touching his back, then his ass, his hips. Jimin doesn’t seem to mind, he arches his back while his hands travel under the other’s t-shirt over his toned stomach. Jungkook’s skin is unbelievably smooth and hot. He traces his fingers over Jungkook’s ribcage, wavering over his nipples, which elicits soft moans from the younger. He continues grinding against Jungkook’s clothed erection and circles his hips to create a delightful feeling, even if they still have their trousers on. This unleashes an uncontrollable desire in the younger boy. He sighs against Jimin’s lips “I want you so bad”. He never felt this way before and he is about to come. He’s afraid of what Jimin will think of him but he’s not sure if he will be able to hold back for much longer.

The kisses become sloppier, they kiss where they can reach each other: mouth, jawline, ears, neck, back to the mouth to swallow each other’s moans. They hold each other tight when they come. Jungkook comes first. His hands fall next to his body while he sighs “Jimin…”. Jimin’s shaking hands search for Jungkook’s hands. When he finds one, he presses it against his own crotch while he thrusts the last time and comes with a muffled moan in Jungkook’s neck.

They stay like that for a while, panting in each other’s neck, not wanting to let go. At this moment in time, they do not care. They don’t care about their wet underwear; they don’t care about the world around them. They will see what tomorrow brings.

After a few minutes, Jimin whispers: “I think we better go home.” Then he snorts: “I think we need a shower and a change of underwear”, and they both giggle with glistening eyes and a slight pink blush on their cheeks. They get up to get rid of their sticky underwear in the toilets. They leave the studio holding hands. They don’t dare to hold hands on the street, but they walk shoulder against shoulder, grinning, giddy with happiness.

When they reach the front door of the dorms, they give one last peck on the mouth before entering. The dorms are submerged in silence. They sneak into the kitchen to see if there are leftovers in the fridge. Jimin warms the leftovers in a large bowl in the microwave while Jungkook takes two sets of chopsticks. They eat together in silence, leaning in each other’s space. When Jimin picks a piece of chicken from the bowl, he puts it in Jungkook’s mouth and seals it with a kiss.

Jungkook takes a shower first. When Jimin enters his room after his shower, he finds Jungkook in his bed, sound asleep. He caresses the younger’s face and crawls next to him, covering them both with the blankets. He wraps his arms around his waist and nuzzles his nose in the sleeping boy’s neck.

Jimin starts questioning his pact of staying friends with Jungkook. But those worries are quickly forgotten when his breath starts harmonizing with the sleeping Jungkook. It does not take long before he falls asleep too, dreaming of a gorgeous boy that makes him laugh and that cherishes him with his encouraging words.

~ * ~

The next day Jimin and Jungkook stay behind in the practice room to continue working on both dances. But it quickly becomes clear that Jungkook’s head is somewhere else. After a few trials and a lot of mistakes, Jimin stops the music. A little bit frustrated by the younger’s repeated mistakes he asks: “What’s going on Kook-ah?”. Jungkook is silent for a bit. He looks at his feet then looking in Jimin’s eyes and back to the floor, while biting his lip. He looks like he is considering something. Jimin clears his throat. This brings Jungkook back to reality, and he says: “Come on, I want to show you something”. Jimin follows Jungkook out of the practice room. They make their way into the elevator that will bring them to the floor with the music studios.

Once the doors of the elevator close behind them, Jungkook moves towards Jimin and starts kissing him feverishly, but Jimin pushes him back pointing at the security camera. Jungkook winks at him and is about to go for another kiss but they hear the ding of the elevator, indicating that they arrived at the requested floor.

Jungkook walks towards a door Jimin has not entered yet. When they step inside, Jimin sees a desk with a PC, some monitors, and a camera. He turns around and recognizes the room.

“Oooh! Is it here you do the v-lives?” Jungkook smiles at him and nods. Jimin continues: “So weird to see it from the other side!”. And then it dawns on Jimin: “Do you want to do a v-live with me?” The younger smiles when he sits down on the office chair. He rolls over to Jimin and traps him between his legs. “eventually…. But not today”. He looks Jimin in the eyes with large dark eyes and takes Jimin’s hand to intertwine their fingers. Jimin asks softly “Why did you bring me here then?”, “We have a couch here…” and he nods his head towards a couch against the other wall.

Jimin replies “Jungkook, I-… Aren’t you afraid that someone is going to walk in? Yoongi and Namjoon are in their studios”. Jimin wants to protest but the thoughts of lying there with Jungkook are too appealing. When he looks back into Jungkook’s eyes, he sees a mirror of his own longing. There is no way he is going to say no to Jungkook.

“I can lock the door, but I didn’t want to do that before knowing you are ok with it”. He walks to the door and locks it. When he wants to turn around, he feels two arms around his waist, and a body pressed against his back. Jimin has to stand on his toes to kiss him behind his ear. He also feels Jimin’s hardening erection pressing against his ass. He turns around in Jimin’s embrace and starts kissing the elder. After a few minutes of kissing, Jimin takes the hem of the other’s shirt to lift it over his head. He takes a long hard look at Jungkook’s chest, in a way that makes the younger shy. When Jungkook wants to cross his arms over his chest, Jimin prevents it and says: “You’re so beautiful, let me see you”.

His eyes roam over Jungkook’s chest down to his abs and his perfect belly button. Jungkook grins shyly: “You’re looking at me like a pervert”. They both giggle shyly but it breaks the awkwardness. Jimin places both his hand palms on the other’s rock-hard chest and lets them glide slowly downwards over his abs and waist.

He kisses his collarbones and trails wet kisses down his chest. He licks one nipple while rubbing his thumb over the other. Then he moves his mouth back up while his hands roam downwards over his belly. Jungkook shudders under his touch.

The younger mirrors the elder and lifts his t-shirt over his head. His eyes roam over Jimin’s chest. He brings his fingertips to Jimin’s collarbones and caresses down the elders’ chest. They start kissing again, chest against chest, stomach against stomach, and finally crotch against crotch. They grind against each other to find some friction and softly moan in each other’s mouths.

Jimin’s hands move further down until they reach the band of Jungkook’s sweatpants. He hesitates for a second, but then he tugs the sweatpants down. Jungkook understands the hint and starts to get rid of his shoes and sweatpants. Jimin quickly does the same. As soon as they are stripped from their clothes, except their briefs, they start kissing and moaning and grinding again. Jungkook does not dare to move his hands, so he lays them around Jimin’s waist.

Jimin gives Jungkook the time to get comfortable with this new state of undressing before he moves one of his hands back down. His fingers linger on the elastic of his underwear, but then slowly pushes his hand inside the younger’s briefs. He let his hand glide softly against the other’s length and then closes his hand around Jungkook’s dick.

Jungkook squeaks and jumps back at the touch. Jimin immediately removes his hand and urges to whisper: “I’m sorry, sorry, sorry”. He caresses the younger’s face and kisses him softly: “I don’t want to do anything that makes you feel uncomfortable”. Jungkook kisses back and after a few seconds, he whispers back: “I don’t want to stop… I was just surprised. I never did something like this before.”. Jimin answers softly: "I know... we'll do this together but at your pace." Jungkook kisses Jimin again and after a few more seconds he let his hands glide over Jimin’s back, down to his ass, making sure that their crotches touch again. After a few more seconds, he lets his hands slide inside Jimin’s underwear and caresses and softly squeezes the elder’s ass cheeks. He has been dreaming of that perfect round ass for months now and touching the bare skin feels so damn good, that he instinctly grinds harder against Jimin’s erection. He groans against Jimin’s neck while he moves one hand slowly to the front of Jimin’s briefs. Jimin gasps in anticipation of the touch and almost pushes his dick into Jungkook’s hand but he can control himself to wait for the younger to come around. He knows he's already leaking precum. When he finally feels hesitating fingers touch his length, his breath hitches and he softly whispers Jungkook’s name against his throat. But then his hand stops again.

Jimin cups Jungkook’s face in both his hands places his forehead against the other’s forehead and whispers: “Jungkook-ah… look at me”. Jungkook’s eyes focus on Jimin’s eyes. “Don’t be shy…. If you don’t know what to do, just try to do something you like yourself. Chances are that I like that too.” Jungkook nods shyly. Jimin kisses his face, his nose, his mouth, and after a few more moments he feels Jungkook’s fingers around his length. He clings against Jungkook and moans against his mouth. Jungkook moves his hand hesitantly. After a few strokes, Jimin whispers: "Feels so good..."

Jimin places wet kisses on the younger’s neck and chest, and caresses his hip bones while he whispers: “I’m going to remove our underwear now”. Jungkook nods. He pushes Jungkook’s briefs down and does the same with his own. Then he presses his naked erection against Jungkook’s, trying to suppress another moan. Almost at the same time the younger releases a muffled moan that travels straight to Jimin’s cock that is now being released from the restriction of his underwear.

Jimin takes the younger’s hand that is still around his length and places it around both their dicks. He places his hand on top of the other’s larger hand to indicate the rhythm. They move their hands together to get each other off. Kisses become very wet and sloppy. They both come hard, the cum spilling over their hands. They pant with half-open mouths against each other’s skin while they come down from their high.

When they are able to catch their breath, they look around for paper tissues, and luckily there is a box on the table next to the computer. They clean themselves up and start to dress again. When they both have their briefs and t-shirt on, Jimin takes Jungkook by the hand and says with a grin: “You brought me in here because there is a couch, so let’s make use of it for a few minutes”. They fall down on the couch and continue panting, shoulder against shoulder.

After a few minutes, when their breath is steady again, Jimin says “Jungkook, we have to talk about this.”. When the younger does not reply, he continues: “We cannot do this every evening, and neglect our rehearsals.” Jungkook sights “I know, Jimin.“

“Hyung,” Jimin points out. And now with more urgency in his voice, he says: “we stop this after tonight, and we go back to work as of tomorrow.”

Jungkook nods hesitantly: “As of tomorrow”, but does not look at Jimin. The elder feels that something is bothering the younger, so he turns, leaning one knee onto Jungkook’s thigh, and asks: “What’s going on in that mind of yours”. Jungkook answers hesitantly: “I’m so sorry that it was such a mess.” Jimin brings up one hand to Jungkook’s cheek and turns his head to force him to look him into the eyes. “No, no, don’t think that! It felt good. Didn’t you enjoy it?” Jungkook is quick to reply: “Yes, of course. But I’m afraid you will not want me anymore after tonight, because I’m so bad at this.”

Jimin sees a tear blinking in the corner of his eyes. He pushes himself to his knees to remove the tears with his thumbs. He places soft kisses on the younger’s jawline while he straddles the other’s lap. He whispers: “Don’t think that. I like you for who you are. And it was your first time. Next time it will be better, you will be less nervous, you will know what to do and you will enjoy it more.” Jungkook pushes his head in Jimin’s shoulder and whispers: “But when will be next time. Definitely not tomorrow. You said it yourself. We can’t do this anymore.” He places a soft kiss in the juncture between Jimin’s neck and shoulder. He places his hands on Jimin’s waist under his t-shirt. He kisses Jimin’s jawline, his chin, and takes his bottom lip between his lips. They start kissing again and after a few minutes, he moves his hands up and down against Jimin’s side. Jungkook breaks the kiss and asks shyly: “Can I get a second chance?”. Jimin giggles softly and nods. The younger takes the hem of Jimin’s t-shirt and lifts it over his head. He moves his lips to Jimin’s jawline, down his neck. The younger places his hands under Jimin’s ass cheeks to lift him up on his knees, to get better access to his collarbones where he places a trail of wet kisses. Then he slides his hands in the back of his briefs and pulls them down as far as possible. Jimin’s half-hard erection springs free against the younger’s chest. Jimin quickly frees one leg from his briefs and positions himself again over Jungkook’s thighs. The younger starts placing wet kisses on his nipples and softly sucks on them while getting Jimin off. Jimin tries to reach Jungkook’s briefs but Jungkook keeps him up with one hand on his ass cheek. He whispers to Jimin: “Let me do this right, this time.” Jimin whispers back: “But I want to take care of you at the same time.” But Jungkook shakes his head. Jimin slaps his hand against the younger’s chest. “You always want to be the best at everything, isn’t it?” Jungkook grins his big bunny smile and Jimin continues mischievously: “Let me teach you a lesson.” And by that he lifts Jungkook’s t-shirt over his head, frees himself from Jungkook’s arms, and helps him out of his underwear. The sight of the younger’s full hard arouses him even more. He kisses Jungkook’s mouth, while he slowly slides down against the other’s stomach and sits back down on Jungkook’s lap making sure the younger’s dick is under his ass knowing damn well that the other has a thing for his ass. Jungkook’s mind goes blank while he trusts against Jimin’s ass cheeks. The moans that escape his mouth are rather loud. Jimin tries to muffle the other’s moans with his mouth while hushing him: if Yoongi could hear them sing and laugh at the other end of the hallway, he can definitely hear Jungkook moan.

With shaking hands the younger reaches for Jimin’s hard-on and continues his ministrations. Jimin squirms and trusts against Jungkook’s stomach, while making sure the younger gets enough friction in between his ass cheeks, until they both come. Jimin sinks against Jungkook’s body. They are both exhausted and are panting. After some time when they come back to their senses, Jungkook caresses Jimin’s waist and back, and whispers with a satisfied smile around his lips: “Wow, that was mind-blowing.” Jimin giggles: “You were not bad yourself: the golden maknae with the golden hands”. Jimin continues to hug Jungkook, he does not want to let go.

After some time Jungkook whispers in Jimin’s shoulder: “Come on, we are sticky. Let’s get up.” They clean themselves up and get dressed. After a few minutes of silence, Jungkook says “Let’s go home and take a shower.” But Jimin holds him back: “If we go home now, they will all be up our ass, asking us what we’ve been doing and I don’t want to face them like this: they will see that something happened, and Tae will definitely smell it.” He guides Jungkook back to the couch and drags him down “Let's cuddle for a while. I like cuddling”.

It doesn’t take long before they fall asleep in each other’s arms. They don’t know how much time passed, but they eventually get up from the couch and do a last inspection round of the studio in order to not leave traces. They kiss each other softly but extensively before they unlock the door of the studio. Behind closed doors, they might be lovers now, but for the outside world, they are just band members. They don’t know when they will be able to kiss each other again.

Chapter Text

BTS travels to Japan for a series of 4 concerts in Osaka and Nagoya. They are their first concerts outside Korea since BTS counts 7 members.

At Incheon airport, everything goes smoothly. Except for one thing. At the passport control, there is a little panic: Namjoon can’t find his passport. Managers are quick to help Namjoon search for it, while they throw open his luggage, he looks through his small bag. “I have it!”, Namjoon screams. A few passers-by turn their heads towards the commotion. “It was between my book”, the staff and the other members sigh in relief.

It’s the first time that they fly first class to shield them off from prying eyes. Taehyung and Jimin take two seats in the middle so they are able to talk to each other. With all repetitions going on, they spend less time together than before. Namjoon and J-hope get on the right side, J-hope in front of Namjoon. Yoongi and Jin are seated in the middle too, in front of the chattering boys. Jungkook’s seat is on the left side in the back.

They all get comfortable in their seats. Yoongi is quick to warn the youngsters behind him to keep quiet because he wants to sleep. Jungkook looks at Yoongi turning his seat into a bed and curls himself to a little ball. Jungkook thinks to himself that catching up on some sleep is not a bad idea. So he does what his hyung did, puts his ear pods in, and closes himself off from the world.

Jimin takes a selfie of him and Taehyung with a sleeping Jungkook in the background and places it on Twitter.

When they try to exit Itami airport, they are flooded by fans. Jungkook walks next to Jimin, who is scared from the attention; Taehyung walks in between Namjoon and Jin. Fans keep trying to get closer and even touch them. One manages to slightly pull on J-hope's arm. She is immediately pushed away by security. Other than that, they are able to get into the assigned cars unscratched. But the encounter with the screaming fans leaves a deep impression on Jimin and Taehyung. Even the older BTS members are deeply impressed and a bit scared. But they accept that this is one of the many aspects of their rising success.

Today they perform at Osaka in a sold-out venue, and tomorrow they will perform again in Osaka. The planned concert was sold out in less than one day, and a lot of fans were not able to get a ticket. Therefore, BigHit decided to organize a second concert in the same venue, the day after.

The addition of the two members Jimin and Taehyung seems to be the best choice ever as the number of ARMYs seems to grow each day.

The concert is a huge success, and the crowd went wild. Nobody made mistakes, they even delivered outstanding performances. The response from the crowd was overwhelming and the members arrived at their hotel in a euphoric state.

Because BTS is doing well, with two sold-out venues in the same city, BigHit decided to give each member his own room to guarantee a maximum of privacy and rest for each member. In the van they receive the key to their room, their luggage already placed in their room by the staff. Jungkook immediately retrieves his phone from his pocket to send a text message.

Not a second later Jimin’s phone buzzes. He looks surprised and takes it out of his pocket and smiles at the message he just received:

Coming to my room?

He texts back:

Let me take a shower first, and then I come over.

Jungkook’s phone buzzes and he reads the message. He gets a mischievous grin on his face when he texts back:

We can shower together.

Jimin snorts when he reads the naughty message and replies:

Deal! Let me fetch a fresh undie from my room and I’ll come over.

When Jungkook reads the message, a wide smile spreads from ear to ear, getting a little bit aroused at the thought, and sends the last message before putting his phone back in his pocket:

OK! I’ll order room service in the meantime.

They decide to stop texting before the other hyungs start getting a hint of what’s going on, but they both keep a stupid smile on their faces. They don’t notice that Yoongi followed the whole interaction through half-closed eyes.

~ * ~

Jimin’s heart races when he knocks on Jungkook’s door, looking left and right in the hope no one of the hyungs decides to leave his room. Luckily, the door opens almost immediately, as if the younger was waiting at the door for him.

When Jungkook opens the door, he pulls Jimin inside and starts kissing him hungrily, one hand behind Jimin’s nape and the other hand rubbing Jimin’s back. When they break the kiss Jimin whispers breathlessly: “Aren’t we going to shower first? We're still sweaty from the concert.”

Jungkook answers: “I think we better wait for the room service to arrive. I already ordered it, so it will arrive any minute.” They start kissing again when they hear a knock on the door. Jimin decides that it is better not to be seen in the room, so he enters the bathroom and closes the door while Jungkook opens the door to let the room service in.

Jungkook links his phone to his portable speaker and puts on a playlist with erotic music while Jimin dims the lights. Jimin almost throws himself in Jungkook’s arms and they start kissing again, their kisses being needy close to desperate. Jimin murmurs: “It’s been so long…” and Jungkook murmurs back: “I want you so bad.” They slip their hands under each other’s hoodie to feel the other’s naked skin, rubbing their crotches against each other to get some friction. Jimin takes the hem of Jungkook’s hoody and groans “off”. Jungkook doesn’t hesitate to pull his hoody over his head. As soon as the younger lifts his arms to get rid of his hoody, Jimin is faced with the other’s muscular chest. He immediately places both his hands on the chest in front of him while ogling him up and down, moving his hands downwards over Jungkook’s toned stomach. He starts sucking and licking one of his nipples while moving his hands from Jungkook’s stomach to his waist.

Once his hoody is off, Jungkook immediately lowers his arms giggling, as he is rather sensitive around his nipples. Then he helps Jimin to pull off his hoody. Jimin’s naked torso is quite a view so he takes his time to admire him with his hands and his eyes. Jimin pulls him closer to feel the younger’s skin against his skin while chasing Jungkook’s mouth. But Jungkook kisses and licks below the elder’s ear and trails wet kisses over his beautiful jawline. When their lips touch again, they deepen the kiss and start grinding against each other. Jimin’s hands wander to the younger’s crotch and start rubbing the other’s clothed erection. Jungkook groans softly and mirrors Jimin’s move by rubbing the elder’s hard on. They capture each other’s moans with their mouths.

Jungkook tries to unzip Jimin’s black jeans with shaking hands. Jimin murmurs: “I’ll do it myself…” They try to continue kissing while Jimin takes off his pants and his shoes. Jungkook slips out of his sweatpants in the meantime. Jimin slips his hands in the younger’s briefs and wraps one hand around his erection. He slowly pumps his hand up and down. The younger groans and slips his hands at the back of the elder’s undie to grab his but cheeks. They get lost in each other’s touches. When Jungkook moves his hand to Jimin’s crotch, they hear a loud knock on the door. They stare at each other, horrified, hands stilled, and Jimin whispers: “Who is that??” They stay silent for a while, leaving their hands on each other’s crotches, but then there is a second and a louder knock. Jungkook yells: “Who is it?”.

They hear: “It’s V, open the door! I’m on V app.” coming from the other side of the door. Jimin grabs his clothes from the floor and sprints to the bathroom. Jungkook closes the door but leaves it on a crack.

~ * ~

Taehyung jumps on his bed rolls over and looks at the ceiling. He doesn't want to sleep; the caffeine and adrenaline still rush through his body. But what is there to do? There isn’t anything interesting on TV – he already checked-, he isn’t interested in watching YouTube. He opens Twitter and switches to his private account to spy on what ARMY is doing. He sees many still screaming over the recent concert. A little clip of him and J-hope acting cute together pop-up multiple times. There are a lot of fan sites publishing photos from the concert.

Suddenly he jumps up. Of course! Why didn’t he think of this sooner?

He opens Twitter and sent a tweet out in the world announcing he’s going to do his first v-live. Immediately his notifications are flooded with fans liking and answering on it. He goes to the v-live app and starts streaming.

When the fans log into the v-live they are met with a plushie fox from zootopia. As quiet as possible he grabs with one hand the arm of the plushie to wave with it and with his other hands he plays the song Snow Flower by Park Hyo Shin. The sweet melody plays softly in the background while he introduces himself.

“You did a good job singing”, he says: “Now go away.”

Taehyung slaps the plushie away and turns to the camera to greet the fans. He answers some questions, telling them that he is doing fine, and shows them the fox laying on the ground.

“I got it from a fan, I hug it when I go to sleep”

He looks at the comments. A lot of fans are saying hello in so many different languages Taehyung cannot read. Declarations of love for him are sent, which makes Taehyung smile. ARMY really are the sweetest, he thinks. But that thought is quickly contradicted when the comments come in asking for other members.

Where is Jungkook?

Is J-hope going to do a V-live?

Can we see RM?

Taehyung quickly turns away from the comment section. A silence falls, he doesn’t know what to do. He didn’t plan anything it was an impulsive decision. BTS look so natural while doing these, so he thought that he could do it too. Well, he was wrong. Taehyung didn’t know that it would be so awkward talking to a camera, especially because no one answers back.

“I don’t know what to do. Please send me some ideas”, Taehyung pouts and looks at the stream of comments. His eyes widen to see how quickly everything comes and goes and how difficult it is to read anything.

“Stay with us for an hour”

Taehyung smiles: “No, I'm not going to do that. I’m just staying for a little while.”

Some questions are asked about the last concert. With pleasure, he goes in on those ones and answers with a big theatrical smile on his face. Then there they are again;

Go to Jin.

I want to see the others.

Attack the next door!

Taehyung sighs. Namjoon had warned him that when he decides to do a solo live, those questions will definitely pop up and that he should just ignore them. But you know what? He already admitted that he didn’t know what to do, so why not visit another member. “But I don’t know any of the room numbers”, he pouts again. “I’ll ask in the group chat”. He grabs his phone and opens the group chat, fingers hovering over his keyboard. Who will he visit? Namjoon and Yoongi are most certainly knocked out, J-hope is still finishing something up at the stadium. That leaves Jin, Jimin, and Jungkook. Taehyung thinks hard, Jin will probably not appreciate it to get a visit so late at night at such short notice.

“Shall I visit Jungkook...”, he mutters to himself and then looks towards the comments. His eyes scan the chat which is filling with enthusiastic yesses. Taehyung looks at the message a manager had sent with the member’s room numbers and finds Jungkook’s. “I will text him to let him know”, he tells the fans. Hopefully, Jungkook sees it in time, he doesn’t want to catch the maknae in some awkward situation, especially not when thousands of people are watching.

He grabs the selfie-stick where the camera is attached to and starts walking back towards the door. “Let’s go to Jungkook-ie", Taehyung grins. His boxy smile on full display.

Out of his room, Taehyung turns left and starts skipping through the hallway. He looks carefully at all the room numbers; he doesn’t want to knock on the wrong door and wake someone up. The last time that happened Yoongi had stared at him with a look that most definitely would’ve shot killing lasers at Taehyung if he was a superhero. Luckily that was not the case and he got off by just a lengthy scolding the next day.

Arriving at 1112 he checks the message again and starts knocking fervently on the door. “Jungkook! Jungkook-ah, open the door!”, Taehyung yells. He should probably be a little quieter for the other people on their floor, but he can’t contain his excitement. It’s going to be so much fun to entertain the fans together.

“Who is it?”, comes from the other side. “It’s V, open the door!”, he answers and starts banging on the door again but now with his flat hand. “I’m on v-app”, Taehyung starts to explain but is cut off by Jungkook yelling another “Who is it?”. His voice sounds louder but also panicked. Muttering is heard from to the other side and Taehyung plants his ear against the door. “It’s V”, he exclaims.

It’s silent for a few seconds. “Hold on! I’m not wearing any clothes”, the younger yells again. This takes Taehyung by surprise and he says “Aha, he is not wearing any clothes”, Jungkook sure had time enough to get dressed after he got the message. Did he even get it? He might have been in the shower, Taehyung concludes. He waits patiently at the door.

Jungkook shouts again: “Hold on!” Taehyung looks at the camera, his facial expression quickly goes from being surprised to playful teasing. He makes a weird mischievous face, side-eying the door, and repeats for the viewers: “Jungkook isn’t wearing any clothes?”.

Taehyung hears some more shuffling coming from behind the door, and then finally the door opens, a wave of loud music flooding him. Jungkook warns: “I’m not wearing pants”.

Taehyung bursts into the room and immediately notices the weird atmosphere. All the lights are off except for a dim lamp standing on the desk, and the music is playing loud. Taehyung listens closely but he doesn’t recognize the song. He looks around the room and then at Jungkook who is still fiddling with his bathrobe.

Taehyung asks: “What’s this song?”

He turns the camera to Jungkook, who answers: “I don’t know”. He turns his back to the camera while desperately trying to close the bathrobe. He’s checking his briefs: he is not as hard as he was a few minutes ago, but still. He tries to camouflage the remaining bulge under his bathrobe and prays it will not be visible on camera.

The younger continues: “I don’t know, let me look”.

Taehyungs notices Jungkook’s odd behavior. He is looking everywhere in the room except for Taehyung and the camera. “What are you even doing here? You scared me.”, Jungkook asks. His tone is harsher than Taehyung expected. Taehyung moves to the music installation to lower the volume, but Jungkook has already taken his phone and lowers the volume himself.

Jungkook repeats his question: “Why are you here?“ Taehyung replies a bit more defensively: “I’m on v-live. I wanted to sing a song with you for ARMY”, Taehyung explains. Jungkook suddenly rushes to his side and looks at the camera while fixing his hair. His eyes widen: “You’re live?”

Taehyung turns to him with a strange look: “Yes. I sent you a text. Didn’t you see it”. Jungkook looks from Taehyung to the camera, back to Taehyung, and then to the other side of the room. “I was eating Uhm... bread and rice. I was just about to eat bread again”, he says while scratching the back of his head. Taehyung was about to comment that he would’ve seen his text if he was just eating, but Jungkook walks away. He grabs a piece of bread and comes back. Taehyung watches him the whole time.

Taehyung feels Jungkook's discomfort and thinks: “Something isn’t right” and he starts regretting that he came over.

“No, but what are you doing here hyung?”, Jungkook asks again. “As I said, I want to sing with you again as we did earlier”, he turns his head and sees the younger nervously nibbling on the bread. Jungkook says: “Wait a second”, and walks to the side of the bed to turn on the lights in the room. He accidentally shuts them off but then finds the right button to switch the light on and illuminate the room. Taehyung lifts his camera to show the room to the fans. There is a black hoodie draped over a chair and a pair of black shoes on the ground, next to the chair.

Taehyung lies down on the bed while Jungkook moves into the hallway. He suddenly hears a voice whispering: “Oh, you scared me!”. Taehyung panics inside while he keeps a straight face in front of the camera: this was unmistakably Jimin’s voice; he would recognize that voice everywhere and in any circumstance. In the corner of his eye, he sees that Jungkook also switched on the light in the bathroom. He knows, and probably Jungkook also knows that Jimin is scared in the dark. Jungkook also quickly hands Jimin his phone which was lingering around in the room. He quickly picked it up earlier once he saw the phone, and he hopes that an alert fan didn’t notice it.

When Jungkook returns to his side, Taehyung sits up on the bed and Jungkook takes place next to him. He starts checking himself in the camera, ruffling in his hair and turning his head from left to right. “I haven’t washed up yet”, he whines. “That’s OK, ARMY still loves you. Let’s sing a serenade for ARMY”. Taehyung turns the camera towards Jungkook, who shyly smiles and says: “My makeup is smeared everywhere”. Taehyung replies with a simple “Uh?” because what else can he say to that.

Then Jungkook asks if the other members sang. Taehyung lies and replies: “Yes”. But Jungkook knows he’s lying so he replies: “Hmm, really? Are you sure?”. He knows for sure that at least one member hasn’t sung yet, because that member is hiding in his bathroom. Taehyung confirms with a simple “Yes” but Jungkook insists: “I think you are lying” and turns to Taehyung with a smirk on his face.

Jungkook stands up and Taehyung follows swiftly. He starts filming Jungkook: “Please Jungkook-ie, sing for ARMY”. Jungkook turns to the camera and takes it out of Taehyungs’ hands. He films himself walking around the room positioning himself away from the hallway: he does not want to expose Jimin if he would come out of the bathroom.

“I’ll put on a song and you’ll sing”, Taehyung grabs his phone and opens his music app. Because of the lack of reaction from the younger, Taehyung looks up and catches Jungkook still staring towards the hallway. Taehyung puts on a song and starts dancing on the beat. “What song is that?”, Jungkook turns his head. Taehyung, happy with finally having his attention again, shoves his phone in the younger's face.

Taehyung starts dancing again, trying to get Jungkook to join him. But the younger one keeps standing there, awkwardly looking at the camera, his gaze sometimes lingering over to the bathroom.

The atmosphere is awkward, and Taehyung tries his best to not show it to the audience, but Jungkook is just not cooperating. He is just standing there, saying he doesn’t know any of the lyrics while they both know very well that it’s one of his favorite songs. Taehyung uses some of his silly antics and finally, he gets a reaction out of the maknae. Jungkook starts smiling and uncertainly singing. His gaze constantly wandering over to that damned bathroom.

When the song ends Jungkook looks at Taehyung. “Are we going to stay long on v-live?”, he asks. Taehyung looks up from his phone: “I’m texting Jimin-ah". Jungkook leans over Taehyung to see what he’s writing, but the latter put his phone to his chest. “Are you going to visit Jimin-hyung?”, “Yes, if he checks my message. If not, then no”. Taehyung quickly types something along the lines that he is coming. Just after he presses sent a soft “ding” is coming from the bathroom, but hopefully quite enough for the fans not to notice it. But Jungkook heard it, and Taehyung also heard it because his head snaps towards the bathroom door. Sudden anxiety rises in Taehyung’s heart, it’s probably better that he leaves. He makes his way towards the door, smiling at the camera and saying goodbye to Jungkook he keeps standing there. Not moving an inch. “Bye ARMY! I will study English for you”, he waves from behind.

Finally, Taehyung leaves the tension-filled room. The door slams shut behind his back. He feels like he can breathe again. He is not that stupid to believe that Jungkook was just sitting naked on his bed, alone, listening to a sensual song while eating bread. He is almost certain someone else was there in Jungkook’s room, and that person can’t be anyone else than Jimin. He shakes these thoughts off, it’s not that something scandalous happened. He’ll ask Jimin tomorrow.

When the door slams shut behind Taehyungs back, Jimin storms out of the bathroom, completely dressed again. They are both panting and trembling from what just happened. Jungkook snarls towards Jimin: “What? You are leaving, hyung?”. Jimin extends his hand towards the younger’s chest to calm him down: “I think it’s better, Jungkook-ah. What if the fans come to the conclusion that there is someone in your room? What if the managers have seen the v-live and conclude that someone is in your room? And they come over to check on you and they find me in your room?”. Now Jungkook becomes really angry: “I don’t mind they find you in my room because I like you, but apparently, you don’t feel the same for me and you prefer not to be associated with me.” He picks Jimin's shoes from the ground and shoves them in his hands while pushing him towards the door. He opens the door of the room and pushes Jimin outside, his shoes still in his hands. Jimin turns towards Jungkook and whispers desperately: “Jungkook-ah! Jungkook-ah!”, in the hope the younger would calm down, but Jungkook doesn’t listen and closes the door in Jimin’s face.

~ * ~

Taehyung approaches his door and sees that he’s locked out. Well damn. He is still in front of his room when he hears Jimin’s desperate whispers. He’s so confused that he forgets to keep a straight face in front of the camera. He hears a door closing and then he sees Jimin. When Jimin looks up and sees Taehyung standing in front of his room, he signals to make him stop recording. Taehyung understands and quickly makes up his mind: “Everyone I think this is it for the v-live. My door is locked and I forget the key inside, so now I have to look for the master key. I hope you all enjoyed my first v-live. Bye-bye!”

Taehyung smiles and waves for the last time en then press ‘end broadcast’.

Both Jimin and Taehyung face each other in silence and then Taehyung starts hesitantly: “Were you in Jungkook’s room?” Jimin’s look travels towards the floor in front of him while he nods and softly adds: “Yes… and now we have a fight…”. He turns around and softly pads to his own room, shoulders curved and head low, shoes still in his hand. Taehyung calls after him: “I’m sorry Jimin, I really am. I didn’t know!”. But Jimin doesn’t react and closes the door of his room behind him.

~ * ~

Jungkook throws himself on the bed and starts crying desperately on his pillow. This had to be a romantic evening with Jimin without having to fear being interrupted. But damn Taehyung with his v-live. He drags himself to the bathroom to take a shower and goes to bed afterward.

They both toss and turn in their beds that night, unable to sleep. Jimin is afraid of the comments on the v-live. He constantly checks his phone to verify if fans came to conclusions. He knows that there are fans out there that ship him and Jungkook. By running off he wanted to protect Jungkook but now he starts to doubt if running away was the right thing to do. He misses the warmth and the fragrance of the younger in his arms. After a few hours of tossing around, he remembers that he still has that oversized t-shirt of Jungkook smuggled away in his bag, so he rolls out of bed to get it and to hold it in his arms and to sniff at it: it still smells like Jungkook, although his scent is very faint. He sends a text to Jungkook to hear if the younger can sleep and if he is alright. But the answer never comes. He finally falls asleep with his nose snuggled in Jungkook’s t-shirt.

Jungkook is also concerned with the comments on the v-live and eventual upcoming analysis videos, but the heartache of missing Jimin is worse. He wants Jimin to hold him and to comfort him. He wraps his arms around a pillow and whispers “I love you Jimin” and cries himself to sleep.

~ * ~

Jungkook wakes up by a number of soft knocks on his door. He gets up and stumbles towards the door. He opens the door without thinking, without asking, but as soon as the door opens, Jimin stumbles right into his arms. He whispers: “I missed you so much tonight. I’m so sorry I panicked and ran off. We should have taken that decision together.” He lifts his head towards the younger’s face. They both notice at the same time that the other’s eyes are red and swollen from crying. They see their own emotions mirrored in the other’s eyes, emotions changing from hurt over despair to love and want. Jungkook does not need to hear more and presses his lips on Jimin’s. They softly start making out, but the kisses quickly become needier. When they break the kiss to breathe, Jungkook murmurs against the elder’s neck: “Can we please take that shower now?” He feels the elder smile in his neck, so he takes that as a yes. He takes Jimin by the hands and guides him into the bathroom.

They quickly undress while ogling the other’s body. Jimin locks the younger’s gaze and sees the same dark hungry look staring back at him. Jungkook turns towards the shower to open the tap. He feels arms wrapping around him, wet kisses on his shoulders and his back, and the elders’ crotch pressing against his ass. When the water is warm enough, they enter the shower. Jungkook turns in Jimin’s embrace and cups his jaws to softly kiss his lips, standing chest against chest, hips against hips.

But Jimin has other plans: he trails his kisses over Jungkook’s neck towards his left shoulder and downwards over his chest. He licks the younger left nipple while the thumb of his right hand rubs softly over the other nipple. He slowly moves down leaving kisses the whole way down over Jungkook’s toned stomach. While going on his knees, he trails his tongue from the belly button down until his tongue reaches the other’s groin. He palms the other boy’s hard-on while looking up to meet the other’s eyes. Jungkook looks at him with hooded eyes, breathless, anticipating what’s coming. Jimin licks at the tip of Jungkook’s cock eliciting a moan from the youngers’ mouth. He licks down the pulsing nerve and then backs up till his tongue reaches the tip again. Then he swallows his whole cock and slowly starts moving his head up and down. Jungkook can’t help thrusting his hips forward making Jimin gag. But Jimin places his hands on both the other boy’s hips to keep him from thrusting again. He starts bobbing his head and quickens the pace while licking and swallowing around Jungkook’s erection. Jungkook tries to still his moans by putting his fist against his mouth. He starts moaning Jimin’s name and these moans travel right to Jimin’s cock. While continuing to bob his head, he lifts one of his hands from the younger’s hips, to be able to stroke his own length with his own hand to also chase his own release. It doesn’t take long before the younger comes into the elder's mouth without any warning. But Jimin doesn’t mind. He swallows the cum and helps Jungkook through the after waves of his orgasm. Jungkook wobbles on his legs and they give out under him. He sinks on his knees straddling the elder’s thighs. He starts kissing the other boy again desperately.

After some time, he breaks the kiss and rests his head on Jimin’s shoulder. He whispers in Jimin’s ear “wow, I always imagined how a blow job would feel like, but I never thought that it would feel this good.” And he releases a grin of satisfaction. Jimin smiles and takes Jungkook’s right hand and places it on his own hard-on. Jungkook asks softly “do you want me to do the same for you?” But Jimin shakes his head and replies whispering “No, I’m almost there. Just a few strokes”. So Jungkook takes Jimin’s cock in his hand and starts moving his hand up and down. Jimin loves to feel the younger’s large hands around his dick, it’s a big turn-on for him. Jungkook tries to stifle Jimin’s moans with his mouth, but it’s difficult: the elder arches his back and tilts his head backward in delight, so he places a hand behind Jimin’s nape, and kisses and licks Jimin’s throat that is so sinfully stretched in front of him. With each stroke, Jimin thrusts back in the youngers’ hand. After a few strokes, he comes into Jungkook’s hand. They continue kissing while Jimin comes down from his orgasm.

When Jimin comes back to his senses, they help each other on their feet. Jimin wraps his arms around Jungkook to hug and kiss him, placing soft kisses right under his jawline while Jungkook reaches for the shower foam. He first washes Jimin’s hair and then his own hair while Jimin washes their bodies. They dry each other’s hair and when they are ready, they leave the room together to join the other members that are already waiting in the van that will bring them to the venue for the rehearsals for the second concert. Nor Jimin nor Jungkook give Taehyung a glance.

After a few minutes Namjoon turns to Taehyung: “So, you did a v-live yesterday evening? How did it go?” The maknae line holds their breath. Taehyung squeezes an “Oh, it went well” out of his throat. “Good”, Namjoon replies, “We can look at it all together in my hotel room after the concert. I’m looking forward to it.”

Chapter Text

The second concert in Osaka starts in the afternoon and again it is a big success. After the concert, they share a bottle of champagne to celebrate the two perfect concerts. After the concert, they are picked up by cars for the drive to Nagoya.

There are 4 rooms to share and like always, they let faith decide. This little contest is being filmed for the fans. It's nothing new for the old members, but for Taehyung and Jimin it’s a fairly new experience having cameras around. It’s not the first time, but still having a camera following you around is not something you get quickly used to.

They start playing their little bottle cap game to decide who gets which room and with who they will have to share it. Jungkook exclaims loudly that he is very confident in his skills and will put his stuff already in the solo room. Jin grabs his wrist to hold him back and scolds him for being obnoxious. They all laugh. In the end, Jin wins the solo room. Jimin shares a room with Taehyung, Jungkook ends up in a room with Hobi and Namjoon and Yoongi will share one.

Taehyung and Jimin are lounging on one bed, tangled together while scrolling on SNS, just like old times when they shared a studio together. When they come across a funny or sweet one, they share it with the other. Jimin’s thoughts keep going back to how crazy it is they are having concerts outside Korea. He shares these with Taehyung and they start dreaming forward about their first stages in other foreign countries. They feel like they already “made” it.

Of course, they also come across comments on Taehyungs v-live in Osaka and there are also already a bunch of analysis videos. The number of hits on the v-live itself increases constantly.

Tae sighs: “Jimin, I know you have been avoiding me this morning, but we need to talk about this. I don’t want this to come in between our friendship. You’re my soulmate, you’re too precious to me. I didn’t think for a minute you would be with Jungkook. If I had known, I wouldn’t have come to his room. I didn’t want to expose you guys.” Jimin turns on his stomach to look at his friend and replied softly: “I know that, Tae Tae. I was just frustrated because we had a fight because of that. But I went to his room this morning to talk it out, and everything is OK now.” He starts laughing and hides his face in his friends’ shoulder when he adds: “We didn’t exactly talk, but whatever.”

Taehyung snorts: “So you are already at that stage.” He tickles Jimin while he adds: “But I’m really hurt you didn’t confess your dirty secrets to me.”

Jimin confesses to Taehyung that they have a “thing” going on for a few weeks now: “I know what we discussed during our trainee days and we really tried to stay friends. But it kinda got out of hand during our private dance practice for the ‘coming of age’ ceremony.” Jimin pauses for a while and then continues: “But then again we convinced each other to keep it friendly… but we can’t…. I’m so sorry if I disappoint you.” Taehyung caresses through his friends’ hair. “Don’t feel sorry if Jungkook is the one for you. Just be careful that the fans don’t get wind of it. And I also suggest you talk to Namjoon, he needs to know I guess.” Jimin looks up at his friend: “To be honest, it’s a bit too early for that. OK, it’s more than goofing around, but I don’t know if we can call it a relationship. We didn’t talk about that yet.” Taehyung snorts: “No because you’re too busy having sex.” Jimin slaps Taehyungs’ chest and they both start laughing. When they stop laughing, Taehyungs asks: “Where do you guys do it? Not in the room with Hobi or Namjoon sleeping, I hope. That would be gross.” Jimin slaps his chest again: “No! We are no exhibitionists.” Taehyung wiggles his eyebrows: “Well?” Jimin snorts: “In the practice room…, in the v-live studio…, in the shower…” “In the practice room!?” Teahyung exclaims: “And you don’t call that exhibitionism!”. They both start laughing again.

Finally, Taehyung says: “I already knew that you crossed the line we discussed. I caught you both kissing when you were looking at coming-of-age clips. But you didn’t hear me come in. So I left immediately. But, to be honest, I’m a little bit hurt that you didn’t trust me enough to tell me. I’m still your best friend, you know. You know I will always support you.”

Jimin looks his friend in the eyes and says: “I’m sorry for that. I guess I felt too guilty because of what we discussed the morning after the photoshoot. I guess I would have told you eventually. I’m glad the air is cleared now.”

~ * ~

Jungkook lays on his bed, staring at the ceiling. He dies to text Jimin to ask if he can come over to his room, but he knows that the elder and Taehyung need time to talk through some things. He replays the shower sex of that morning in his mind over and over again. He tries to remind as many details as possible: how he enjoyed the blow job, but especially how Jimin looked like the minutes before his orgasm: hooded eyes, completely lost in the feeling of Jungkook’s touch, so beautiful, so ethereal, so sinful.

Jungkook reminds himself: “You’re not going there, Jungkook, you have a roommate…”

Jungkook reflects on the things that attract him to Jimin. Of course, he has an attractive and toned body, a well-shaped ass, and he is physically attracted to him. Very much. And those eyes: his gaze can be very imposing but when he laughs, his eyes disappear and turn in crescent moons. But they are dark when his gaze is full of want, want for Jungkook. And he likes to stare back in those eyes, he can stare in them for eternity. He can look at Jimin for hours.

And those teasing looks he sometimes gives him…

Jungkook reminds himself again: “You’re definitely not going there, Jungkook, you have a roommate…”

Jimin has a beautiful mouth with full lips. And when those luscious lips break into a smile, it reveals the most beautiful smile he has ever seen. It’s a pity the stylist noonas often try to conceal part of his lips. And when his tongue darts out to lick his bottom lip, just to tease him… How he wants to kiss those soft lips. And how they felt this morning on his dick…

“Damn Jungkook, stop those thoughts, you don’t want to get embarrassed in front of Hobi…”

But Jimin also has a beautiful soul: always perceptive for the other’s needs, always kind. He’s the kindest soul he ever met. Always noticing Jungkook. He smiles at the thought of how beautiful the elder’s face looks when he smiles. And how easily he can make the elder laugh.

He likes the way how his body fits in his when he hugs him, how his small hands fit in his hands when he holds them. He fantasizes about how it would be to hold his hand in public, to show the world that they are together. But he knows that they are far from there: one, it’s generally not accepted for two boys to show affection in public, and second, they are idols and they are not expected to have a relationship.

He takes out his phone to look at the many photos he has taken of Jimin. He hopes that Hobi will not want to know which game he is playing. Before they were seven, he already took a lot of photos, but an equal amount of each member. But since Jimin joined BTS, he mostly takes pictures of Jimin. In a recent interview, Jin jokingly said that Jimin is his main model. So embarrassing…

He groans when he turns on his side because he really wants to be with Jimin. He controls himself and just sends him a text to wish him good night. He tries to fall asleep, with his phone in his hand and Jimin on his mind.

An hour later he still is not asleep, and he sends another small text: I miss you…

~ * ~

Before leaving for the venue Jimin wants to pass by the shared room of Hobi and Jungkook. Taehyung shakes his head at the many excuses Jimin brought up to convince him he needed to pass by.

They knock at the door and Hobi lets them in with a big sigh: “Jungkook is still in the shower”. Taehyung and Jimin enter the room and sit down on one of the beds. After a few minutes, Hobi checks his watch and says agitated: “I should be at the venue within 10 minutes because I have to discuss a few things with Sonsungdeuk.

Jimin gets an idea and says: “You know what? You can leave with Taehyung now. I’ll wait for Jungkook.” Taehyung throws him a knowing look and then looks at Hobi who is looking at Jimin with a smirk on his face. But he answers: “Thanks Jimin, that’s a great idea! “. “Okay see you there, hyung! I'll stay with Jimin-ie to wait for our maknae”, Taehyung throws himself on Jimin’s lap flashing him a big smile. Jimin just looks at him annoyed and tries to send a message with his eyes that he too should leave. For a few seconds, they keep staring at each other until J-hope clears his throat. Taehyung sighs: ”Fine, let’s go.” He gets up and grabs J-hope, who is looking confused between the two of them, by the arm and pulls him out of the room.

Jimin safely waits a few minutes to make sure they are really gone. He hears the sound of running water from the shower and a singing Jungkook through the bathroom door. He quietly enters the bathroom and undresses, leaving his clothes scattered on the ground.

Jungkook jumps up when he feels arms around him and a naked body pressed against his back, but when he turns around to see Jimin standing close to him, with a big smile on his face, he says: “Wah, you scared me!”. Jimin says sweetly: “Good morning, sunshine! I missed you too.” and cups his face to kiss him and they start making out under the shower.

When they leave the shower, Jimin notices that his shirt is all soaked. Jungkook lends him a sweater that is too large for Jimin, but he likes that the fragrance of the younger one surrounds him. And Jungkook likes the view of the elder in his clothes.

~ * ~

When the members of BTS start to trickle in at the venue in the morning, the staff is busy setting everything up: the lighting, audio, special effects, fireworks, etc... The dressing-room door opens. Yoongi wearing a gray beanie enters. His eyes, who are small because of sleep, scan the room stopping at a table where seven cups of coffee stand and a big bowl filled with croissants. Sleepily, he walks over and takes a coffee, immediately taking a large swig.

“Goodmorning hyung, had a good sleep?”

Yoongi turns around. J-hope is standing in the doorway with a big smile plastered on his face. The rapper is dressed in his usual fashion sense, with a little bag bungling from his jeans. Opposite from Yoongi, J-hope strides over to the table with so much energy and grabs a cup. “You’re sure you need the caffeine?”, Yoongi flops down on the big couch in the corner. He sips from his coffee while looking at J-hope. “Can never hurt”, he answers throwing a dazzling smile towards the grumpy man. He places himself on a chair at the table grabs a croissant and a little jam container next to the bowl. He dips the pastry in the strawberry jam. He takes a huge bite and pulls his phone out to scroll through it.

“Goodmorning...”

In comes Namjoon. He is wearing a tracksuit and has glasses on. It’s obvious that he too is still half asleep. Namjoon throws himself on the couch, not even glancing at all the coffee on the table. He curls himself up into a ball and closes his eyes. J-hope who had been following him with his eyes quickly snaps a picture.

It’s quiet for some time, only the heavy breathing of Namjoon and the sounds of the busy staff outside can be heard. Yoongi also closes his eyes, his little snores adding to the noise. A loud scream and the sound of things crashing on the floor cut the peace.

“Shit! Ah Taehyung-ah, really! Why are you doing this to me in the morning.”

“I’m sorry hyung! I didn’t think you would get this scared.”

“I should spank you. One of these days you’re going to give me a heart attack.”

“Oh, spank me eh..”

J-hope opens the door. Both Jin and Taehyung snap their heads looking caught. Taehyung is quick to enter, leaving Jin behind to gather all his stuff from the floor. “This brat”, he mutters under his breath. J-hope laughs and helps Jin pick up everything. Yoongi and Namjoon who got awoken by all the chaos, are watching everything unfold. Taehyung goes to sit on a chair furthest away from the door. He starts munching on a croissant, eyes following Jin to see if he is still mad. Jin goes over to another table to drop his stuff and then makes his way to sit next to J-hope who hands him a cup of coffee.

A manager comes in to check on them, mentioning the screaming. Jin informs him that it was just Taehyung trying to be funny. The manager looks over at Taehyung whose cheeks start reddening out of guilt. He quickly mutters a sorry. The manager is about to leave but stops himself in his tracks. “Jungkook and Jimin are not here yet?”, he notices, “When will they arrive?”. All five look at each other and shrug their shoulders. They have no idea. Taehyung shrugs his shoulders: “We went to Jungkook’s and Hobi’s shared room after showering, Jungkook wasn’t ready yet.” Hobi continues: “I have to discuss a few things with our coach, so Jimin was so kind to offer to wait for Jungkook. So I shared the car with Taehyung”. His smile becomes wider and wider while looking at Taehyung. But Taehyung’s face remains unreadable.

The manager leaves, deciding to give Jungkook and Jimin 10 more minutes. If they are not present by then, he will send staff to fetch them. Namjoon gets up from the couch, deciding to have some breakfast himself.

Suddenly the door flies open and laughter fills the room. Everyone turns their attention towards the noise. Jimin and Jungkook enter the room, too sucked into their own world to see all the members staring. Jungkook looks away from Jimin, his eyes meeting Yoongi’s. Yoongi raises his eyebrow, scanning both of them. A smirk appears when he notices Jimin is somewhat swimming in a green hoodie, a hoodie that probably belongs to Jungkook. Jimin starts to feel shy by all the attention. He clears his throat and waves timidly.

“Good morning...”, Jungkook says slowly. Still not understanding why everyone is looking at them like they just misbehaved and are going to get a scolding. Except for Yoongi, he just looks really amused. Jungkook murmurs: “What’s the matter? Am I wearing something of you?” Yoongi snorts and answers: “No, but Jimin is wearing something of you.” Yoongi’s witty remark makes all members laugh out loud. Hobi and Taehyung prefer to keep their mouth shut that Jimin was definitely not wearing that sweater when they entered the room this morning.

Jungkook steps towards the table where he spotted the bowl of freshly baked croissants. He plans on devouring a few of them because he is starving. Jimin is less unbothered than Jungkook. But when Jungkook notices that Jimin is still standing in the doorway like a statue, he goes back and softly grabs his wrist. He drags the elder after him and places him on one of the remaining chairs. Jungkook hands him a cup of coffee, a croissant, and a jam container. Jimin takes it and smiles at him, eyes filled with adoration. Jungkook feels butterflies in his empty stomach and smiles back while getting lost in Jimin’s pretty dark eyes.

The other members are still staring, closely watching their every move. Nobody knows what to say, they are weirded out with what’s unfolding in front of them. Taehyung is praying to god that Jungkook and Jimin are not going to start making out in front of them because it sure looks like that. Jin is just weirded out by the tension between the two boys, and Yoongi is mentally scolding them for being so obvious. Hobi frowns when he notices that they both have damp hair, and not only Jungkook but doesn’t say anything.

Jungkook feels the lingering gazes of his hyungs and snaps: “What!” Jimin places a hand on Jungkook’s arm to calm him down and the latter quickly apologizes, dropping onto the last chair. “Where have you been?”, Namjoon finally asks. Jungkook frowns: “The hotel.” “You’re late”, Namjoon argues. “They’re not that late Joon-ie”, Jin comes in between. Namjoon throws an angry look towards the oldest and turns his attention back to Jimin and Jungkook.

“Sorry, I guess I'm just tired and stressed. Just make sure to be on time”, he makes his way back to the couch. Everyone continues what they were doing before the intense conversation. “We will promised. And no worry hyung, we’re all nervous for the upcoming show”, Jimin says. He takes a sip of his well-needed coffee, the adrenaline from almost being caught leaving his body. Jimin feels his phone vibrate and takes it out of his pocket.

What took you so long? Needed to do a quicky in the shower before coming to the venue? 😉

Jimin looks at Taehyung while a blush grows on his face, who is looking back at him. He quickly types an answer.

Nooo…. Shut up.

After a few seconds he gets a text back:

You wear a different sweater than this morning and your hair is wet. So…?

Jimin glances again at Taehyung but before he can text back, he gets another message:

I’m waiting for the filthy details…

Jimin looks up at him and he sees a mischievous grin on the other’s face. So he sticks out his tongue to Taehyung, who responds by wiggling his eyebrows rapidly.

Unconsciously, Jimin moves his leg under the table until his knee touches Jungkook’s knee. He feels a hand softly rubbing his thigh. Jimin looks up and throws a little smile towards Jungkook, grateful for his presence. His phone vibrates again and it’s Taehyung sending a heart. Jimin looks at his best friend and throws him the same smile.

“Jimin, your lips are so red, you must stop biting your lips because -”

Knock, knock, knock. Jin is interrupted by one of the staff members informing them that everything is ready for rehearsals. Jimin stands up: “Yes, time for practice. Let’s go!” and rushes outside, glad to escape another close call. The others follow swiftly, laughing among themselves over Jimin’s enthusiasm.

~ * ~

The dressing room is completely silent.

Rehearsals went absolutely perfect: the choreography was executed perfectly and everyone’s voice was on point. They gave it their all, the dance coach was satisfied, so now BTS is exhausted and can take a rest.

On the couch, J-hope, Namjoon, Yoongi, and Jin are propped against each other, all sleeping. J-hope has wrapped his leg and arm around Namjoon in his sleep and is slightly drooling. Meanwhile, Namjoon and Jin are facing each other, both their mouths slightly agape, making it look like they’re silently screaming at each other. Yoongi is completely curled up in a ball covered by his big, padded coat, not moving at all. The only indication of him being there is the steady raising of the coat and two bare feet sticking out from the bottom.

The maknae line is seated at the table. At first, giggling among each other over their sleeping hyungs, but now minding their own business. Taehyung is leisurely playing a game on his phone. His eyes repeatedly close and each time it becomes more difficult to open them again. Jimin has folded his arms and is now resting his head on them, resting his eyes but not really sleeping. Jungkook is watching a video on his phone, wide awake. Caringly stroking Jimin’s hair, the only thing that is keeping the elder awake. There is a soft thump, Jungkook looks over. He sees Taehyung’s head slumped over; the boy had given in to his tiredness.

Finally, everyone is asleep, so Jungkook takes his chance. He softly pokes Jimin in the side. Jimin slowly lifts his head and Jungkook’s heart makes a little jump by seeing how adorable and cute the sleepy boy his. He bends over and whispers: “Let’s get out of here”. Jimin stretches his whole body, Jungkook’s words still processing in his mind, and asks: “Why?”. Jungkook lifts an eyebrow and conjures a mischievous smile on his face. Jimin finally registers what the younger means, and asks whispering eagerly: “What do you mean? Where could we go, there is staff everywhere”. “I saw a storage room not far from here”, Jungkook stands up and extends his hand. Jimin grabs it and lets himself get pulled from the chair and through the room. “I can show you the world. Shining, shimmering, splendid”, Jungkook starts to sing softly. He looks back, the biggest grin plastered on his face and his eyes glimmering with mischief. Jimin slaps him on the arm and shushes him: “Shut up, you brat, or they’re going to wake up. Do you want us to get caught?”. As quiet as they possibly can they leave the room.

Jungkook quickens his pace, Jimin behind him, to get to the storage room as quickly as possible and without someone noticing them or missing them. His stomach starts to flutter in anticipation, because he has a pretty good idea of what Jungkook has in mind.

Luckily nobody crossed them when they arrive at the door of the storage room and Jungkook carefully feels at the door handle. Luckily the door is not locked, and they enter quickly, closing the door behind them rapidly. They giggle in relief.

The door is barely closed and Jimin feels himself getting pushed against it. Two big hands grab his wrists placing them next to his head. Jimin giggles when the younger start peppering his neck with little kisses. “You look so cute, totally engulfed in my clothes”, Jungkook lowers his voice, “But of course you’re prettier without any”.

Jungkook’s hand travels down Jimin’s body, and then his hands sneak under the sweater. Jungkook keeps kissing his neck while touching every part of Jimin’s torso. Jimin starts worrying about Jungkook leaving a hickey, but that’s quickly forgotten when the younger grabs his ass.

Jimin runs his hand through Jungkook’s hair and pulls at it to make him look up. “Mmmh is that true”, he starts kissing Jungkook. He cups his face and tries to deepen the kiss by slipping his tongue in Jungkook’s mouth, but the latter doesn’t kiss back. Jimin immediately stops, thinking he went too far and made Jungkook uncomfortable. But he is not, on the contrary, he has the most shit-eating grin ever.

“Oh, you want to play it like that huh? Well, I'm not in the mood. I think I'm going back to the hyungs.”

Jimin is about to leave but gets immediately spun back around. Jungkook shakes his head fiercely: “No, no, don’t go. I'll be nice”. He wraps his arms around Jimin’s torso, while the elder starts caressing Jungkook’s hair. Their eyes flicker between each other’s lips and eyes and Jungkook lowers his head to kiss Jimin’s lips. They are still a bit swollen from earlier that day but he’s pretty sure the stylist noonas will do the necessary to hide that with make-up. Like how they always conceal his upper lip. What a waste if you ask Jungkook.

When Jimin slightly opens his mouth to breathe, Jungkook slips his tongue in to deepen the kiss. They make out while their hands slip under each other’s sweater and roam over each other’s toned stomach and chest. Of course, they have a hard time fighting down their upcoming erections, but it is not the time nor the place to give in to their desire.

When they break the kiss to breathe, they hear voices and quick footsteps passing by the storage room. “I think it’s best that we return”, Jimin whispers, getting his hands from under the other’s sweater. Jungkook groans loudly. While Jimin leads them back Jungkook whines like a little kid making the elder laugh. “Come here you big baby”, Jimin says. He grabs Jungkook’s hand and intertwines their fingers. Together they make their way back to the dressing room where luckily everyone is still sleeping.

~ * ~

It’s finally time for the concert. The stadium is filled with fans who are excitedly talking and holding tight to their army bombs and banners. There is a long line for the merchandise stand and the toilets.

All the members are preparing themselves backstage. They still have 30 minutes but they are already dressed and styled. Jimin, Taehyung, and Jin are warming up their voices, Yoongi is doing some stretching exercises and J-hope is helping Namjoon revise some parts of their choreographies. Jungkook has fallen asleep on his chair while one of the stylist-noonas is still busy applying make-up.

While the stylist noona applies lip balsam to Jimin’s lips, she softly remarks: “Your lips are a bit swollen today. Have you been biting on them?” Taehyung, who is standing next to him, answers promptly: “Or maybe he has been kissing someone”, earning a slap in his stomach. Taehyung jumps away with a big grin on his face. The flustered girl looks with big eyes between them but keeps quiet, knowing it’s not her place to say anything.

15 minutes pass and the chants of the fans become louder and louder. Jimin and Taehyung look at each other, they’re still not used to this feeling. The feeling of nervousness to not disappoint the fans and also the feeling of being loved. Namjoon wakes up Jungkook to tell him to start warming up because it’s essential and they don’t want any injuries.

7 minutes remain. The lights in the stadium dim, the screaming increases, and then quiets down when the VCR starts playing. BTS rushes to take place on the platform that will raise them on the stage. The last checks of the microphones and in-ears are being done. Taehyung wants to go on the platform but is stopped by one of the staff panickily notifying him that the zipper of his pants is still open. Taehyung thanks her and tries to close it as subtle as possible and goes to stand next to Namjoon. Jungkook who had been watching the whole spectacle laughs when he sees the female staff turn around with a hand on her chest and sigh in relief.

Jungkook pokes Jimin’s side and whispers in his ear what just happened. They giggle together, their heads touching because of how close they are standing. “Are you nervous?”, Jungkook asks. Jimin nods, he was trying to hide it, but he guesses that his constant fidgeting gave him away. Jungkook looks around and he quickly grabs Jimin’s hand, slightly squeezing it in comfort. They both look at each other, calming down because of each other’s presence. The moment doesn’t last long, they are ushered by the staff to go up to the platform. All the others are already on there waiting. When they get on the platform, they all bump their fists together shouting: “Bangtang fighting!”.

When all of them stand ready and the VCR ends, a signal is being sent to start the music. Jump blasts through the speakers, the smoke machines are turned on and the platform starts going up. Their concert in Nagoya has begun.

Throughout the whole concert, Jungkook and Jimin are inseparable. They follow the choreographies meticulously, but when there is an opportunity to interact with or touch each other they take it.

When the time comes in No more dream for Jungkook to pick up Jimin, he does not set him back down right after. He decides to run to Jimin’s place to put him down there. The joke is well received by the fans with a lot of screaming. When Jimin is put down he gives the younger a playful slap on his chest, they laugh at each other and resume dancing. They don’t make any mistakes, but their intimidating faces are replaced with big smiles.

During Run, when Jimin and Jungkook’s synchronizing high notes are nearing, Jimin decides to act a little bold. He makes his way over to Jungkook, who is standing still, trying to guess what the elder is up to.

They are facing each other, standing close and Jungkook takes Jimin’s hand and does not let go. They stare at each other and get lost in each other’s eyes. Jungkook leans forward until his forehead touches Jimin’s forehead and they stay like that while they let their voices harmonize, both hitting the high notes perfectly. It’s insane and the crowd shouts in awe. Jungkook grabs Jimin’s nape and they stay like that, frozen, even when their high notes are long gone. The crowd is going wild but they are both so lost in each other’s eyes, and it really looks they are going to kiss. They can feel each other’s breath on their faces.

In this moment Jungkook thinks; Fuck it. He wants to kiss Jimin here and now, show the whole world what they are. At the same moment, Jimin's’ heart starts racing: is the younger really going to kiss him in front of all these people? Jimin is not sure if he wants that, but looking into Jungkook’s heart eyes, it is very tempting.

Jimin is the first to come to his senses and breaks away from Jungkook by placing his hand against the younger’s shoulder and turn away. He shyly passes his hand through his hair while walking away. He quickly falls back in his role, but it takes a few more seconds for Jungkook to realize what just happened and to fall back in the song.

After they performed all their songs, it’s time for the speeches. Everyone stands on their usual spot, Namjoon takes the floor. He thanks ARMY for coming and showing them so much support. He even mentions how grateful he is that Jimin and Taehyung were added to the group, saying how BTS feels complete now with them. After Namjoon it’s Taehyung’s turn. Then Yoongi, Jin, Jungkook, J-hope, and last but not least Jimin. Before any of the members begins their speech, fans applaud and cheer for them.

Jungkook is looking at the sea of purple lights while pulling out one of his earpieces, but the moment he hears Jimin’s voice he turns around to face him. He wants to give him his full attention. Jimin who did not see this starts thanking the fans. He tells them he enjoyed the evening a lot and asks if they had a lot of fun. This is answered by cheering and loud yeses. Jimin turns to the others, smiling from ear to ear which turns his eyes into two crescent moons.

Jungkook and Jimin do not break eye contact, the stadium fills with loud cheers. When Jungkook and Jimin do not move, Namjoon decides to wrap the evening up. He steps to the front, placing himself between the two boys which forces them back to reality.

It's time to bow and say the last goodbyes while leaving the stage. Jin is about to extend his hand towards Jungkook, but he isn’t standing there anymore. The younger had walked to the other side of Namjoon and is now trying to wriggle himself between the leader and Jimin. Namjoon sighs and makes a place for him, shaking his head and rolling his eyes towards Jin who is making a gesture to leave him be.

Jungkook can’t be happier now with Jimin’s little hand in his big one. They intertwine fingers and start bowing. During the bowing, there is always a little pause. Jimin takes advantage of this pause by bringing his head closer to Jungkook’s and whispers: “I like you”. Jungkook turns to look at Jimin with big eyes. Before he can react, they are standing up again and turning around to bow again. Jungkook quickly switches his microphone from one hand to the other, not wanting to let go of Jimin. They bow again and now it’s Jungkook to get closer. Jimin is already looking at him. It takes a second for Jungkook to muster up the courage but when he opens his mouth they’re pulled back up. By the sudden movement, they end up standing inches from each other and noses touching. Jimin can feel Jungkook’s breath on his lips when the younger whispers: “I like you too, hyung.”

Jungkook is about to close the gap but is roughly pulled back by his shirt. Taehyung, with a panicked face, turns him around and wraps an arm around his shoulder. While walking away and leaving Jimin behind he whispers barely audible: “What the hell do you think you’re doing?!”. Jungkook turns his head and sees Jimin joining J-hope who was calling him over. He turns back, the realization of what almost happened starts hitting him. His heart starts beating even faster than moments ago. He almost fucked up; he realizes. They all wander off the stage, waving to the fans. Jungkook throws a few glances towards Jimin to see how he’s doing and where he is going but does not try to move over.

Finally, he gets off stage, he rushes to the dressing room with Taehyung on his heels. Jimin is walking in front of him, head hanging low, busy taking off his in-ear. Jungkook supposes he is worrying and wants to hold him so bad, but he doesn’t dare. All the courage from on stage is completely gone. The confused and worried stares of the staff are not helping.

~ * ~

When they are all in the dressing room, Jimin and Jungkook are met by 4 pairs of eyes ranging from upset to furious; Taehyungs’ eyes are filled with sadness. Everybody is silent and there is a lot of tension in the air.

Suddenly Namjoon shouts: “What was that all about on stage?! We are professionals! And we absolutely don’t do fanservice; I thought we were clear about that!”. He pauses looking furious at the two boys. “Everybody to the cars and I see you two in my room as soon as we are back at the hotel.”

Chapter Text

When they are all in the dressing room, Jimin and Jungkook are met by 4 pairs of eyes ranging from upset to furious; Taehyungs’ eyes are filled with sadness. Everybody is silent and there is a lot of tension in the air.

Suddenly Namjoon shouts: “What was that all about on stage?! We are professionals! And we absolutely don’t do fanservice; I thought we were clear about that!”. He pauses looking furious at the two boys. “Everybody to the cars and I see you two in my room as soon as we are back at the hotel.”

Jungkook and Jimin get in the same car because they also arrived together but the atmosphere is far less lovely dovely than in the morning. Jimin leans his head against the car window and stares outside. His hand is covered by the sleeve of his oversized sweater. Jungkook feels the elder’s discomfort and searches his brain to find something comforting to say but to no avail. So he slides a bit into the direction of Jimin - but not too much because he does not want to alert the driver – and reaches with his hand towards the sweater paw resting on the car seat. He slips his fingers into the sleeve to find Jimin’s hand and intertwine their fingers together. Jimin turns his head towards Jungkook and gives him a small smile, but then he turns his head back to continue staring through the window.

When they come back to the hotel, they go directly to Namjoon’s room. But Namjoon is not alone, Yoongi is also there. Jungkook’s eyes flicker from Yoongi to Namjoon and back to Yoongi. Jimin keeps his eyes on the ground and fidgets with his fingers.

Namjoon starts: “Yoongi is here because he is my roommate, but he also insisted on staying.” He gestures towards one of the beds and says: “Sit down”.

Once they are seated next to each other, on the bed in front of Namjoon, the latter sighs: “I want to discuss what happened on stage..., I want to understand. But I want it to be an honest discussion, where everybody can speak his mind freely. That’s why I want it to have it in my room, without any staff member that can overhear us.” He looks from Jungkook to Jimin and back. Namjoon continues: “Jungkook, can you please explain what you think you were doing during ‘Run’?” But Jungkook looks Namjoon in the face and answers “just goofing around, nothing more. Just a bit of fan service.” Yoongi, who is leaning against the wall snorts at that.

After a few seconds, which feels like minutes, Yoongi breaks the silence and tries: “I’ve been observing you two for several weeks now, and I can’t get rid of the feeling that something is going on between the two of you. And I repeat myself, there is nothing wrong with catching feelings for each other.”

Namjoon’s head snaps towards Yoongi: “What? You already talked to them?”

“I just talked to Jungkook some time ago. And I gave him a bit of advice as his hyung. I told him to think this through; to not jump into it lightheaded because if it is just a fling, you can better fight against it because it can blow up in your face, but also in the face of each BTS member. But if it is serious, we have to find a way to make it work amongst our seven. Because we work and live together 24/7.”

Jimin and Jungkook keep silent. Jimin slowly lifts his head to look at Jungkook but the younger’s face is unreadable and from the way he sits, with his arms crossed in front of his chest, it looks like he is in defense mode.

Namjoon nudges his knee and says: “Talk to us Jungkook. I know talking about your emotions is not your strongest point, but in this case, we need to know what goes on in your head... and your heart.”

Jimin looks at Jungkook again, and he nudges his shoulder with his own. He wants to hold his hand but because the other holds his arms crossed, there is no chance at that. He lays his hand on the younger’s back and starts rubbing his back to help him relax. Jungkook looks first at Yoongi and then at Namjoon and says in a defensive tone: “I like him”. He waits a few more seconds and continues in a softer tone: “I like him… a lot actually. And I’m not going to fight against it; I’m going to fight for him.”, and a blush spreads over his cheeks.

Now that he got that off his chest, he relaxes and lets his arms slide against his side, hands falling in his lap. Jimin shuffles a bit closer to Jungkook and grabs his hand to intertwine their fingers. The younger rubs with his free hand in his eyes but then slides that hand around their intertwined hands.

Jimin adds, despair clearly audible in his voice: “We were drawn to each other from day one. We really tried to fight against it. After the photoshoot, we talked about our feelings and we agreed to stay friends.”

It is silent in the room after their confession, each member trying to find the right words to say.

With tears in his eyes, Jimin continues: “We really tried, you know. But slowly it became more.”

“It was never our intention to put on a show on stage, but it just happened. We were caught in the moment. We are very sorry for that.”

Namjoon says: “Am I correct when I deduce from all this that you are already in a relationship and you want to give this relationship a chance?”

Jimin answers hesitantly: “We didn’t label it as such yet, and we hadn’t the intention to reveal it already because it’s in a very early stage, but yes, you can call it a relationship.”

Namjoon adds: “We have to inform all members. I want to hear their thoughts on this because we have to close the ranks. As Yoongi says, we work, live and sleep together 24/7 and we don’t have a lot of free time. So there is almost no room for dating and alone time. Everything will literally happen under our noses.”

“And we will also have to talk to Bang PD once we’re back in Seoul.“

“But we have no clause in our contract that forbids us to date,” Jungkook replies defensively.

“No, I know, but he needs to know because he needs to be able to protect us. Bang PD is very open-minded, and he supports LGBT. it’s very plausible that he will be understanding, but the outside world is still very homophobic. It can have a very bad impact on you, on Jimin, and on BTS.”

“I also want you to think about what will happen in case of a breakup. You still need to be able to work together. If that’s not the case, it can lead to disbanding BTS”.

Yoongi adds to the conversation: “I already told you, all I want for you is to be happy. I really don’t want to be the one to tell you to put your feelings aside and see you unhappy.”

Jimin starts crying: “I never wanted to hurt any of the members. If you want to kick me out of the band, I’ll accept that, but please don’t kick Tae out of the band. He will never survive it. Becoming an idol has always been his biggest dream, even bigger than mine, and I don’t want him to be punished because of me.”

Namjoon sighs and puts his head in his hands. He stays like this for two whole minutes. The others look at him waiting for anything from the leader. “I don’t think it will come to kicking someone out of the band, seeing the rising number of fans since you and Taehyung joined BTS. It’s really stunning.”

Namjoon finally gets up. “OK, let’s talk to the others now”.

Namjoon sends a text in the group chat asking all members to come to his room for a group talk. He starts walking up and down the room while Yoongi follows his every move. He sighs: “For god’s sake, Namjoon, stop roaming around. You make me seasick.”

Taehyung is the first to arrive. The first thing he notices is Jimin’s hand in Jungkook’s lap, so he supposes that the talk with Namjoon was not that bad. But seeing Jimin’s tear-stained face confuses him. He takes place at the other side of his friend and starts rubbing his back to comfort him.

Jin and Hobi come in at almost the same time. Jin takes place on the bed which Namjoon was sitting on before, while Hobi takes place on one of the chairs in the room. Namjoon sighs and sits down next to Jin. Jin stares at the intertwined hands in front of him but doesn’t say anything.

After a few seconds, Namjoon starts: “We have an issue we need to discuss.” When Jungkook’s head snaps up to look at him he realizes what he has said and he corrects: “Well, it’s not an issue as such, but we need to discuss how to proceed from here.”

He looks around the room and continues: “Our two friends here, have something going on.” Yoongi starts laughing: “I never knew you were this bad with words, Namjoon-ah.” Hobi who is looking at Namjoon side-eyes the two on the bed next to Taehyung. “I already suspected something like that”, he says.

Jin looks with an open mouth from Jungkook to Jimin and back, taking his time to process everything that has been said. Suddenly he jumps up and shouts: “What?! How is that possible?” He looks back at Jimin and points at him: “It’s all your fault! Jungkook never looked at anyone before, and definitely not at boys!”. Namjoon pulls at the hem of Jin’s shirt to make him sit down again: “Calm down! Let’s talk as grownups. Shouting will not help.” But Jin continues: “You poisoned his mind with your promiscuous behavior. You started to seduce him from the first day, always checking him out through the mirrors during dance practice, constantly touching him.” Jimin is too upset to say something. He opens his mouth, but nothing comes out. Jungkook jumps up from the bed and shouts at Jin: “How dare you say something like that. Don’t say such ugly things about Jimin. I like him, hyung! I like him very much!”. Jimin starts crying again, now comforted by Taehyung who wraps both his arms around him to shield him from a furious Jin. Namjoon pulls Jin towards the bathroom, followed by Yoongi, to try to talk some sense into him.

In the meantime, Hobi tries to calm down the maknae line by relativizing Jin’s harsh words.

When the three-elder comes out of the bathroom, Jin moves towards Jimin and apologizes: “Jimin, I’m sorry I hurt you with my harsh words. I clearly wasn’t thinking straight. I know it’s not an excuse, but I didn’t see this coming. I thought you two were just goofing around. I’m raised in a very conservative family, where relationships like this were never discussed, so it’s new for me. And it’s difficult to wrap my mind around it. Just give me some time to get used to it. But I’m going to support you, like all the other members.”

Jimin dries his tears and looks at Jin: “Thanks for your kind words, hyung. I understand you are upset.”

To lighten the discussion, Namjoon lays his hand on Jin’s shoulder and says: “Jin sometimes forgets that Jungkook is not that weird shy teenager anymore that needs his protection.”

Jungkook gets up from the bed again and wraps his arms around Jin: “Thanks hyung that you want to give us a chance. I really appreciate it.” Then he turns his eyes to Yoongi and sends him a small smile saying softly: “Thanks for your support hyung.”

Everybody sighs in relief, now that all members agree to support the couple. They all start to tell the others how they started to suspect that there was something going on between them, and in no time, everybody is laughing. Jungkook wraps his arm around Jimin and kisses his temple. Taehyung, who has been silent until then, makes a gagging noise.

At a certain moment, Jungkook snorts: “But he can’t turn off his seduction mode” Jimin slaps him against the arm: “you’re the one to talk, always looking me over through the mirrors”. They all laugh.

They all leave Namjoon’s room to have a drink on the terrace of the hotel. It’s not too late yet and they will be able to enjoy the sunset from the terrace. When they are in the hallway Jungkook asks Jimin: “Do you want to join me on a walk on the beach?” Jimin gives him one of his dazzling smiles and they leave the hotel together.

~ * ~

The beach is right in front of the hotel. Jimin and Jungkook take off their sandals and Jimin shouts “the first who has his feet in the water wins”, and he starts running. Jungkook is taken by surprise. Jimin is quick, but Jungkook has longer legs, so he catches up quickly. Once the younger is at arm’s length, he jumps towards Jimin to bring him down. They both fall in the sand and they both start struggling to get out of each other’s hold. Jungkook reaches the water first, and Jimin follows suit after, running up to him and wrapping his arms around him from behind. They stay still for a minute or two to enjoy the sight of the horizon and each other.

Namjoon shakes his head at the scene that unfolds in the distance and Jin says softly: “It is true that Jungkook looks happier and more open lately. I thought it was because of two younger members joining the band. I never realized it was because he fell in love with Jimin.” Hobi says: “Don’t feel guilty if you still find it a bit weird. It still weirds me out also, and I saw it coming. The main thing is that they are happy with each other. And if they are happy, I’m going to support them.” After a short silence, Jin continues: “When I think about it, it’s true that he always smiles whenever he sees Jimin or hears Jimin. A lot of little things make sense now…” Hobi turns to Taehyung: “Tell us Tae, since when are they together, I’m sure you know.” Taehyung smiles and answers: “Yes, I know but it’s not my place to tell. I know all their little secrets.” And he mischievously smirks at Hobi.

Jungkook and Jimin start walking along the shore talking about everything and anything. In the beginning, they just walk next to each other, shoulder against shoulder, hands rubbing against each other. It has become a habit the last few weeks.

After a while, Jungkook carefully takes Jimin’s hand and intertwines their fingers. Jimin looks at him and smiles sweetly, eyes like crescent moons. Jungkook’s heart leaps and his heart eyes are on full display. After a while, they reach rocks that end in the sea, so they have to turn back. When the sun touches the sea, they stop and sit down on the sand to enjoy the sunset. Jungkook wraps his arm around Jimin’s shoulders and Jimin leans his head on Jungkook’s shoulder. They enjoy the silence and each other’s presence for a while. When Jungkook hears the elder sigh against his shoulder, he looks down. Jimin returns the look and they gaze in each other’s eyes, leaning in closer and closer. When their lips touch, it’s like a firework that explodes inside. They quickly deepen the kiss trying to get their tongue inside each other’s mouths. Jimin presses Jungkook in the sand and crawls half on top of him to be able to feel more of Jungkook against his own body. When the younger feel Jimin on top of him he unconsciously grinds upwards. The movement makes Jimin’s alarm bells go off and he whispers against Jungkook’s mouth: “There is nothing I wish more for than to go down on you on a beach like this, but we can’t do that in public.” They sigh and decide to return to the hotel, in the knowledge they will not be able to spend more time with each other as they don’t share a room.

Jungkook is first on his feet and he extends his hand to Jimin to help him up, smiling at each other, eyes full of happiness and love. When Jimin is on his feet, their mouths are mere centimeters from each other, and they kiss again before they turn to walk back to the hotel. They come face to face with an older couple and two teenage kids. The couple looks very shocked. The woman mumbles something like “two boys”, and the man starts scolding how disgusting they are, dropping some derogatory words. The boys are too shocked to react. The only thing Jungkook manages to do is to hide Jimin behind his back in case the man would get physical. The man continues to rant and scold. People start gathering, the father turns his attention to the little crowd. “Do you see this? Two boys! Kissing! What an abomination! And with that disgusting behavior they poison our kids’ minds! This is unacceptable!”. People start whispering to each other and throwing dirty looks at Jimin and Jungkook. Jungkook gets really upset now and wants to start arguing. But Jimin, seeing this group of people looking at them like they are filthy monsters, fills him with fear. Before it can escalate more, he pulls at Jungkook’s sleeve and softly begs: “Come on, let’s go”. They start running towards the hotel hoping no one recognized them. That would definitely be a disaster.

When they get to the door of Jimin’s room they are both crying from hurt, anger, and fear. Jimin tries to open the door but his hands are shaking too hard, so Jungkook knocks on the door while wrapping his arm around Jimin’s shoulder. When Taehyung opens the door, Jimin falls into his arms crying even harder.

Taehyung is stupefied; he wants to start scolding Jungkook but when he notices that also he is crying, he knows that there is something very wrong. He guides Jimin to his bed and makes him sit down. Jimin continues sobbing against his shoulder. Jungkook closes the door and follows them into the room. He sinks down on the other bed in front of Jimin and Taehyung and takes Jimin’s small hands in his own hands, caressing his knuckles.

Taehyung whispers: “What happened?”

Jungkook starts explaining what happened. When he comes to the kissing part and the scolding that followed it, Jimin hiccups through his tears: “I was afraid that Jungkook would get beaten up. Or that one of the younger passers-by would recognize us. I was so afraid for him, for us”.

Jungkook gets up from the bed opposite the two friends and sits down next to Jimin. He wants to hold Jimin, feeling his head against his shoulder, but he doesn’t want to upset Taehyung nor Jimin, so he settles with rubbing Jimin’s back softly.

Jungkook gets angry again when he thinks back at the hurtful words: “How could I be so naïve! I just wanted to take Jimin out for a romantic stroll on the beach. And it’s not that we were all over each other the whole walk from beginning to end. We sat down to look at the sunset and shared a few kisses. How could they call us disgusting? Why is our love repulsive and theirs not because they are a man and a woman? Why do I have to hide my love for Jimin while they can show it in public? Why can I only kiss him in a dark corner where nobody can see us? “. He angrily wipes his tears and continues: “When Jimin dances, everybody is in awe, and they cannot stop telling how beautiful, how graceful, how ethereal he is. But when they find out that he likes boys, he immediately becomes disgusting.” Jimin starts to cry a little bit harder at these harsh words, but he continues: “When I sing, people say that I’m talented and they cannot stop praising me, but when I kiss Jimin, I’m suddenly the biggest piece of filth. If it would be a girl, everybody would be over the moon. It is so unfair! Why does it matter if I like a boy or a girl?”.

When he is done ranting, Jungkook notices that he’s out of breath. A few other sobs escape his mouth while he angrily wipes at his tears. Jungkook sighs and kisses Jimin’s cheek: “Why can’t we show that our love is as genuine and beautiful as any other relationship. When the time comes, I want to be able to show the world how much I care for you. I want to hold hands with you in public, I want to hug you in public, I want to kiss you in public” And with those words, he wraps his arms around Jimin, and places small kisses on his temple.

Taehyung has no answer to this. He knows how Jimin feels because it’s not the first time something similar has happened to Jimin before.

Jungkook looks at Taehyung and asks hesitantly: “Hyung, I know it’s already late and it’s kind of a weird request…. Would you mind switching rooms with me, so that I can spend the night with Jimin? We don’t have a lot of opportunities to be together. And after tonight I really want to be with him and to take care of him… but only if Jimin wants that too of course. If he prefers to stay with you, that’s ok for me too. “

Taehyung looks from Jimin to Jungkook and back and hesitates. Then he asks Jimin: “Would it make you feel better if Jungkook stays with you?” Jimin looks at his best friend with teary eyes and softly nods. It’s almost invisible, but Taehyung knows his best friend well enough to see it.

“OK,” he sighs and takes his pajamas and toilet bag. He turns to Jungkook and says: “Can you give me the key to your room? And which bed is yours, so I don’t end up in bed with Hobi-hyung. I don’t want to scare him in the middle of the night. He will already be scared enough tomorrow morning”. It’s not a very good joke, but it is enough to enlighten the atmosphere.

Jimin accompanies his best friend to the door, still feeling a bit guilty of betraying his friend. Taehyung places a finger under his chin to make Jimin look him into his eyes: “Don’t let these fucking assholes get to you, Minnie. You, and Jungkook for that matter, are not disgusting for being gay. Remember that the people who matter love and support both of you. Even Jin-hyung. He said it himself when we were having drinks on the terrace. He holds no grudge against you.” Taehyung puts a hand on Jimin’s cheek and the latter leans into the touch, closing his eyes.

“I know that. I understand the difficulty to accept people like me when you grow up in a conservative family. But hyung is a good guy and he is able to form his own opinion on those matters”, Jimin says as he opens his eyes. He believes everything he just said. Jin is an amazing and smart person, Jimin does not think he will hate them. Just like he asked, they will give him time to adjust.

“Goodnight Tae Tae” and before closing the door, Jimin whispers: “Thank you so much for being so understanding.”

~ * ~

Jimin returns to the bed on which Jungkook is seated and crawls next to him. He places his hand on the younger’s thigh and his head on his shoulders but does not know what to say, so he settles with: “Thanks for caring for me, Kookie. I really hope we don’t see those ugly faces tomorrow during the concert. Or worse, that they recognize us”. Jimin sights. Jungkook kisses his forehead and says: “Let’s not worry about that tonight” And after a few more minutes of silence he whispers: “What would you think of taking a bath together, to relax before we go to bed?”

Jimin agrees by nodding his head and Jungkook gets up to start filling the bathtub with warm water and some perfumed bath foam. The younger returns while the water runs and they both lie down on the bed, Jimin curled up into Jungkook. After a while, Jungkook returns to the bathroom to check the water and he calls Jimin when he thinks there is enough water to get in.

They get undressed and step into the water, sitting opposite each other. It’s a bit weird in the beginning, but soon enough Jungkook starts teasing Jimin by using his hands to make a fountain to spray water in Jimin’s face. Jimin moves closer and starts pouring water over Jungkook’s head. They giggle the whole time while wetting each other’s faces.

After they washed each other’s hair, Jungkook takes Jimin in his lap, Jimin’s back resting against his chest. The elder leans his head backward on the younger boy’s shoulder. Jungkook is already pretty hard against Jimin’s ass, because of the closeness, but he wants to take it slow tonight. Jungkook softly kisses Jimin’s neck and his shoulders, while caressing his arms, his waist, and his chest. Jungkook lets his hands travel down slowly and softly towards Jimin’s belly and draws small circles around his belly button. Jungkook murmurs in his shoulder: “You’re so beautiful….”. He lets his lips travel up Jimin’s neck and places soft kisses right under his jawline up to his ear. When his fingers slowly travel down his happy trail until they touch the tip of his hardening cock, Jimin arches his back while a small gasp escapes from his mouth.

Jimin must have felt the twitching of Jungkook’s cock against his back because he murmurs: “Let’s get out of the bath before the water gets too cold” and then he grins mischievously: “And I don’t want you to cool off.” Jungkook blushes because of Jimin’s salty words and helps Jimin get up and out of the bathtub. Jungkook gets even redder. They both grab a towel to dry them off, wrap it around their waist and move back to the room.

Jungkook takes Jimin in a back hug and whispers in his ear: “What do you think about having that full body massage I promised you weeks ago?”. Jimin smiles at him and answers: “Mmm, I’d like that” and he crawls onto the bed and lays down on his back. Jungkook crawls next to him and says: “Let’s start with your shoulders and your back. I think you’re tenser there.” Jimin turns around eagerly. The younger takes place over Jimin, a knee at each side of Jimin’s waist. But this time, he tells himself, he will not hesitate to sit down on the other’s ass when his muscles in his legs are getting sore.

He starts massaging his neck and works his way down to Jimin’s shoulders. And again, he is attracted by the mole on Jimin’s neck. While he continues to massage the elder’s shoulders, he bends down and kisses and licks the mole, eliciting small gasps from Jimin. When the muscles in Jimin’s shoulders become less tense, he lets his hands travel down to his back, moving backward on his knees. When their asses inevitably touch, Jungkook let himself sink down on Jimin’s ass, causing both of them to gasp, although there are still two towels in between them.

Jungkook lets his hands slide towards Jimin’s waist and bends over to kiss his shoulders and to lick down his spine. When his hands reach the towel around Jimin’s waist he removes it while moving backward on his knees again, his mouth never leaving the other’s back. When his tongue reaches Jimin’s but crack, the elder becomes a little bit more vocal. It’s clear he’s enjoying Jungkook’s ministrations. Jungkook sits up and starts softly kneading Jimin’s butt cheeks. Then he helps the other to turn on his back. He takes him by one of his calves to guide his legs around him, so he is able to sit on his knees in between his legs. His eyes wander over Jimin’s body making Jimin a little bit shy and uncomfortable under Jungkook’s gaze. But his discomfort disappears quickly when Jungkook bends over to kiss his lips and lick his way into his mouth. The elder let his hands glide over Jungkook's chest towards his waist down his abs to remove the last towel separating them.

Jungkook breaks the kiss and continues to pepper him with soft kisses on and around his lips. Jimin wraps his arms around Jungkook’s shoulders and tries to keep their mouths sealed together but Jungkook whispers: “Jimin hyung, let me love you”, and then trails soft kisses down his chin, and his throat before moving to his collarbones. And Jimin lets him. He licks his way to one of Jimin’s nipples, and while kissing and sucking at one of them, he passes his thumb over the other one. Jimin moans softly and arches his back while he feels his erection growing.

Jungkook licks his way down to Jimin’s belly button while caressing his waist. When his tongue reaches the elder’s happy trail, he passes his thumbs over Jimin’s hipbones. When he wraps his lips around Jimin’s length, Jimin’s moans become a bit louder and more frequent. He accidentally thrusts his hips up, making Jungkook choke a little. The elder starts apologizing, but Jungkook holds his hips down and tries to get as much Jimin as he can take. He licks and he sucks turning Jimin into a moaning mess by now. The elder is almost there when he feels Jungkook’s mouth leaving his dick. He whines at the loss when he feels Jungkook shudder on top of him. He suddenly realizes that Jungkook is taking care of himself. He starts whining softly “No, no, no, let me do that” while pulling at the younger’s shoulders to get him to move up. But then he feels the warmth of Jungkook’s mouth again and releases a needy moan. He even reaches for the younger’s head to keep him there. He wants to trust up to get even deeper in Jungkook’s mouth, but he doesn’t dare out of fear to hurt him. Jungkook spreads Jimin’s legs a little bit further open. He suddenly feels a wet finger circling around his rim and he’s so taken by surprise that he loses all control over himself and comes into the younger’s mouth. He is so ashamed that he was not even able to warn the younger, that he pulls the other up while riding his orgasm out against his chest and stomach. He stammers “Sorry, sorry, sorry, I couldn’t hold myself anymore”, and he kisses Jungkook fiercely. When they break the kiss, Jungkook looks at him with a big smile. Jimin smiles back sweetly and asks: “Where and when did you learn all that stuff. I thought you had no experience.” Jungkook smiles his big bunny smile and answers cockily: “I watched a few tutorials online”. Jimin slaps him playfully against his chest. Jimin continues: “Anyway, I admire your self-control. When we were in the bath, I thought you wouldn’t last that long anymore, but then you took your time for the massage.” Jungkook’s cheeks get a bit red when he chuckles: “To be honest, I came right there when I helped you out of the bath because you put your ass on full display in front of my eyes.” That earns him another slap against his chest.

They share soft kisses, smile against each other’s lips, and enjoy each other’s closeness. After some time Jungkook leans on his elbow, his chin on his hand palm, and looks down on Jimin with glistening eyes. With his other hand, he caresses Jimin’s jawline and then passes his fingers softly over Jimin’s collarbones. He whispers: “You’re so damn beautiful”. Jimin feels the younger’s cock hardening again against his thigh, and he starts laughing “You’re up for another round, you naughty. How do you never get tired?” This time they take their sweet time to kiss and caress each other, to savor each other’s body. They grind and slide against each other to find the needed friction, but it’s not needy like before. In the end, they join their hands, Jimin’s smaller hand on top of Jungkook’s larger hand, to get them off together until they spill over their stomachs.

They take their time to kiss some more until the stickiness gets annoying. Jungkook runs off to the bathroom to wet a small towel with lukewarm water and hurries back to the bed to clean them both up. Jimin smiles sweetly to Jungkook; he loves to be taken care of. They put on a t-shirt and some boxers and crawl in bed. Jimin curls into Jungkook’s chest and purrs in his arms. It’s already far past midnight when they finally fall asleep.

Chapter Text

It’s 5 AM in Seoul, South Korea. Jimin lies awake, leisurely scrolling through Twitter. The other members are still sleeping. It’s his first birthday as a BTS member, and fans around the world are congratulating him. Jimin sees a few birthday projects the fans organized and smiles. He remembers yesterday, they were riding to BigHit and on the highway, Taehyung suddenly gasped and started excitedly pointing outside. Jimin eagerly looked to and came face to face with himself. Fans had paid for a Billboard of his face with the text ‘Happy Birthday our Jimin!’.

Jimin rolls on his stomach when he sees a post about the said billboard. He wants to scroll further but without intention, he likes the post. Panic starts to rise in Jimin. Fuck! He didn’t mean to do that. Plus, he is not on his private account but on the official BTS account. Quickly he goes back to the post and unlike it. He drops his head on his pillow out of relief. Let’s hope that nobody saw that. Liking that tweet isn’t scandalous, it would be worse if it was some kind of ship post, but they were asked to not like any posts from the fans. Why Jimin doesn’t know.

After that little adrenaline kick, Jimin isn’t so keen on staying in bed anymore. As quiet as possible he makes his way out of the room. Because it’s October it’s still dark outside, so it’s difficult to see in the room. Jimin carefully walks towards where he thinks the door is. He is now so used to this room that he can easily estimate the distance between his bed and the door, but still, he manages to walk face-first against it.

“Mmh... What... Jimin...”

From J-Hope’s bed comes a groggy voice. The hard noise obviously woke the elder up. “Sorry hyung”, Jimin whispers an apology. He grabs the doorknob and opens the door. “How late is it?”, “5 AM. Go back to sleep, hyung”. The bed creaks. “You crazy son of a-”, J-hope doesn’t end this sentence as he fell asleep again.

When Jimin nears the living room and the attached kitchen he hears faint noises. The light is on in the kitchen, so Jimin puts his flashlight out end sneaks to the end of the hallway. Two voices are furiously whispering at each other.

“No, you’re not supposed to do it like that...”

“Stop, stop, stop! It's too much...”

“Give me the spatula...”

“No!...”

Listening to the grunting, Jimin concludes that their struggling for the spatula. A metallic sound of something crashing on the ground cuts through the silence of the early morning. Jimin decides to interfere and scold whoever they are for not taking the sleeping members into consideration. But when he steps in the kitchen and sees what’s going on, his eyes go wide and his mouth falls open.

The kitchen is a mess. Cabinets are open, the whole counter is occupied by various baking items and ingredients. On top of that, the whole room is covered in white powder. Let’s pray it’s flour, Jimin thinks. But there is no one in sight.

“You dumbass, do you want everyone to wake up?”

“I’m a dumbass? You're the one who dropped the damn spatula.”

Suddenly Jungkook and Taehyung appear from behind the counter. They are holding the spatula, each with one hand, and are covered in the same white stuff that’s everywhere in the kitchen. The two boys don’t seem to notice the perplexed Jimin as they are too busy fighting over the cooking utensil. Jungkook is able to tear it out of Taehyung’s hand.

Jimin clears his throat and makes the two boys look his way. Jungkook just gasps but Taehyung starts screaming at the top of his lungs. Luckily those are quickly muffled by Jungkook pulling him in his arms and covering Taehyung’s mouth with a large hand. “Hyung, what are you doing here?”, he half whispers. Jimin walks towards them and smirks: “I can ask you, bimbos, the same question”.

Jungkook starts desperately looking around the room. How is he going to explain this without spoiling the surprise? “I thought you said you were so tired last night. Did we wake you?”, he tries to turn the conversation towards Jimin. Jimin looks intently into his eyes, trying to make him spill the beans with just his gaze. Movement in the corner of his eyes gets Jimin’s attention. Taehyung is trying to wrestle himself out of the younger’s strong arms, twisting his body and slapping Jungkook’s bicep. Jimin looks back at Jungkook who is now pouting and tilts his head, trying to point out the struggling mess in his arms. Jungkook quickly frees Taehyung out of his grasp.

“Bimbos? The only bimbo here is this one”, Taehyung points at Jungkook.

“Hyung wakes up, you’ve got to help me bake a cake”, he says with a mocking voice. The moment the word ‘cake’ leaves Taehyung’s mouth, Jungkook gives him a dead-glare, and Jimin perks up. Jimin leans on the counter: “A cake? Are you baking a cake?”

“Yes”

“No”

Both say in unison and without hesitation. Jimin looks between the two, eyebrows raised and a small smile tucking on his lip. Jungkook sighs and drops his shoulders. “It was meant to be a surprise”, he says with his eyes fixed on the floor.

~ * ~

30 minutes earlier

Jungkook is staring blankly in front of him. He’s sitting on the ground in the kitchen scrolling through his phone. He can’t seem to focus on his plan: baking a birthday cake for Jimin before he wakes up. But sleep keeps his grip on him and Jungkook doesn’t even find the strength to click on one of the websites promising him that they have the best birthday cake recipe.

He blinks several more times and slaps himself in the face. It doesn’t really help but he manages to pull himself from the ground. Through the dark kitchen, because Jungkook didn’t dare to turn on the lights, he stumbles to the fridge. He grabs the bottle of coke and takes several big gulps straight from the bottle. Jin will kill him if he ever finds out. But it is an emergency. While letting caffeine slowly wake him up, Jungkook picks one of the top searches for Mujigae-tteok. He knows that he might be overestimating his baking abilities. A rainbow cake is not really one of the simplest recipes, especially in his half-awake state.

The recipe calls for cocoa powder, frozen rice flour, kosher salt, lemon, liquid food coloring, mugwort powder, sugar, water. Jungkook turns towards the cabinet. In his head, he tries to locate every ingredient. He is sure they have cocoa powder because J-hope needs a cup of hot cocoa every evening. The frozen rice flour he bought yesterday is in the freeze and the food coloring he purchased at the same time is thrown in a kitchen drawer. Normal salt will do, the same goes for lime instead of a lemon. Sugar check, water check. Mugwort powder? Jungkook isn’t sure about that one. He doesn’t recall Jin using this on the rare occasions that he cooks for them.

Jungkook opens a few cabinets but doesn’t see anything. Nerves start creeping up on him when also checks the fridge and kitchen drawers. Panic rises after he re-searches every corner of the room. How come they don’t have any mugwort powder? In the middle of the kitchen, Jungkook stands scratching his head. If he won’t be able to find the last ingredient, he can’t make the cake, and opting to make a chocolate cake is not possible. They don’t have any chocolate in the dorms, and no store is open this early in the morning.

Maybe Jungkook is looking in the wrong places, maybe he has to ask another member. But who?

Yoongi is definitely out of the question. Jungkook prefers sticking his hand in a paper shredder than to awaken Min Yoongi’s wrath. The elder is very keen on his sleep and does not appreciate being woken up for such reasons.

J-hope and Namjoon will be of no help. They both barely are in the kitchen. J-hope is most of the time in front of the fridge, and Namjoon stays away because he knows he will just be in the way. Especially after yesterday.

Jin asked Namjoon to keep a close eye on his pork strips while he goes to the bathroom. But when he came back Namjoon was in tears sitting on the floor. Later during dinner, Namjoon told them he turned off the hot plate, so the pork won’t burn and put a lid on it to keep them warm. Unfortunately for him, the lid was just too small, so it got stuck on the pan. Namjoon tried to pull it off but to no avail. In desperation, he poured water into the pan but that only drowned the pork. They had to use a can opener to destroy the lid and get it off the pan. That evening they all laughed at the story while eating take-out.

So no, Namjoon will be of no help.

Jin is the most obvious choice. He is literally their cook and manages everything in the kitchen. He will know if they have mugwort powder. But alas, Jungkook does not dare to risk it. He can still feel the slap against the back of his head after he annoyed the shit out of the eldest the whole day. They're not really on good terms right now, so Jin will probably not appreciate it if Jungkook wakes him up.

Taehyung is the only choice left and maybe the best. He is not upset with Jungkook, he will not be mad after Jungkook wakes him up and tells him the reason why. And he spends a suspicious amount helping Jin in the kitchen for someone who doesn’t like to cook, so he’ll probably know where everything is. If not, he can wake Jin up.

Jungkook tiptoes towards Taehyung and Jin’s room, his flashlight guiding him through the dark dorm. He opens their door as quietly as possible and peeks inside. In the shadow of his flashlight, he makes out two big lumps on each side of the room. Jungkook turns the light off and sneaks through the little gap into the room.

With his back against the door, he tries to get used to the darkness before making a move. He takes a step but immediately freezes. Shit, he doesn’t know which side is Taehyung’s. He looks from left to right and tries to remember where Taehyung sleeps. He's been here so many times but now that it’s crucial to get the right bed his mind seems to blank.

Jungkook thinks for a few more seconds, listening to the breathing and snoring hoping to get a hint from that. A particular loud snore comes from the left bed and this makes Jungkook sure of his case. Taehyung sleeps on the left side of the room. He makes his way over to the bed and stretches his hand out for the boy. Something wet touches Jungkook’s fingers and the figure under him start to move. Jungkook pulls his hand back, realizing he probably pushed his fingers into Taehyung’s mouth.

“Who is there?”, a groggy voice asks.

Jungkook leans closer and whispers his name. It’s quiet for a moment and then a sigh is heard.” What are you doing here? Is something wrong? What’s the time?”, Taehyung asks still in his groggy voice. Two hands start roaming over Jungkook’s face. He pulls them away and answers: “4:40 AM, or something like that”. Silence again. There is movement and suddenly Jungkook gets smacked in the face by something soft. Jungkook winces in surprise. “You better be kidding me, Jeon”. Jungkook feels the wind of the pillow passing right in front of him and Taehyung’s voice that now sounds really angry: “Where are you?”.

“Hyung, I have a good explanation. I-”, the pillow hits Jungkook full force interrupting him. The whacking continues while Taehyung exclaims between breaths: “You. Better. Have. A. Good. Fucking. Explanation”. Jungkook tries to snatch the pillow from his attacker, which is really a challenge in the dark. Finally, Jungkook is able to take the object away after taking a few blows to the head. He drops the pillow and throws himself on Taehyung, searching his mouth to cover it with his hands. “Ssh, be quiet please. You're going to wake Jin-hyung".

Taehyung keeps struggling to get away from Jungkook to scream some more at him. He even goes as far as to lick Jungkook’s whole hand, but the younger doesn’t relinquish. “Please, you have to help me. It’s for Jimin-hyung's birthday”, Jungkook whispers in desperation. The older under him stills and Jungkook feels safe to pull his hand away. It’s quiet in the room, only Jin’s breathing heard.

Taehyung sighs: “What is it?”

~ * ~

Jimin listens with mouth agape at his friends. They, in turn, look awkward at Jimin, waiting for his reaction.

“Ooh, Jungkook-ie! You wanted to make a cake for my birthday?! That's so sweet!”

Jimin walks over to his boyfriend – omg he can call Jungkook his boyfriend- and squishes his cheeks. “Excuse me? Don't I get any recognition for helping this oaf at 5 in the morning?”, Taehyung exclaims in disbelief, waving the spatula around. Without breaking eye contact he waves Taehyung off with a ‘yeah, yeah'. Jungkook grabs Jimin’s hands and intertwines their fingers. “I’m sorry, I wanted to surprise you but I fucked up. I can’t even bake a cake for my boyfriend”, he pouts. Jimin giggles at the cuteness and places a light kiss on Jungkook’s lips. They ignore the gagging noises Taehyung makes.

“You know what, let’s take a little walk before the others wake up. There might be a 7/11 open or something. I’m going to get my sweater”, Jimin says while pulling Jungkook with him towards the living room. In the doorway, he lets go and makes his way to J-hope and his room.

“Hey, hey, no! Don't leave. Don’t you dare leave me here alone, you brat”, Taehyung yells. Jungkook stops in his tracks and turns around. He looks at Taehyung with a fake apologetic face. “Hyung be quiet you’re going to wake the others. Oh by the way, if I was you, I would clean the kitchen before Jin-hyung sees it. Because he will be pissed”. Jungkook shoots a smug smile and then dashes to the front door where Jimin is already standing, hands-on-hips and eyebrows raised. The last thing they hear before the door closes behind them is Taehyung shouting: “You better buy me something delicious or I will fucking kill you, you bastard!”

~ * ~

The cold air hit their faces and the faint smell of something delicious enters their noises. With their arms linked they make their way through the quiet streets of Seoul. “Poor Taehyung, maybe we should have stayed and helped clean the kitchen”, Jimin says. His gaze is focused on a little calico cat washing itself at the side of the road. He carefully walks over to the kitten. Seeing a tall figure approach, the kitten stops his activities getting ready to sprint away in case of trouble. Jimin crouches down and stretches his hand. The little animal sniffs at his hand, decides to trust him, and gets a little closer. Jimin takes this as a confirmation to pet it. He looks down with admiration at the purring kitten who is now laying on his side.

Jungkook on the other hand is standing further away looking with admiration at his boyfriend petting the cat. It's a sight for sore eyes and Jungkook is sure his heart will combust. Jimin turns around and looks at him with a big smile, his eyes crescent moons. Jungkook smiles back. “Wait, I’ll take a picture”, he takes his phone out and starts snapping a million photos. He goes from one side to another, making sure to get every angle of the moment. Jimin giggles at his antics. Jungkook even goes as far as to lay on the ground, saying that in this position he will get the perfect shot. Jimin bursts out laughing at that. The kitten jumps up from the sudden noise and sprints away.

“No”, Jimin says softly.

With a sad look and a pout, he looks at the house the cat disappeared behind. Jungkook rushes over: “I’m sorry, Jimin”. The elder gets up and grabs Jungkook’s hand. “it’s okay, I just hope you got at least one picture”, he jokes knowing that the younger made at least a hundred. Jungkook makes a thinking face, furrowing his eyebrows: “I don’t know, the model was not really cooperating”. This gets him a soft punch against the shoulder. They start walking again, still laughing at what happened.

After a while, Jimin returns to their first conversation topic: “So... Tae?”. Jungkook shrugs his shoulders and is about to say something but stops in his tracks. Jimin looks back confused at where he went. Jungkook is looking at the other side of the street with big sparkling eyes and an even bigger smile. He looks like an overly excited puppy. If he had a tale, it would definitely be wagging like crazy, Jimin thinks.

When Jimin follows his gaze and sees what excites the younger, he gets it. At the opposite end of the street is a little building. The two big windows are outlined with dozens of different flowers in various colors. Yellow, pink, red, blue. In front of each window stands a little, round, white table with matching chairs. At the top is a sign with the name in pink, cursive letters: Halmeoni’s bakery. The smell of freshly baked bread and sweet pastries reaches them. They can’t help but take a deep breath, salivate by the thought of all those delicious treats.

A little lady with curly grey hair exits the shop, dragging a heavy-looking bucket with water. The woman is visibly struggling with the weight. Her foot gets stuck behind a brick of the ruinous footpad, making her almost fall on the ground. Luckily, she manages to stay up. Jungkook rushes to her, Jimin swiftly following. “Halmeoni are you alright? Here, let us help you”, Jungkook says. He grabs the bucket from her and Jimin takes her arm and seats her on a chair. Jungkook pours the water into the sewer and goes over to the woman and Jimin. Jimin is crouching down, looking with a worried face at how the old woman puts her hands to her heart.

“Are you sure you are alright, halmeoni”, Jungkook asks. Jimin puts a hand on her shoulder. “Do you want a glass of water?”, he continues. She wildly shakes her head and waves her hands at them. “No, no, you boys are too sweet”, she sighs, “I just wish my grandson is as kind as you. He should help his grandmother instead of two lovely strangers”. Jimin and Jungkook look at each other. They don’t really know what to reply to that.

“Halmeoni, can I ask if the bakery is already open”, Jungkook speaks up. Jimin snaps his head to shoot him a warning glare. This is not really the right moment to ask such a question. But the lady doesn’t seem to think that. She looks up at Jungkook and smiles a crooked-toothed smile. “Uhm.. If one of you young men can tell me the time, I will answer your question”. Jimin grabs his phone and turns it on for a second. The time 5:50 shines brightly on his screen. A ‘Hmm’ comes from beside Jimin. He looks up and sees the lady looking over his shoulder at his now dark screen. Her eyebrows furrow and she puts a hand to her chin.

“I’m not open for 40 minutes... but for you, I will make an exception.”

With a lot of difficulties, groaning, and Jimin and Jungkook standing beside her with arms catch her if she falls, the woman manages to get up from the chair. Step by step she goes into the bakery, empty bucket in hand and Jimin and Jungkook on her heels.

Inside is the smell of baked goods even stronger. The room is very small, the walls are light pink and the doorframes are pastel green. Just as outside are flowers and other succulents everywhere. In the corner is a little sitting nook, the pillows matching the doorframes. At the back of the bakery is a wide counter where the jewels lay in full glory.

Several kinds of bread (freshly baked), red bean buns, egg bread, twisted and normal donuts, croissants, and delicious-looking honey bread. Next to that are various kinds of cakes and pies: chocolate, strawberry, vanilla, rice cake. And of course, dozens of cookies.

Jimin and Jungkook look with big eyes and open mouths at all the food presented. Did they enter heaven? While they look their eyes out and try not to salivate on the floor, the woman disappears behind the counter. Now alone in the shop, Jimin and Jungkook take their time to look around. Jungkook marvels at a beautiful painting of a landscape hanging next to the door. Meanwhile, Jimin feasts his eyes on the baked goods. Looking at the cookie section, Jimin spots some cat-shaped cookies in three different colors. It immediately reminds him of the kitten they saw at the beginning of their walk.

“Jungkook-ie, come here”, he waves Jungkook over. The younger stands slightly behind him and leans over to look over Jimin’s shoulder, his arm wrapped around his waist. Jimin blushes at the closeness. He looks up for a second and tries to get just a little closer. Excited Jimin points at the cookies, making sure he doesn’t touch the counter’s glass. “Look how freaking cute these are!”, his voice getting a bit higher. Jungkook hums in agreement.

“Ah yes, the calico cat cookies are quite popular.”

Both boys lookup. The woman has come back, now wearing an apron and a big smile. Looking at them with adoration. Jimin takes a little step away from Jungkook, suddenly feeling aware of the closeness and the arm around his waist. But Jungkook doesn’t move but drops his arm and scratches his neck. Jimin smiles at the woman: “Halmeoni, everything looks so delicious. I don’t think I can choose”. This makes her laugh. It’s a warm laugh that makes you feel at home. “You’re too kind, my sweet boy”. “What about first choosing a cake for your birthday, you dummy”, Jungkook says. The little nickname slipping from his lips. Jimin snaps his fingers and nods his head. He walks over to where the cakes are. Both Jungkook and the old lady follow him with their eyes.

“His birthday? Oh, I'm sorry, I don’t think I have something for such an occasion”, the woman says more to herself. Worried she puts a hand on her cheek while looking at all her products. Jungkook tears his gaze from Jimin: “oh, that is not true. You have so much delicious stuff. And I think a cookie will be better than what I tried to bake for him”. Jungkook scoffs thinking back to the messy kitchen. His eyes find Jimin again who is looking with furrowed eyebrows at all the choices. This might take a minute.

A sigh brings Jungkook back to reality. He didn’t notice he was staring. The woman has both hands on her chest, the same fondness Jungkook was looking at Jimin with, plastered on her face. “Handsome, kind, and caring. Your boyfriend is a very lucky man”, she sighs again.

“Yeah he is, but I'm luckier”

It takes Jungkook a second to realize what he just said. He gasps so hard; spit gets caught in his throat and he starts violently coughing. Jimin turns around, when he sees the younger, he rushes over and cups his face. “Oh dear, are you alright. Do you need some water?”, the woman walks over and starts slapping his back. Jungkook shakes his head and waves his hands, trying to get away from the two people who are suffocating him more than the spit in his windpipe. “I- I’m not... He’s not my bo-boyfriend", he says between coughs and breaths. Trying to deny everything he just agreed to. Jimin looks confused. “Boyfriend...?”, his eyes grow wide in panic,” Jungkook!”

They keep looking at each other. They messed up, there’s no denying that. But how are they going to repair the damage? The old woman doesn’t seem to recognize them. For how long though? Jimin just shouted Jungkook’s name, so she might connect the dots. Is this just going to be like in Nagoya?

Two hands are placed on each arm. Jimin and Jungkook break eye contact. With racing hearts, they look at the kind old woman that invited them into her shop even though she’s still closed. But what they see is not disgust or hatred in her eyes like the people in Nagoya. She just has a sad but encouraging smile. She shakes her head when she says in a softer voice than before: “Please don’t panic boys. My oldest daughter, she is just like you”. A heavy sigh leaves her lips, Jimin notices the woman starting to subtly shake. “I was disgusted at first. You have to understand, in my time... such things didn’t exist- no, they did. Nobody uttered a word about it”, she continues. Her voice is now shaking as bad as her whole body. Jungkook grabs a chair and together with Jimin they again place her on it.

“When she first came to me, I remember it very clearly. She was crying, begging me to not throw her out, to keep loving her. But I didn’t. I was selfish, I only thought about myself. What about my grandchildren, I thought? So I cut her off.” A tear rolls down her wrinkly face. She wipes it with the back of her hand. “I cut her off. What kind of mother does that? After years she contacted me again, saying she wanted to talk. I didn’t want to, still so stubborn, but my son persuaded me. When I saw her I-… I missed her so much. We talked and she introduced me to her girlfriend. It took me a while but I finally excepted it. I don’t think like that anymore.”

Jungkook and Jimin look at each other, both with tears in their eyes. The fear of getting cast out by their loved ones is their biggest fear, it’s every LGBT youth’s biggest fear.

The woman takes a deep breath, wipes her tears away, and straightens her back. “She is happy now and so am I. You look like good men with bright futures. Hopefully with each other”, she stands up and goes behind the counter, ”Now, what can I get for the two gentlemen”.

~ * ~

The way back to the dorm is quiet. Jimin and Jungkook are both munching on a red bean bun. In the plastic bag bungling from Jungkook’s arm is a chocolate cake decorated with mini macaroons, another red bean bun for Taehyung, and several calico cat cookies. The woman had insisted on giving them those for free, which they gladly accepted.

They walk up the stairs of the building. Jungkook opens the door and lets Jimin pass, who is pushing the last bites of his pastry in his mouth. Jimin takes his phone to look at the time. It's almost 6:30, most of the members will probably be awake. On their way to the kitchen to put the cake away, they hear voices coming from the room. Jimin enters first, Jungkook behind him.

“Happy birthday!”

Five excited people shout at them. Jimin’s face immediately lights up seeing all the members gathered in the small kitchen. Most of them are still in their pajamas and Namjoon has a terrible case of bed-hair, but that’s what gives off real family vibes. Jimin wants to say something, but he doesn’t get the chance. J-hope already pulls him in a bone-crushing hug, swaying from one side to another. “Happy birthday, Jimin-ah. Your first birthday as an idol. How does it feel? I bet you got tons of messages from ARMY”, J-hope seems more energetic than earlier this morning. Luckily the disturbance didn’t put him in a bad mood.

“Of course, he has. Have you not seen it? You can’t step a foot in Seoul without Jimin’s face popping up from somewhere”, Jin answers. The eldest is leaning against the counter blowing on some steaming coffee. The top of his pink pajamas is slightly open. Taehyung probably pulled him out of bed, Jimin thinks.

Jimin goes to sit with the other members for breakfast, receiving individual congratulations from them. After putting the cake in the fridge Jungkook joins to. Both of them don’t eat with the others as they ate a pastry earlier. They talk about what to eat for dinner, Jin suggests he will cook a special meal and will make some seaweed soup.

After the meal, all the members go to get dressed except for Taehyung. He is already clothed and ready to go. Jimin and Jungkook stay with him. Jungkook looks around the kitchen: “Wow hyung, you did your best. You can’t tell a bomb had exploded here”. Taehyung narrows his eyes. It’s obvious he still is a bit pissed that they just left him to clean everything alone. “You don’t know the fear I went through, trying to fix everything as fast as possible. I was not a second done and Jin-hyung appeared in the kitchen”, Taehyung scoffs. He crosses his arms and sticks his chin in the air.

Jimin giggles at the sight: “I’m so sorry Tae-Tae, next time we’ll help”. Taehyung looks at his friend. “You better. See it as your birthday present from me”. “Are you seri-”, Jimin wants to protest but decides to take a different approach. He flings his arms around the other’s neck and exclaims: “Thank you for the best present!”. Taehyung decides to finally drop his act of being angry and gets back to smiling that familiar boxy smile.

Jungkook, who had been watching from the kitchen table, says: “Hyung, we passed a little bakery and bought you a red bean bun as a gift of our remorse”. Taehyung’s eyes light up and he runs towards Jungkook. “Why didn’t you tell me earlier. Then I wouldn’t have had breakfast”, he says in an annoyed voice and playfully slaps Jungkook’s shoulder. “You can keep it for later, it won’t get bad”, the younger replies.

Taehyung huffs, acting overdramatically offended. “I don’t think so. I’m gonna eat it now.” Jungkook sighs at his silly antics and walks over to the fridge to get the pastry. Taehyung accepts it with a big smile and starts eating it.

Yoongi’s head pops up in the doorway, startling the maknae-line. “Are you guys ready? Manager Sejun is waiting”, and then he is gone again. “Coming!”, Taehyung shouts after him, mouth full of the bun, and leaves the kitchen. Jimin follows him, but Jungkook stays behind. When the elder is out of sight, he opens the fridge and takes the bag with the cake out.

At the car he subtle hands it over to their manager who puts it in the trunk. When everyone is propped together in the car, they make their way to BigHit Entertainment.

The MMA’s are coming up. Jimin and Taehyung’s first award show as K-pop idols. Every single member is working hard to make the performance a success. It's been many hours now, it’s obvious that they’re getting tired.

“No Jin, other side! Faster!”, J-hope shouts.

He stops the music. Jin had bumped into J-hope, which made J-hope lose his temper. Jin clenches his fists: “It was one mistake. Why are you screaming at me?” Jimin looks in shock at the scene unfolding. J-hope is not the one to lash out easily, especially not for a tiny mistake like that. And it’s not that Jin was doing poorly today, on the contrary. Today is one of his better days.

“I don’t care. I told you many times! You go to the back! Just get it right!”, J-hope seems to get angrier and angrier. All the other members are just looking at them. “Well, I’m sorry that I'm not a dance master like you!”, Jin yells back. His anger leveling said dance master. Without warning, Jin turns on his heels and storms out of the practice room. Jimin’s mouth falls open, surprised about how quickly this escalated. He looks around and sees the other looking with different levels of shock.

Namjoon sighs: “Hoseok-ah, you come with me now. We’re going to talk this out immediately". Namjoon leaves, J-hope following behind him. Someone coughs. Yoongi who had a neutral face the whole time says: “I’m going to check on them”. And gone he is.

Now the maknae-line is alone in the practice room. Jimin and Taehyung look at each other, but Taehyung turns around quickly. Jimin doesn’t really know what to do, still processing what happened. He just stands there.

“Uhm, … I need to go to the bathroom”, Jungkook says with an awkward smile. “Yeah sure”, Jimin automatically replies. He decided to start stretching that practice is probably done for now. He sees the door close in the mirror. He also sees Taehyung just standing awkwardly in the corner. He scratches his neck: “Yes, me too”. Before Jimin can say anything, he finds himself alone. He huffs to himself and keeps on stretching.

Not even two minutes later, the lights go out in the practice room and Jimin sees shadows enter the room. They move towards him. He knows it is the members, but his heart starts racing because he’s always a bit afraid in the dark. He feels large hands on his face to obstruct his view, but also a broad chest pressed against his back, and he knows this chest is home. He slides his hands over the strong thighs behind his.

Without Jimin seeing, Taehyung enters the room with a cake with burning candles, Jungkook removes his hands from Jimin’s face but stays right behind him. The members start to sing a birthday song while clapping in their hands. Hobi turns on the lights again. He is surrounded by the members and cameras. Jimin takes a deep breath and blows out the candles. He claps his hands together and thanks the members with a big smile.

Yoongi notices where Jungkook is standing and smirks: he’s going to pull a prank on their maknae. He suddenly points to the door of the practice room and shouts: “Look, Jimin’s dad is here!” Jungkook immediately jumps backward and moves further away from the door and goes hiding behind Namjoon’s back.

When they see nobody enters the dance room, the members first look confused at Yoongi, but as soon that they understand that it’s a joke, they all start laughing. Hobi rolls over the ground while laughing. Jimin moves towards Jungkook and laughs with his hand in front of his mouth. When he reaches the younger, he puts his hands on his chest and moves them downwards while laughing hard. When his hands reach his stomach, Jungkook takes his hands and gives him a flustered smile. But they let each other go as soon as they get aware of the cameras.

The filming ends and they get a bit of privacy to give their presents to the birthday boy.

They all bought presents for Jimin. He’s so grateful for all the sweet attentions that a big smile does not leave his face, and he even gets tears in his eyes when he receives Hobi’s present.

~ * ~

It’s finally lunchtime. Exhausted everybody manages to drag themselves to the room next door. Everything they had ordered is waiting for them on a white plastic table. Jimin looks through one of the brown bags and finds his salad. He places himself next to Namjoon and starts eating. Namjoon is eating an even more pathetic salad: his one doesn’t have meat in eat, not even chicken. It’s not really their first choice, but they are both put on a diet.

With jealousy, they look at Taehyung eating his bowl of naengmyeon. The agency never puts him on a diet, he seems to not be able to gain weight. The lucky bastard, Jimin thinks. Jungkook enters the room, phone in hand. He halts in the doorway to busy tapping away on his screen.

“Excuse me but there are people who would like to eat”, Jin says standing behind Jungkook. The younger doesn’t react, even after Jin pushes him inside. He keeps tapping, stops, and smiles, and presses one more button. Several phones vibrate. Everyone in the room looks at Jungkook, knowing the notification comes from him.

Jimin takes his phone while the others just ignore it. The notification comes from their Twitter account. He opens it to see what Jungkook tweeted. It’s probably for his birthday as other members have done already. The previous post is Taehyung’s. He went all out, spamming the timeline with half a dozen silly photos of Jimin.

Jungkook’s on the other hand seems to have a lot more text. Jimin clicks on the post and is met with a bunch of hashtags with a picture attached to it.

A blush starts creeping up on Jimin as he smiles shyly. He can’t believe that Jungkook just posted something like this. It’s a very risky thing, but when Jimin looks up a confidant looking Jungkook is staring back.

Jungkook walks over to him with his lunch in hand. He places himself close to Jimin. “Sorry once again”, he smirks. Jimin calmly puts down his salad and turns to him. “Are you serious? Why are you so sweet yet so dumb?”, he slaps Jungkook on the chest. He tries to keep his voice down, but he can’t help but laugh. Jungkook’s post is something of the sweetest posts Jimin ever read but at the same time the dumbest things he has ever done. Jungkook keeps smiling while the older keeps slapping him, loving the sight of a flustered Jimin. He grabs the elder’s wrists to stop him and places a small kiss on his cheek.

Jimin’s wrists are released and he wants to get back to slapping Jungkook, but he falls on his back and rolls out of reach. Taking his food with him.

Meanwhile, Namjoon gets curious and slightly stressed about what their maknae posted and made Jimin react like that. He clicks on the post, reads everything plus a few comments, sighs, and rubs his forehead. Of course, Jungkook wouldn’t keep it with just a photo and a simple text for Jimin’s birthday. Or even posting many photos like Taehyung. No, Jungkook had to do something special and Namjoon can’t blame him. He stares at the couple, Jimin is crawling after Jungkook who is still rolling away. He almost hits Yoongi. Namjoon unconsciously smiles. He decides to not bring it up and let Jungkook have this one, if the managers bring it up, he will work it out.

After everyone is done eating, they go back to work.

~ * ~

Jimin and Jungkook don’t overwork that day, they return to the dorm after the last mandatory practice is done, Jungkook waiting for Jimin in the hallway at the entrance door. After dinner, Jimin and Jungkook are silently enjoying the cake they brought back to their dorms. To others are still at the company and will get a piece when they are back. The cake is delicious. It has a strong chocolate taste, but not too sweet. Perfect to Jimin’s liking. That’s the only thing that matters, as Jungkook doesn’t really enjoy it. But seeing Jimin smile and close his eyes to savor the taste, means everything to him.

They talk about the day; how much they enjoyed the walk and how sweet the old lady from the bakery was. And of course, they talk about their excitement for the upcoming award shows.

When they are finished Jimin goes to call his parents after Jungkook offered to clean the table. For more than 20 minutes Jimin is on the phone. First saying hey to both parents and telling them he had an amazing day and then ranting to his mom about everything that happened. Jungkook trying to bake a cake and failing miserably, Jungkook taking him on a walk to buy him a cake, the sweet old lady, Jungkook making him laugh, the members surprise, Jungkook this, Jungkook that, Jungkook, Jungkook, Jungkook.

Although Mrs. Park doesn’t say anything, hearing her son’s smile through the phone and the way he talks about this certain Jungkook, she gets it. And she’s so happy for him.

Later in the evening Jungkook and Jimin decide to watch the first Iron Man together. Though they don’t last long. They started their day very early and the whole day dancing tired them so out that after almost 10 minutes in the film, they are fast asleep. Jimin in Jungkook’s lap, embraced by his strong arms. When the other members find the two snuggled under a blanket on the couch, they turned off the tv, took each a piece of cake, and retreat in silence to their rooms.

Except Jungkook was not sleeping. When he heard the other members come home, he pretended to sleep and waited until they’re all gone to their rooms. Several doors close, it’s quiet in the apartment. Jungkook wriggles his phone out of his sweatpants and opens Twitter. He types with one hand on his keyboard and pushes the post button. Jimin’s phone lying on the table tings, indicating he has a notification.

He looks contently at his tweet again and closes his eyes to finally sleep. The boy he adores so much in his arms. While the likes increase and the timeline is in tears, Jungkook’s tweet is waiting to be read by Jimin.

It’s a picture of a sleeping Jimin with the message “This is not over yet…” because Jungkook has yet another surprise for him…

Chapter Text

Next weekend, the BTS members have a free weekend. They are all gathered in the living room and excitedly discuss their plans for the coming weekend. Most of the members will go home to their families. Jimin turns to Jungkook and asks with big round eyes: “Kookie, wouldn’t it be nice to do something together?” and then he adds hesitantly: “Unless you have plans of your own…”. And automatically a pout appears on his beautiful face.

Jungkook can’t almost resist but teasing Jimin is one of his favorite hobbies. He answers: “Well, uh, I was planning to go to Tokyo for the weekend.” Jimin’s mouth falls open and Jungkook sees the disappointment building in his eyes. Jimin’s face is such an open book sometimes. Jungkook chuckles in himself.

Jungkook can’t almost hold himself from taking Jimin in his arms and kiss the disappointment away, but he continues teasing: “I thought you wouldn’t like to come along, so I didn’t ask.” And with a cheerful smirk, he looks Jimin in the eyes and says eagerly: “I’m going to fly first class, hyung. And I booked a room in a very classy hotel.” Jimin does not know what to answer. He does not want to show his disappointment, so he answers: “That’s nice, Kookie. I really hope you have fun. Are you going to visit the city? Or is it just for shopping?”. Jungkook adds: “Shopping is definitely on my to-do list, but I think that I’m going to go to Disneyland also.” Jimin sighs. He does his very best to answer with a steady voice: “That’s definitely something on my wish list too.” He searches Jungkook’s face for any sign that his ears are betraying him, but Jungkook looks so happy. “Do you want to see my tickets, hyung?” Jimin nods softly.

While Jungkook is gone to his room, Jimin stares at his hands: he really wants to be happy for Jungkook but he is so disappointed that Jungkook didn’t ask him along, or does not want to spend the free weekend with him. Taehyung, who sits next to him on the couch, sees his best friend’s despair washing over his body, and wraps his arm around his shoulder. He whispers: “I can stay home if you want. We can go out and go dancing and get waisted, like when we were at uni.”

Jungkook returns to the couch, flaunting with his tickets. He happily shows the tickets to Jimin, seemingly oblivious to the hurt in his eyes. When Jimin sees a second ticket, he asks with a shaking voice: “you’re going with someone?” Jungkook looks at him with a big smile: “Yeah, I’m going with my best friend”. Jimin wants to say something friendly, but nothing comes out of his mouth instead of a big pout appears. Jungkook puts the second ticket in his hand to give the elder the possibility to read the name on the second ticket.

It takes a while for Jimin to read the name on the ticket because of his teary eyes. But he hears Taehyungs excited voice next to him: “Look Jimin! It’s your name on the ticket!”. Jimin looks with large eyes at Jungkook while a lonely tear rolls over his cheek: “Really! You’re taking me with you?” Jungkook smiles his bunny smile at Jimin: “Of course! What do you think of me!” Jimin throws himself on Jungkook smothering him in kisses. Jungkook wraps his arms around the smaller boy and kisses him back. Taehyung shrieks: “Bweeeek! Don’t kiss right in front of my face!”, and Yoongi shouts: “Get a room you two!”.

They get up from the couch. “Are we really going to visit Disneyland?” Jimin shouts happily, while they walk towards Jungkook’s room. “Yes, of course, I already bought the tickets. What do I get for it in return?”

~ * ~

Jungkook and Jimin leave for the airport right after the last dance practice. It’s already late in the evening when they arrive at Tokyo airport. They take a taxi to the hotel, but there is still a lot of traffic, so it takes them quite some time to arrive at the hotel. Jungkook passes his time by filming through the window of the taxi and by filming Jimin in close-up.

When they enter the hotel room, Jimin’s eyes become very big: he has never seen such a luxurious hotel room. He drops his bag in the middle of the room and jumps on the king-size bed, landing on his back, arms and legs spread, a blissful smile on his face.

Jungkook also drops his bag and walks over to the bed. He lays himself next to Jimin, leaning on one elbow and slightly hovering over the elder. “You like it? Is that luxury enough for you?” Jimin turns towards the younger and kisses him softly. “It’s too much. Do you like me that much?” And his smile turns into a smirk. Jungkook only nods and tries to kiss Jimin back but the elder already jumps from the bed to look outside the window. The room has a large window that oversees Tokyo city. Jungkook halts next to him and wraps his arm around Jimin's shoulders while Jimin admires the amazing view. Jimin points at different buildings while Jungkook nods and listens to the enthusiastic explanations of the elder.

Jimin turns around towards the bathroom. He remarks with a smirk: “The bathroom does not give much to hide” as the wall between the room and the bathroom consists mainly of windows.

“A bit shy?” Jungkook replies with a shit-eating grin on his face.

Jimin gives him a slap on his chest: “I’m not shy, but you’re going to ogle me like a pervert.”

Jungkook takes the elder in a back hug again while he whispers in his ear: “I’ve seen everything by now, remember our night in Nagoya.” He trails a number of wet kisses behind Jimin’s’ ear and the elder sighs in his embrace.

After a while Jungkook asks: “Are you hungry? We can order some room service”. Jimin hesitates but replies: “We’ve already eaten on the plane. We better don’t stuff ourselves too much because we have a lot of award shows coming our way and we need to be in shape. And I don’t want you to break your back when you lift me.” Jungkook sighs softly: “You know you will never be too heavy for me. I’ll lift you anyway.” Jimin looks at the bottle of champagne on the table and continues: “But I would like a glass of champagne if that’s ok for you.”

Jungkook smiles: “Yes, of course. I ordered it especially for tonight.”

Jimin tries to open the bottle of champagne but the fluid spills over the bottleneck and all over the table. Jungkook exclaims: “Oh! Be careful, this bottle is very expensive!” and with that, he bends over the table and starts licking up the champagne. Jimin starts laughing but joins him in licking up the spilled champagne. Jimin licks in the direction of Jungkook, and when their tongues touch, they start to kiss while they straighten their backs. After a few minutes, Jimin breaks the kiss and whispers: “Let us have that glass of champagne now.”

When their glass is empty, they fill their glasses again and kiss and talk a little more. Jimin looks around the room and says in a soft and low tone: “What would you think of taking a shower together before we go to bed?”

They shower together sharing soft kisses and touches while they wash themselves. They do not say it out loud but they both want to save their ministrations for the bedroom. When they leave the shower, they quickly dry themselves and grab a bathrobe before going back to the room.

They huddle on the bed and start kissing languidly, limbs entangled. Jungkook’s hand moves slowly towards Jimin’s throat and lets his hand glide in the opening of the bathrobe to caress Jimin’s chest. Jimin softly moans against Jungkook’s mouth when he feels a thumb caressing his nipple softly. Jimin opens Jungkook’s bathrobe to be able to caress his naked chest and waist. He moves closer to Jungkook to have their hips touch. As Jungkook does not move to remove Jimin’s bathrobe, he opens it himself to make their naked crotches touch. They grind their hips against each other and moan in each other’s mouths.

When Jimin moves his hand to palm the younger’s crotch, Jungkook removes his hand while he softly whispers: “Jimin, wait, I want to ask you something first.” Jimin looks surprised and asks with worry in his eyes: “Is there something wrong?” Jungkook is quick to reply: “No, no there is nothing wrong. But I wonder if this isn’t a good time to take it a step further.” Jimin sits up and asks surprised: “Are you sure about that?”

Jungkook nods but does not dare to look the elder in the eyes. He takes the other’s hand and caresses his knuckles: “Yes, I gave it a good thought and I really want that.”

Jimin responds: “But we don’t have the necessary supplies.” Jungkook gets up from the bed and rumbles through his bag. He comes back to the bed with a small bottle of lube and a box with condoms. He climbs on the bed again and goes sitting in front of the elder. He lays the supplies in between them. Jimin laughs: “I’m not going to ask where you get that from. Did you steal it from one of the hyungs?” Jungkook grins: “No, I asked my stylist noona to buy it for me.” Jimin shrieks: “You did what??” Jungkook shrugs: “She is my stylist since the beginning and I trust her completely.” He snorts: “I already talked with her about you the day after your dance competition.” Then he continues in a soft voice: “When the staff was officially informed about our relationship, she said that she already suspected it for a long time.” He snorts again: “It seems my eyes follow you wherever you go. She also said that if I needed something from the pharmacy, I could ask her. So I asked her last week, and she gave it to me discretely the day after.”

Jimin turns red in Jungkook’s place. He would never dare to ask someone to get some lube or condoms for him. He looks at the items on the bed and then looks up at Jungkook: “Do you want to use a condom?” Jungkook shrugs: “I don’t know. What do you think?” Jimin says thoughtfully: “I suppose you never did ‘this’ before. And I had a check-up right before I joined BTS... it feels better without…” Jungkook frowns: “You already did it?”. Jimin turns red again: “Yes, but it’s been a long time.” Jungkook states reluctantly: “And now the big question is, who is on the receiving end.” Jimin scratches his nape and replies: “In my previous relationship we tried both ways… I suggest that you bottom this time: I’ll explain what I do and why, and next time I can bottom.” Jungkook nods in agreement. Jimin adds hesitantly: “But I’m not going to lie to you, it’s going to hurt in the beginning. But I’ll do my best to make you feel good.”

They start kissing again while removing their bathrobes. Jimin pushes against Jungkook’s shoulders to make him lay back on the bed. He’s sitting next to Jungkook on the bed. He gently cups his cheeks and gently kisses him. Then he spreads the younger’s legs. When he starts to caress his thighs, moving to his inner thighs, the boy closes his legs in a reflex. Jimin hovers over his boyfriend and looks him in the eyes when he whispers softly: “Jungkook-ah, you will have to relax, and I promise I will take it slow. But know that you can stop whenever you want. I will never force you.” Jungkook nods fiercely but the fear is visible in his eyes.

Jimin softly kisses his mouth and his jawline while trying to spread the boys’ legs again. While placing wet kisses on his shoulders and chests, he takes place in between his legs. He places a hand at the inside of one knee to make Jungkook bend his leg and caresses the inner thigh of that leg. Then he places a hand at the inside of the other knee to make him bend his other leg. He feels Jungkook tensing up again. He looks at Jungkook’s face and sees that the younger boy has his eyes shut. He softly calls: “Jungkook-ah…. Look at me…” When the boy opens his eyes, they lock eyes and while Jimin hovers over the younger’s body he tries to hold his gaze. He then softly kisses his cheeks and jaw: “Jungkook-ah, try to relax”.

He trails wet kisses down till he reaches Jungkook’s groin. He hears Jungkook moan softly and feels his body relax. He continues kissing and licking the other’s groin while he reaches with one hand for the bottle of lube. He squeezes a good deal of lube on his hand. When he pushes his finger against Jungkook’s hole, he feels the younger tensing up again, so he needs to find a way to compensate for the fear and the hurt with pleasure. He starts kissing and licking the other’s hard-on. While pleasuring Jungkook he prepares the younger as well as possible. With each additional finger Jungkook tenses again, but does his best to relax again.

When Jimin thinks his younger boyfriend is prepared as good as possible, Jimin puts some lube on his length and aligns himself against Jungkook’s entrance. He carefully presses the tip past the younger’s rim. And oh god, it hurts. Jungkook wants to scream, but he does not want to scare Jimin. Sweat breaks out and tears prick at the corner of his eyes.

Jimin backs out and threads his hand through the younger sweaty hair. He asks again if he wants to stop. Jungkook is panting and his voice is wavering when he answers: “No, Jimin, I want you to go on. I love you Jimin.” Jimin places soft kisses on his forehead and whispers against his skin: “I love you too, Kookie.”

Jimin positions himself again between the younger’s legs and carefully pushes the tip back in. He moves further in inch by inch. And each time he pushes further, Jungkook’s breath hitches. By the time he’s completely in, tears roll from out of the corners of the younger’s eyes. He tries to open his eyes and when he sees the worry in his boyfriend’s eyes, he tries to conjure a small smile and lifts his trembling hands to caress his beautiful face.

Jimin places small kisses on his lips and after a few seconds he says in a soft voice: “I don’t want to sound like a pervert, but I think it will be easier for you if you wrap your legs around my waist”. Jungkook looks at him and laughs a bit, but does as is asked.

Jimin’s arms are shaky because he does his utmost to control himself to not move until Jungkook has adjusted enough. But the younger is so tight that he almost comes right then. When Jungkook whispers, it’s almost as quiet as a breath: “You… you can… move” but he holds his breath to prepare for the worse. Jimin retracts slowly and pushes in again, desire washing over him. He strokes Jungkook member in the meantime, to at least distract him and hopefully give him some pleasure. Jimin moves slowly and with each push, he gets a bit deeper. He keeps a slow pace to let Jungkook adjust.

And then it happens, then there is a feeling that feels completely different and surpasses the hurt. And Jungkook sees stars and moans; now he understands what it is all about. And each time Jimin trusts, that tingling feeling washes over him making him moan and gasp. He opens his eyes and looks directly at his boyfriend’s dark gaze. He whispers: “Jimin….” before his head falls back in the pillows. His whisper travels through Jimin’s groin, and that’s enough to make him come after a few more thrusts, his moans chasing Jungkook over the edge.

Jimin falls on Jungkook’s chest while they try to catch their breath. After a minute Jimin retracts but stays on top of Jungkook, his nose and mouth snuggled in the crook of his lover’s neck. After a few minutes, he scrambles off the bed to get a lukewarm washcloth from the bathroom to clean up Jungkook, and then himself.

Then he crawls next to the younger and covers their bodies with the bed covers. They cuddle closer and fall asleep in each other’s arms.

~ * ~

They get up around 10 o’clock because they want to visit the city during the day, and during the evening they are going to visit Disneyland. Jungkook limps a bit when he stumbles out of bed, but after a hot shower, it is already going better. Well, it still hurts, but he’s not going to admit that to Jimin. “I think if we start walking slowly, it will get better with the minute.”

Jungkook takes his film gear with him as he wants to make a video of their trip. Of course, he also films Jimin a lot: Jimin in the elevator, Jimin getting in and out of a taxi, Jimin walking around, Jimin laughing, Jimin behaving funny, Jimin making fun of him, till a point that Jimin asks Jungkook to stop filming and finally look at him, not through his camera.

They wanted to visit the city but they end up wandering in and out of shops, and Tokyo has a lot of shops. It’s already dark outside when they return to their hotel room with a lot of shopping bags.

They immediately go out again as they want to grab a bit at a famous steak house before they head over to Disneyland.

Jimin is over the moon when Jungkook buys him a mickey mouse hat. He puts it on during almost the whole visit. Disneyland at night is mesmerizing. Jimin is not much into tough rides because he easily becomes nauseous but he really likes the ambiance. Jungkook can convince him to join him on the teacup ride but even there he becomes nauseous because Jungkook makes the cup spin too fast. Jungkook can’t help himself but film Jimin while he fights against nausea. Jimin is a little bit dizzy when he gets out of the teacup ride and Jungkook cannot stop laughing.

~ * ~

When they are back in their hotel room, they take a bath together. Just like in Nagoya, they wash each other’s hair. When they are all washed up, Jimin rests between Jungkook's legs, his back against the other boy’s chest, sharing small kisses and soft words. They enjoy the bath until the water starts to cool down.

They towel themselves off but don’t bother to put on the bathrobe before they hurry to bed. Jungkook sits down in the middle of the bed, legs a little spread. Jimin joins him on the bed and goes sit on his knees in between the younger’s legs. He whispers softly: “It’s your turn today, you know.” Jungkook kisses his lips and his nose while he caresses Jimin’s waist. He finally whispers back: “Are you sure Jimin? I don’t want to hurt you. Your hips are so much smaller.” Jimin softly shakes his head and replies in a convinced tone: “You will not hurt me. I’m sure you will take care of me and prepare me well.” He kisses Jungkook and his breath caresses Jungkook’s lips when he softly continues: “I want to know how it feels to have you inside me. I want you so much.”

And that’s enough for Jungkook to wrap his arms around Jimin’s waist and to deepen the kiss. Jimin is still on his knees so he lifts the elder by his ass to be able to kiss his neck, his collarbones, and his chest. He bends over to lick the elder’s hardening nipples, which makes the elder moan and arch his back. In the meantime, he caresses with his fingers over Jimin’s rim, which makes Jimin push his ass towards Jungkook’s hand, soft gasps escaping from his lips.

While Jungkook reaches for the bottle of lube, Jimin shifts his position by leaning backward on his arms, ass in between Jungkook’s legs, and spreading his legs around Jungkook’s waist. Jungkook takes in the sight, eyes filled with want, and when his look travels up to Jimin’s eyes, he sees the elder looking back at him, the same desire reflected in his gaze, pupils blown wide. He takes a deep breath and pushes his first finger slowly in, hands shaking. He is very careful while preparing Jimin and waits for the elders’ signal to push in a second finger. In the meantime, he also tries to concentrate on pleasuring Jimin with his other hand. He hopes he’s not doing a bad job if he can go by the gasps and moans coming from Jimin.

When his fingers touch the small bundle of nerves inside Jimin, Jimin starts moaning Jungkook’s name. He even lifts his hips from the bed to thrust back on Jungkook’s fingers. Jungkook looks with growing amazement at his lover: he looks so beautiful and sinful at the same time, sweat glistering on his throat and chest. He already had a hunch that Jimin is very sensual, but the way he loses himself in Jungkook’s ministrations is breathtaking and very arousing. It almost drives the younger over the top, but he knows he must control himself and hold back. Jimin has difficulties formulating words, but he manages to whisper: “Jungkook-ah… I’m ready. I want to feel you inside me.” Jungkook withdraws his fingers and wraps his arms around Jimin’s waist to get him closer and press their chests together. Jimin wraps his arms around his neck and moves his hips in search of Jungkook’s length, while they kiss each other hungrily. When Jungkook breaks the kiss, he trails soft kisses over the elder’s jawline and throat while bending over to make Jimin lie on his back. Then he places his hands at the back of Jimin’s knees. Jimin understands the hint and places his legs over Jungkook's shoulders to give him easier entrance. Jungkook shakes over his whole body when he pushes the tip in. Jimin instantly tenses up. It costs him a lot of self-control to not push further. But he waits for Jimin to relax and signals him to go further. He carefully pushes further until he completely bottoms out. And God, does that feel good! He has to do his utmost not to start thrusting, or not to come right now.

Sweat trickles from his forehead while he looks at Jimin who has his eyes closed, his upper lip wet with sweat. His hand shakes when he pushes a strand of hair from his boyfriend’s forehead and kisses his temple. He asks: “Are you OK?” Jimin nods fiercely, but the frown in between his eyebrows indicates otherwise. He pleas: “Mini-jagi, please look at me”. Jimin opens his eyes and whispers almost breathless: “Yes, I’m OK. It hurts a bit, but you can move. I want it.” And after a few seconds he adds, still with his gaze locked into his lover’s beautiful eyes, voice broken: “Jungkook-ah… I love you…” and that’s enough for Jungkook to start thrusting in a slow pace. With one hand in Jungkook’s sweaty locks, his other hand gropes for a pillow. He lifts his hips from the bed to shove the pillow under his hips to allow for Jungkook to get even deeper. And Jungkook almost loses it. The feeling of having Jimin all around him is so overwhelming that it makes him thrust harder and deeper.

When Jungkook hits his prostate, Jimin’s moans become louder. He understands he found the right spot and tries to hit the spot with each thrust. Jimin’s length is pressed between their stomachs, and with each thrust of Jungkook, he tries to generate enough friction to get him off at the same time.

It does not take long for them to come. Jungkook collapses with his full weight on Jimin. They are both exhausted. The younger wants to pull out of Jimin, but Jimin presses a hand on the small of his back and whispers: “Please, stay for a bit, don’t leave me yet.” Jimin is not ready yet to let go of the intimacy they have. Jungkook nuzzles in Jimin’s neck and sights: “I never thought sex would feel so good.” Jimin smiles in Jungkook’s neck: “I must admit that it was a very good first time. You are really good at everything, aren’t you.” The younger giggles softly at that.

When they catch their breath again, Jungkook gets up to fetch a towel with lukewarm water from the bathroom. When he comes back from the bathroom, Jimin is almost asleep. He cleans the elder up before cleaning up himself. He gets into the bed and cuddles close to Jimin, covering them with the bed covers. They fall asleep in each other’s arms.

When they wake up too early in the morning and feel each other’s nakedness, they go for a second round. But this time it is less hungry, more tender. They enjoy it even more as they start to know each other’s bodies, vulnerabilities, and desires better.

~ * ~

They get up around 10 AM because they want to take full advantage of their last day in Tokyo and Jungkook has prepared a list of important things to see. Normally, it’s always Jimin who is first out of bed, but this time it is Jungkook. Jimin has more difficulties getting out of bed. Jungkook is overwhelmed with remorse when he sees Jimin limping to the bathroom. “Are you ok, hyung?” he asks.

Jimin turns to him and answers: “To be honest, my back hurts… a lot”.

“We can stay in bed if you want. We don’t have to visit the city. We can always come back later.”

“Let me take a pee first and brush my teeth, and then I’ll tell you how I feel.”

When Jimin returns from the bathroom, Jungkook looks at him with a worrisome look in his eyes, and he asks again: “Are you ok, hyung?”

Jimin returns to bed and carefully climbs up to it: “Would you mind if I pull a rain check for this morning and rest some more? We can always go out this afternoon.”

A few weeks later, when Jungkook is asked in an interview which places they visited in Tokyo, he answers: “I prepared a list of interesting places to visit, but hyung kept playing on his phone till 5 AM. So we slept longer.”

When they get hungry, they order room service.

It’s already afternoon when they go out. They decide to shop some more as Jimin is still hurting, but stubborn Jimin didn’t want to waste the whole day in bed.

They also enter a Bulgari shop. Jimin is attracted by the jewelry in the store. Jungkook walks up to him and leans against his shoulder: “Something you like.” “Yes, I think I’m going to buy some earrings.” Jungkook stares at the rings in the display. Jimin notices and whispers: “You’re thinking of buying a ring?” Jungkook looks up and looks Jimin in the eyes. Jimin could see his glance change from thoughtful to smiling endearingly. He hesitates before he also softly: “What would you say about buying couple rings?” Jimin looks at him with something of a shock in his eyes, and Jungkook adds quickly: “It’s nothing official like an engagement or something. And we don’t have to do it if you don’t want to. It’s just a spontaneous idea.” Jimin's smile reaches his eyes with a glint of adoration when he replies: “That’s a great idea Jungkook-ah. You know I like romantic things like that, but I never thought you would be into this kind of stuff.” They bent over the display again to make their choice. They try on several options. When they finally make their choice, the shop assistant asks: “Do you want an inscription in the rings?” They both look in awe at each other and Jimin asks: “Can I make a suggestion?” “Yes, of course!” Jungkook replies smiling. It’s getting better with the moment, he thinks. Jimin says thoughtfully: “I would like something like ‘neoneun na, naneun neo’ (= you are me, I am you)” Jungkook does not know what to say, he is so over the moon by the idea. He finally stammers: “That’s the most beautiful thing that I have ever heard.” He turns to the shop assistant and spells the wanted inscription. The shop assistant bows and asks: “Are you coming back for the rings tomorrow or do you prefer to wait while our goldsmith engraves the inscription?” Jungkook replies that they will wait as they fly back to Seoul tomorrow.

While they wait for the rings, Jimin chooses the earrings he wants to buy and then he drags Jungkook towards the clothing department: “I’m going to buy something nice. You always wear baggy pants and oversized sweaters, while you look so attractive and godly in the outfits during photoshoots and concerts.” Jungkook grumbles a bit but finally accepts Jimin’s offer. Jimin smiles widely and claps in his hands while he says: “I’m choosing, and you are going to fit everything on.” Jungkook grumbles a bit more but gives in. Jungkook enters the fitting room and Jimin passes him several outfits. Jimin notices that one of the shop assistants looks up each time Jungkook comes out of the fitting room and discretely looks him up and down. Of course, he looks discretely but he can’t hide the admiration in his eyes. Jimin smiles at himself because he knows Jungkook is very attractive, and he is the lucky guy who takes him home. So Jimin decides to put on a little show to show the shop assistant that Jungkook has only eyes for him.

That evening they want to participate in a Halloween parade through the streets in Tokyo. They both wear masks to be able to walk around incognito. In the beginning, they are still a bit anxious to be recognized. But Jungkook musters up his courage and takes Jimin by the hand. After a few minutes, Jimin feels more comfortable and leans more and more into Jungkook. Jungkook wraps his arm around Jimin’s shoulder, while Jimin wraps his arm around Jungkook’s waist. They are euphoric and all over the moon that they can walk around like that in public.

With pain in their heart, they let go of each other when they arrive at the corner of the street where their hotel is located. Before entering the hotel, they remove their masks. The whole way up in the elevator they laugh and gaze in each other’s eyes, so ready to kiss each other, but they withhold.

Once they are in their hotel room, the door not even completely closed behind them, they start kissing while kicking out their shoes and getting rid of coats and sweaters, and jeans. With nothing on except their underwear, Jungkook lifts Jimin in his arms, lips still attached to each other. Jimin wraps his arms around the younger’s neck and his legs around his waist to get even closer. Jungkook stumbles towards the bed and lays the elder on his back on the bed. He removes his briefs in a smooth movement. He also removes his own briefs and takes the bottle of lube before scrambling on the bed under the admiring gaze of the elder. He sits next to Jimin and lets his eyes and hand glide over the other’s collarbones, chest, and toned stomach. He mumbles: “You’re so fucking handsome, I can’t get enough of you.” Jimin smiles softly and raises himself to his knees. He straddles Jungkook’s thighs and tries to get as close as possible and to create some friction. They grind against each other and kisses become needier.

Jungkook breaks the kiss and hides his face in the crook of Jimin’s neck. His voice shakes when he whispers: “I love you so bad.”

Jimin whispers against Jungkook’s neck: “I think that we better be careful tonight. We need to be able to excel at dance practice tomorrow. Otherwise, the hyungs will be laughing at us.” Jungkook giggles softly: “Still hurting, hyung?”

They make out languidly, kissing and touching each other where they can. They take their sweet time to savor each other’s bodies. They try to get the most out of the night because they don’t know when they will be able to make love to each other again.

~ * ~

The morning after they return to Seoul with the first flight. As soon as they are back, they have to fall back into their regular schedule of dance practices and singing practices. They are so infatuated with each other that their stickiness makes the other BTS members gag.

Luckily for the couple, they also have a lot of private dancing practices for their Black Swan performance at the Melon Music Awards.

The first evening after their trip to Tokyo, Jungkook goes straight to his studio. Jimin tries to follow him to his studio, but Jungkook can convince him to let him work alone. It’s after midnight when he returns to the dorms. They are so used to sleeping together by now, that Jungkook easily finds his way to Jimin’s bed.

The second evening Jimin tries to convince Jungkook to take him with him to his studio, but Jungkook refuses again. Jimin shrugs and returns to the dorms together with Hoseok and Taehyung. After dinner, Jimin busies himself by making a travel log of their trip to Tokyo in the hope that the happy memories will lighten his mood. When Jungkook comes home he’s making the final touches. He happily shows the result. Jungkook praises his work, and they push the upload button together.

When they go to bed, Jungkook takes the elder in his arms, back pressed against his chest, and he hums in contentment. Jimin turns around in his arms to face the younger. He feels a small hand getting placed on his cheek, the thumb softly caressing the skin. “I missed you”, Jimin’s voice is barely louder than a whisper, “Where have you been the past days?”. Jungkook can hear the sadness in his voice. It breaks his heart but for the sake of the surprise, he can’t tell him.

Jungkook pulls Jimin closer: “Working on a project”. But that answer is not good enough for Jimin, and he wriggles himself out of the tight embrace, creating some distance by placing both hands on Jungkook’s chest and pushing himself away. “I know you have to work, and I know that you always worked hard, but I want to spend time with my boyfriend. It’s not that I’m angling at dates. Rehearsing our dances in the dance studio or singing our parts of the songs is also spending time together”. Jimin pouts even though it’s impossible to see in the darkroom. Jimin’s tone makes Jungkook chuckle: “You’re too cute whining like that”. He stretches his arm in the dark in search of the other’s face. He feels Jimin’s nose and pinches it softly. Jimin whines and slaps his hand away.

This makes Jungkook laugh a bit harder. “One more night and I'm all yours again, okay?”, silence, “Okay?”. Jimin sighs dramatically: “Okaaay”. With that Jungkook pulls his boyfriend in his arms again. He kisses his temple softly while he whispers: “The first evening that I’m free, we’ll watch that film that Taehyung recommended. And then we will dance our asses off for our Black Swan performance”. Entangled in each other, both men fall asleep.

The third evening Jimin knows the drill and does not beg anymore, but with hurt in his eyes, he follows Jungkook’s retreating back until he’s out of sight. Taehyung finds his best friend in the hallway staring at the closed elevator doors. He can guess what his friend is thinking, so he grabs him by the arm and they walk home together. Taehyung does his best to make Jimin laugh with his silly antics. They climb in bed together and watch Jimin’s favorite film on Taehyung’s laptop, limbs tangled together. Jimin falls asleep in Taehyungs arms.

When Jungkook wants to climb into Jimin’s bed, he finds it empty. He tiptoes to his own bed, but Jimin is not there neither. He stares at the empty bed for a few minutes and then sneaks to Taehyung’s bedroom to see if his lover is sleeping in his best friends’ bed. He’s a bit disappointed but he does not have the heart to wake Jimin, so he returns to his bed alone. He’s so used to sleep in Jimin’s arms, that he has difficulties falling asleep. He’s glad that he will be able to finish his project tomorrow evening and to go back to normal with Jimin. He feels that his absence weighs on Jimin’s morals and he does not want to see his lover unhappy.

During the day everything is normal and Jimin has to admit that Jungkook is very attentive, but when Jimin stays back in the studio, alone, he cannot stop his thoughts from spiraling down. The reasonable part of his brain knows that Jungkook sometimes works on his own projects, and he does not want to hold back his creativity, he’s the golden maknae after all. But there is also the insecure part in Jimin that makes him anxious that Jungkook is a bit fed up with him after their trip. He tries to dance it off by practicing his solo, but he can’t distract himself nor find the passion he normally has for dancing. He lowers himself down on the floor, arms over his eyes, tears spilling from his eyes.

And it’s like that that Jungkook finds him. He moves over to his boyfriend and sits down on his knees next to him. He removes his arms and places small kisses all over his face to kiss his tears away. At first, Jimin does not move, but when the younger kisses his lips, he wraps his arms around his lover. Jungkook lays himself down next to him and turns around to get the elder laying on top of him. He licks at the elder’s lower lip and when the latter parts his lips a little bit, he deepens the kiss, and everything disappears around them. When they part to breathe, Jungkook whispers: “I have a surprise for you”. Jimin lifts his head and looks at the younger. “But you have to come upstairs with me.”

They get up from the floor and the younger drags Jimin behind him. Of course, the elder cannot stop asking: “What is it? What is it?” but he tries to keep his expression as neutral as possible. It is difficult because of the excitement and nerves rushing through his body. He’s happy about the result but he does not know how Jimin will react.

They finally arrive at Jungkook’s studio. He rushes inside and hastily places Jimin on his chair. The latter looks confused at Jungkook scrambling to get his computer. Jimin crosses his arms and leans back in the chair and lets Jungkook do whatever it is he so desperately needs to do. When a laptop is placed in front of him Jimin sees that a video is being uploaded to BANGTANTV. He looks from the laptop to Jungkook behind him looking like an excited puppy. Jungkook nods his head towards the computer. It’s on 95% uploaded.

“Jungkook, what is the-”, he is cut off by Jungkook leaning forward. The closeness makes Jimin’s heart jolt, his sweet smell entering his nose. Jungkook clicks on the confirm button and the video starts playing.

Jimin can’t believe what he is watching. He is staring back at his own face looking so happy. Shots of Tokyo, him smiling and playing around, a Ferris wheel –a rainbow one at that-, him eating, another shot of Tokyo, them in a store. Jimin’s face keeps appearing with the biggest smile. The song that plays in the background has an upbeat melody. Even though Jimin can’t understand the lyrics completely, it’s clear as day this is a love song. He hears the male voice say boy at one moment. This is not just a love song; this is a gay love song.

When the clips of him in Disneyland are played Jimin can’t help but cry. The tears had been building up from the beginning and now they’re rolling over his cheeks. The video ends and Jimin doesn’t care anymore, he is now really crying. He flings his arms around Jungkook’s neck and hugs him tightly. The younger doesn’t hesitate to wrap his arms around Jimin’s small waist. The position is a bit awkward and Jungkook feels his back already starting to hurt, but he doesn’t care. "Thank you so much... You’re the best- the best boyfriend... this is so beautiful!”, Jimin sobs his tears wetting Jungkook’s shirt. Jungkook shushes him and caresses his back to comfort him.

“How did you- why did they- I-I...”, Jimin can’t get out of his words. He has so many questions. How did Jungkook get BigHit to agree for him to use a gay love song? How did he convince them to approve of him making a video about their trip to Tokyo with barely showing anything of the city itself? This video is an obvious declaration of love.

Jungkook lets go of the sobbing mess that his boyfriend is, as his back starts to really hurt now. Instead, he turns the chair slightly and crouches in front of him. He grabs Jimin’s hands: “It’s my new project. You know I like filming stuff, right? Well I asked the company if I can start making videos about our travels. See, GCF”, he points at the title under the video: G.C.F in Tokyo (정국&지민). “It stands for Golden Closet Film. I wanted to make the first one about you. But I also wanted to show the world my love for you.” Jimin asks hesitantly: “Aren’t you afraid that this will turn against us? Against BTS?” Jungkook replies: “I asked Suga hyung for advice, he’s far more diplomatic than me. He said that, as long as we don’t show up kissing in front of the camera, everything can be denied, because a lot of people will be in denial. But those that are supportive and want to see will see and understand.”

Jimin smiles, his tears starting to dry. He reaches over and tucks a loose strand of hair behind Jungkook’s ear. “It’s beautiful. Thank you so much”, Jimin leans forward and places his lips on Jungkook’s. The kiss is slow and full of love.

And just as promised two days ago, Jimin and Jungkook spent their evening watching the new drama Taehyung has been recommending them the past week. Not even after the first episode, the computer is put on the ground. A passionate making-out session ensues but unfortunately, it is abruptly put to an end by Namjoon barging in telling them he wants to sleep. With red cheeks they break apart, apologizing to their leader. They decide that it is also time for them to sleep. So, with Jungkook being the little spoon and Namjoon’s snoring in the background they fall asleep, the happy feeling lingering.

Chapter Text

All BTS members take a seat on one of the chairs in the meeting room. Today they will get briefed on what the plan is for their performance for the MMA’s, the first award show of the year, and the first one as the new BTS. Yesterday Jimin and Taehyung had stayed up late in the living room watching BTS’s performances from last year and fantasized over winning an award.

Lee Soo-Ah is in charge of the performance, making sure that everything goes well. She will also inform the members what will be excepted from them. But Soo-Ah is not here yet so they keep themselves busy speculating about what they will bring.

“I hope we will do one of our older songs”, J-hope says. Yoongi is quick to agree. J-hope smiles at him: “Ah hyung, I knew you would have my back”. He winks and Yoongi shrinks in his chair, trying to hide the blush forming on his cheeks. It’s rare to see Yoongi flustered but when it happens everyone takes the opportunity to laugh at it and tease him.

“To be honest I don’t think we will. We did that last year, knowing BigHit they’re not going to do something similar. Especially year after year”, Namjoon brings the conversation back to the first topic. Jimin agrees: “Your right. But I do hope to perform No More Dream. Getting carried by Jungkook is too much fun”. Sighs fill the room and everywhere eyes are being rolled, but Jimin only focuses on Jungkook who winks at him. “I’m sure we’re going to perform Black Swan”, Taehyung interjects.

“You are right, Taehyung-ssi."

A short petite woman stands in the doorway. She is wearing a black suit with red stripes at the side of the blazer and pants that hug her small body. Her hair is loosely draped over one shoulder and her pretty face is covered with just a tat too much make-up. Lee Soo-Ah radiates confidence and has an intimidating appearance, but her red lip-sticked lips form the most charismatic smile that puts you at ease immediately.

She walks over to the last remaining seat. She puts a black binder on the table and folds her hands on top of it. She looks each member in the eyes. “Hello everyone, good to see you all again. Healthy and happy, nonetheless. But there are two new faces I notice”. She looks back at Taehyung and Jimin. Nothing but friendliness in her eyes. Soo Ah introduces herself: “Nice to meet you. I’m Lee Soo-Ah. I’ve been here since the beginning of BigHit. I’m the person who manages most of your performances. Especially during award season. If you have any question or problem regarding your choreography, outfit, or something else, you come to me”. The last part is aimed at everyone. Jimin and Taehyung introduce themselves in turn.

“Okay, now that’s out of the way, let’s begin. Buckle up ‘cause we’re going all out”, Soo-Ah claps in her hand and opens the binder.

For three long hours, they are informed about the whole concept, the tracklist, some wardrobe ideas, etc.

The intro will be on Black Swan and will start in three sub-units and end with the whole group. The intro is inspired by the swan lake. What everyone’s role will be, Soo-Ah wanted to keep a surprise. The units are revealed to them. Jimin and Jungkook are first. After them, it’s Jin, Namjoon, and Yoongi. And as of last J-hope together with Taehyung. When they first heard it, Jungkook and Jimin were surprised. They thought that the company would try to keep them separate as much as possible in front of the cameras. But no, apparently not.

~ * ~

Jungkook and Jimin arrive at their assigned practice room. In the room, there are a couple of staff members with cameras and an unknown man. Said man makes his way to the duo when he spots them. He introduces himself as Kim Si-woo. “I will teach you your partner dance”, he points at Jungkook, “You’re Jungkook-ssi right?”. Jungkook nods. Si-Woo excitedly claps his hands: “Okay you will do the lifting. And you Jimin-ssi, you will fly in the air”.

Jimin and Jungkook look at each other in confusion. They both seem to think the same. Lifting? Flying in the air? “I bet you’re excited to know what roles you will play”, Si-Woo proceeds unfazed by their insecurity.

“Jungkook-ssi will be the prince and Jimin-ssi will play the role as the swan princess”.

Hearing this gets Jungkook excited, they will kind of play the lead roles even though every unit will get the same amount of screen time. Jimin on the other hand is the opposite of excited. you can even say that he is pissed. Why does he always get pushed into this feminine box? He knows he is very feminine and embraces it from time to time, but Jimin can also be very masculine and intimidating. You can ask Jungkook.

“Why am I the woman?"

It just slips from his mouth. Jimin didn’t mean to be so unprofessional but there is only so much he can take without speaking up. Si-Woo tilts his head slightly. “Jimin-ssi, please don’t think we see you as a woman. We all sat together and when we were deciding on these roles, the company said you two rehearse a lot together and that you two have the best chemistry to pull such a controversial dance. And looking between the both of you, I think we can all agree that it would be difficult for you to lift Jungkook-ssi”, he says trying to reassure Jimin. Jimin nods. “And it doesn't make you any less of a man, okay? We will not ask you to execute feminine dance moves, on the contrary. We just want to benefit from your experience in contemporary dance. You’re the only one in the group who can do this.” Jimin nods again. He still isn’t too happy about it, but he accepts it seeing how valid the points are.

Jungkook raises his hand, his eyebrows in a big frown. Si-Woo is slightly taken aback that a BTS member is asking permission to ask something, but nods to let him speak. Why do you mean by a controversial dance?”, he asks. The choreographer smiles: “Well, first and foremost, Swan Lake is a love story between a man and a woman. Plus, apart from the choreography, we want you to do is called a pas de deux, which is not very common to be performed by a couple of the same gender.”

Hearing the word ’couple’ makes them both go in full alert. Jungkook goes into full defense mode, crossing his arms before his chest. “Couple?”, he says trying to not sound as flustered as he feels. Until now the two BTS members were standing next to each other, shoulder against shoulder, something that has become second nature to them. But now Jimin feels that Jungkook creates some distance between them and the offense in his voice, feels like a stab in his heart. But he doesn’t blame Jungkook for panicking, he just feels a bit hurt.

“Couple, duo, unit. However, you want to call it", Si-Woo dismisses it. He is oblivious of the tension that formed and now disappears as quickly as it came. He continues: “OK, the story we want to tell is as follows: Jungkook-ssi, you are one of the white swans and you are resting in the lake but suddenly you are surrounded by black swans. You fight to stay put but the black swans succeed to push you back. Then the black swans will try to kidnap your partner, Jimin-ssi, but you are able to follow them and liberate your partner. The black swans flee and then the 2 white swans dance together in a pas de deux. Your other colleagues also have a part in the choreography, but they will rehearse their part separately from you. At the end of the intro is another choreography with all of you, but that will be rehearsed next week. This week we will focus on the first part of the choreography. Each afternoon we will meet in this practice”.

Si-Woo signals two men and a woman to come closer. He turns to Jungkook and continues: “This is Ahn Man-Seok. He will show you the first part where you fight the black swans.” Man-Seok moves towards Jungkook and bows.

Then he signals to the two remaining dancers to come closer. Si-Woo turns to Jimin: “This is Oh Ji-Hye and Yang Da-Mi. They will show you the part where you are kidnapped and your struggle to get free. These are all three professional ballet dancers. Showing you how it is done will make it easier for me to teach you.”

Then he addresses the two BTS members again: “Ji-Hye and Da-Mi will also help you master the pas de deux and the lifts. As I already explained, a pas de deux by two male dancers is unseen in the dance scene. It will be very challenging to master this choreography but your choreographer Songsungdeuk has a lot of faith in you.”

Si-Woo claps his hands together:” Now, enough blabbering, time for dancing. For the coming hour, Jungkook-ssi and Man-Seok move to that part of the dance floor, and Jimin-ssi you get the other half of the dance floor. I’ll move between the two groups to follow up on the progress and give additional instructions”.

Si-Woo didn’t lie: the choreography is challenging. Jungkook struggles a lot because he is used to hip-hop dance moves. Jimin on the other side feels like a fish in water and gets more enthusiastic by the minute. He picks up the moves very quickly.

After an hour they get a ten-minute break and Jungkook falls to the ground panting, arms and legs spread. After ten minutes Si-Woo claps his hands to get the attention of the dancers. He motions to two of the dancers while he says: “The pas de deux we have in mind consists of different techniques that you will need to master. Ji-Hye and Da-Mi will now demonstrate the complete pas de deux to give you an idea how it will look like. Then we will start working on the different parts.” He claps in his hands and shouts: “Music!” The two backup dancers get in the start positions and demonstrate – not without effort - how the pas de deux must be executed. Both Jimin and Jungkook stare at the dancers, mouth agape.

When the music finishes, Jungkook asks if they can see it again, and the coach agrees. The dancers take their places and execute the pas de deux again.

After a minute of silence, Si-Woo says: “We will cut the pas de deux into pies and train on each piece separately. In the first part, Jungkook-ssi you will have to spin your partner over the ground. I propose the following: Ji-Hye, you dance with Jungkook, and Da-Mi you dance with Jimin-ssi.” They all nod. “Jimin-ssi, as you master modern dance, and have the basics of ballet, we will start with you.” Ji-Hye and Jimin move to the middle of the dance floor, and they all listen carefully to the explanation of Si-Woo.

Of course, it does not work out from the first time and when Jimin lands rather hard on his butt, Jungkook shoots forward and shouts at the backup dancer: “Hey! Pay attention! Don’t hurt Jimin-hyung!” Jimin shushes him: “It’s OK. Don’t get mad. It’s my own fault.” Jungkook then apologizes to the dancer for lashing out. After a few trials, Jimin gets the hang of it while the coach corrects here and there, but also side-eyes Jungkook’s posture. The tongue-in-cheek thing doesn’t go unnoticed, and Si-Woo decides it is better to let Jimin and the backup dancer continue in peace while he takes Jungkook and Da-Mi to the other side of the practice room.

“OK, your part. I suppose you already studied how Ji-Hye was working with your partner?” Jungkook nods, taking a furtive look at the other side of the room and trying to plaster a small smile on his face.” Si-Woo gives some additional explanation on how to hold his dance partner, and to his own surprise he picks it up rather quickly. They continue to rehearse separately each on his own side of the practice room.

After the second break, Si-Woo calls out: “OK Jungkook-ssi, Jimin-ssi, now you will dance the routine together!”. It does not work out as well as thought and Jimin lands several times rather hard on the ground. Si-Woo asks the backup dancer to demonstrate it again with Jimin while Jungkook grits his teeth, brows furrowed in concentration. After he takes over again from the backup dancer, it goes better and better, still not as smooth as it should be, but the dance coach is not displeased with their progress. Towards the end of the practice, Songsungdeuk enters the practice room to see how his protégés are doing.

At the end of the practice, Si-Woo claps his hands and signals the dancers to come closer. The three-hour practice passes insanely quickly but leaves the two BTS members exhausted. Everybody is covered in sweat, but Jimin is so exhausted that he wraps his arms around Jungkook’s waist to hold him close and rests his head against Jungkook’s shoulder. When all dancers are standing around him, the coach turns to Jimin and Jungkook and wraps up: “You’ve been working very hard today. I know from your dance coach that you rehearse a lot after hours. Therefore, we filmed the different parts of the choreography, so if you want you can continue to rehearse the two solo parts but I ask you NOT to rehearse the pas de deux nor the lifts tonight: you still need to learn a lot about the techniques and, more importantly, it’s very dangerous to rehearse that on your own. But if I, were you, I would take a rest. I asked my assistant to prepare a mail with several links to different pas de deux on my website. I kindly advise you to look at the videos instead of rehearsing on your own.”

They all bow to each other and wish each other goodnight. Jimin and Jungkook drop to the floor backs resting against the wall of the practice room, emptying the rest of their water bottle. Jungkook turns his head to Jimin and grins when he sees that the elder has a big dreamy smile on his face. He lowers his voice: “Don’t tell me you don’t like it.” Jimin turns is head towards Jungkook and answers softly and happily: “I never thought I would ever dance the pas de deux. I’m so happy to be able to do that with you.” Jungkook moves his head towards Jimin and kisses him on his nose.

At that same moment, Taehyung enters the practice room and turns towards someone behind him: “The lover boys are sitting on their asses.” It’s Hoseok who’s following Taehyung and he asks: “Already done practicing?” Jungkook answers: “We have homework to do: no practice tonight but we have to look at videos about pas de deux.”

“What’s a pas de deux?”, Taehyung asks. Jimin grins:” A couple dance”. Hoseok and Taehyung start to squeal at that. They grab each other’s waist and waltz through the dancing room. When they arrive in front of Jimin and Jungkook, they let them fall down to rest their heads in the other two dancers’ laps. Taehyung looks up at Jimin and says softly: “You are all sweaty but you look happy.” Jimin looks down at Taehyung and cards his hand through his friends’ hair: “I’m Tae-Tae, you have no idea…” He turns his head back to his boyfriend and leans in to give him a soft peck on the lips.

When they are done laughing, they help each other back on their feet and grab their backpacks and return to the dorms. Jungkook wants to order some takeout but Jimin hesitates: “I have to pay attention to my diet because you don’t want to lift a whale.” Jungkook looks at him with a soft smile: “Let’s eat wisely then. I’ll fry a steak because that contains a lot of proteins. If we eat that with some salad, it should be OK.”

While Jungkook makes their dinner, Jimin goes for a shower. When he returns, his hair is still so wet that it drips on his white t-shirt, making smaller and larger see-through patches. Jungkook ogles at him and hums: “Mmm, sexy”. Jimin slaps him on the biceps and when he passes behind Jungkook’s back to get the dishes, he pinches him playfully in one of his butt cheeks. Jungkook turns to pinch back but Jimin jumps away: “No! No! Please! I have a lot of bruises on my butt!” Jungkook takes him in a back hug and whispers in his ear: “I’ll kiss them better.” And softly caresses the elders’ butt cheeks with one of his hands.

They eat their dinner at the kitchen counter while they run through the things they learned today. When they are ready, Jimin does the dishes while Jungkook takes a shower. Jimin is already sitting on Jungkook’s bed when the enter enters the room shirtless, only wearing his underwear. And of course, it has the desired effect: Jimin ogles him up and down without any restraint, eyes growing bigger and darker with the second. When he turns his back to Jimin to rumble in his drawer to get a fresh t-shirt and boxers, he chuckles to himself when he hears light feet patter in his direction and feels small hands on his pectorals and soft lips on his neck. He places his hands on top of the elders’ hands and says softly: “We have to study the videos on the website of the coach”, just to tease the other boy. Jimin hums against his shoulder: “If we get up an hour earlier tomorrow, we can look at the videos at the studio. Let’s consider this evening as an evening off, it can be our last one in a long time. Namjoon is working in his studio, it will be very late before he returns home.” Jungkook turns in Jimin’s embrace and places soft kisses on top of his nose and his lips, before deepening the kiss. The younger guides his lover to his bed to get the most out of their alone time.

~ * ~

The next morning, they get up an hour earlier to go to the studio and watch the videos. In the morning they practice the choreographies with the other members and coach Songsungdeuk, and in the afternoon they go to the practice room to meet coach Si-Woo.

In the first hour of practice, they go over the individual parts and the first part of the pas de deux. Jimin’s butt still hurts from the previous day, but he doesn’t dare to complain. He winces each time Jungkook spins him around on the ground.

During the second hour of practice, they focus on the second part of the pas de deux: the lift. Coach Si-Woo warns: “This is the most difficult part of the choreography and will take several days to master it. So don’t be disappointed if it doesn’t work out by the end of the day”. Coach Si-Woo asks Ji-Hye and Da-Mi to showcase the choreography again to refresh their memory of how the pas de deux needs to look like.

When Ji-Hye and Da-mi finish the choreography, the coach turns to Jimin and Jungkook and says: “OK, the routine contains 2 lifts. The first one is the most difficult one, so we will start with the second one where you simply lift your partner. Today, we are going to work on the basic techniques of a lift. You have to know where to place your hands. And Jungkook-ssi, it’s important that you breath in before you start lifting.”

It’s a bit stiff in the beginning and Jungkook is not able to lift Jimin high enough. After a few trials and errors, coach Si-Woo asks Ji-Hye to lift Jimin to show the younger that when you lift your partner the right way, it doesn’t break your back. But Jungkook is not happy with that: he hates it when someone else touches his partner and he can’t stand still while Ji-Hye lifts Jimin several times. In the meantime, coach Si-Woo takes the opportunity to correct Jimin’s posture to make it easier for his partner to lift him.

When coach Si-Woo signals that Jungkook can take over again, he cannot be quick enough to be at Jimin’s side again and he almost shoves Ji-Hye aside. He must resist the urge to slap the dancers’ hands from Jimin’s waist. Coach Si-Woo sees it all but does not comment on it.

After the second break coach Si-Woo explains the third part of the pas de deux: the rollover. Ji-Hye and Da-mi showcase it several times and it does not take long before they get the hang of it. Both Jungkook and Jimin are happy that there is a part of the choreography that goes easier, so they loosen up a bit.

Jungkook and Jimin stay behind to continue practicing on their own. Jimin pleads not to rehearse the first part as his butt still hurts. Jungkook chuckles but agrees to focus on the rollover and the second lift.

They have a lot of fun that evening. They practice until they have the feeling that the roll-over goes smoothly over in the second lift. When they go home, they chatter happily as they have a good feeling that everything will work out fine in the end, if they work hard.

~ * ~

The next day the coach focusses on the most complex lift. It’s very difficult and they work very hard to get the most out of the practice time with coach Si-Woo because they know that as of next week they will be largely on their own as the coach needs to train the background dancers on their part of the choreography.

But after three hours of frustration, sweat, and even a few tears from Jimin after Jungkook accidentally dropped him, they finally get the hang of it. That’s when they start to laugh more and fool around. Flirting shamelessly in front of everyone, who seems to ignore them. But the staff tells Jungkook and Jimin every time the cameras get on, so they can turn it down a little.

“One, two, three, and lift”, Si-Woo counts for the xth time. Jungkook who was not paying full attention gets surprised by the sudden counting. In a rush, he misplaces his hands. One holding Jimin’s waist, but instead of putting the other under his thigh, he put it on his crotch. He literally grabs Jimin’s crotch in front of everyone.

Jimin jolts out of his grip, still being mid-air and almost landing face first. It's difficult to say who is blushing the most: Jungkook or Jimin. Jimin scrambles up from the ground while Jungkook apologizes. Jimin burst out laughing making the younger stop babbling. Jungkook looks confused. “What? Why? Why are you laughing?”, he stutters. Jimin throws his arm around Jungkook’s neck. Smirking he says: “I know I'm irresistible, but please kook-ie, I thought we agreed to not do those things in public.” This makes Jungkook even more flustered.

Si-Woo coughs to catch everyone’s attention. He makes a gesture to put the cameras away and makes his way over to the duo still in each other's arms. He puts his hand on his waist and raises an eyebrow: “And you dared acting offended when I used the word ‘couple’?”. Jimin and Jungkook look at each other and then smile sheepishly at the choreographer. Jimin is always the one who can laugh away awkward situations, but Jungkook awkwardly stands there not knowing what to do or say. His hands hover hesitantly over Jimin’s waist while looking from him to the staff, who are just staring at them, not saying a single thing. Cameras are turned on again to continue filming their every move.

That evening they are going to work together on the spin and the complex lift as the spin must go over smoothly into the lift. The coach is not even gone yet, or Taehyung and Hobi enter the practice room to see how everything is going. Jungkook and Jimin are very eager to show off what they already learned. But when the first trial of lifting Jimin almost ends with Jimin toppling over, Hobi and Tae run towards the dancers to save Jimin from a bump on his head. It doesn’t take much for them to decide to assist the dancers during the lifting. They only go home when they have the feeling that the couple can continue on their own. Of course, before leaving, the two dumb asses have to try the lift also: Taehyung jumps in Hobi’s arms who tries to spin him around. They fall on top of each other, face first. It is so hilarious, that Jimin doubles over in laughter and falls on top of them. Jungkook falls on his knees next to the pile of members, laughing and panting.

After many hours of practicing the muscles in Jungkook’s arms start to tremble. Around midnight he’s not able to lift Jimin anymore. Instead of lifting, he wraps his arms around the elder’s waist and presses his chest against the elder's back, heavily breathing on Jimin’s shoulder. Jimin leans back and turns his face towards the younger to kiss his temple. He rubs his hands over Jungkook’s forearms and whispers: “It’s OK, we did well today. We can wrap it up for today”.

He turns in Jungkook’s arms to kiss his boyfriend properly but then he notices that his tank top became transparent due to the sweat. His eyes turn into dark orbs while he ogles the younger’s body. He traces his fingers softly and slowly over the curbs of the youngers’ abs up to his pectorals and caresses his thumbs over his nipples. He then looks the other in the eyes while running his fingers down again. Jungkook’s pupils widen, and he feels himself getting harder quickly when the elder brushes his hand over his crotch. He groans while he kisses his boyfriend. The kiss deepens and gets needier the more Jimin caresses and squeezes him over his pants.

When they break the kiss, Jimin smiles against his mouth: “So tired but yet so needy.”

“I’m not lifting you with my dick”, he retorts. They chuckle against each other’s lips before they start kissing again and grind their crotches against each other to create some friction. They make out like that for some time but when Jimin tries to unbutton Jungkook’s pants, the younger grabs his wrist and whispers: “Not here…. Let’s take a shower together, that will be less obvious.”

They gather their things and move over to the shower room. They are sweaty and sticky, but they undress each other while kissing. Once under the shower, they wash each other’s hair and lather each other. When all soap is rinsed away, they start making out again, hands roaming everywhere over each other’s body. Jimin almost works himself up to get closer to Jungkook, and he whispers: “Please, Jungkook-ah, take me…“ Jungkook stops kissing him, and lifts his lover’s chin to look him in the eyes: “But… I thought we said that we were going to wait with that until after the Melon Music Award show…”.

Jimin sighs against Jungkook’s shoulder and whispers while placing small kisses: “I know… I know… but… I want you so bad…” He lifts one of his legs as if he wants to climb up towards Jungkook’s hips but the younger sighs: “Jimin… I can’t hold you… my arms…”. “I’ll ride you…” Jimin whispers back. “No, Mini-jagi, we talked about this. Don’t get me wrong, I want it as much as you do, but I’m not going to do it. I want to give you a hand job, or blow you…. I would…..ugh…” And Jungkook gets crimson red while thinking about what he’s going to suggest, face hiding against the elders’ shoulder: “… how do they say this… eat you out…” he whispers with a dying voice, “but I’m not going to penetrate you.”

Jimin finally gives in and they try to let it last as long as possible. When they are out of the shower and drying themselves, Jimin throws himself against the younger’s back. He wraps his arms around his waist and whispers against his broad back: “I love you, I love you, I love you.”. Jungkook turns around and places a small peck on his lover’s temple: “I love you too, hyung”.

~ * ~

When they arrive in the practice room, they drop their bags in the corner of the practice room. After warming up they get rid of their hoodies. Jimin starts parading in front of the younger to get his attention. When he looks up at the elder, he first sees his smug smile and when he lowers his eyes to his t-shirt to take a look at the print, he gulps when he reads the inscription. He places his thumb and fist against his shoulder to read the print “Take me”. He quirks one eyebrow while looking Jimin straight in the eyes but doesn’t dare to comment on it.

Each afternoon it’s the same routine the whole week: Jungkook and Jimin work with coach Si-Woo to master the pas de deux. They continue working on the lifts for the rest of the week. It’s very difficult and they work very hard to get the most out of the practice time with coach Si-Woo because they know that as of next week they will be largely on their own as the coach needs to train the background dancers on their part of the choreography.

They work very hard, during practice but also after hours and they feel that it pays off. The coach looks satisfied. And it’s not only that they are getting better by the hour, it’s also clear to everybody in the room that there is a lot of intensity between the two dancers and their chemistry only adds to the beauty of the choreography. It’s not only sensible to the people in the room, but the two dancers also feel it in their hearts: they grew closer, not being able to spend an hour without the other without wondering what he’s doing and how he’s doing.

They also stopped hiding their relationship with the coach and the backup dancers. Hiding it was always difficult anyway, with Jimin always being very touchy and very clingy, and with Jungkook having his eyes always on Jimin whatever he’s doing wherever he is in the room.

When the third hour almost ends, Jimin drops to the floor, panting. “I don- I don’t think I can... I can’t anymore... Me- I'm too tired”, he manages to get out between heavy breaths. Jungkook drops next to him, looking incredibly worried, and grabs Jimin’s hand. Staff members rush over with towels, fans, and a bottle of water.

Jungkook moves over so he can put Jimin’s head in his lap and caress his hair. “Move, everyone. Give him some space to breath”, Si-Woo rushes over them swatting most of the staff with the cameras away. He crouches down: “Jimin do you hear me?”. A weak hum comes from the boy on the floor. “I think it’s enough for today, get some rest”, he looks up to Jungkook, “get him something to eat, some fast sugars, or a coke”. Jungkook nods. Si-Woo says: “You worked hard today. Have a good night’s rest, don’t overdo with extra practicing. I’ll see you tomorrow same hour.” He turns on his heels and leaves them alone, shoeing one of the cameramen away.

Jimin almost falls asleep from the continued stroking of his hair, but he opens his eyes after hearing Jungkook whispering his name. He looks up in those big doe eyes who are now filled with worry and concern. It breaks Jimin’s heart. He raises his hand and caresses Jungkook’s cheeks. The younger leans into the touch. “Let’s get you something to eat.”, he says. Jimin nods close his eyes again and then slowly gets up. They gather their stuff from the corner of the room and say their goodbyes to everyone. They leave the practice room hand in hand.

When they are in the streets, Jungkook feels that Jimin’s pace is slowing down. He stops and turns to Jimin: “Do you want to jump on my back? Do you want me to carry you home?” Jimin nods. He takes the two bags and jumps on the younger’s back. Jungkook walks home with the warm breath of his lover in his neck because he has nuzzled his nose in the crook of the younger's neck.

They don’t know how Jin knew it, but he prepared a nice soft tofu stew, alongside rice and kimchi, specially made to let them regain their strength. They are with four to sit down around the table: Jin, Taehyung, Jimin, and Jungkook. They really appreciate the effort, and it tastes oh so good. They don’t hesitate to shower the elder with compliments.

Taehyung chimes in: “I helped Jin preparing dinner” and he smiles his playful smile at Jin while caressing his thigh. Jin snorts: “If you mean entertaining me with your antics while I tried to concentrate on cooking, then yes, you helped a lot!” They all laugh at that and laugh even harder when they see Taehyung’s pout.

During dinner, Jungkook shows interest in how the dish is made. Jin explains: “This dish is made with tofu, vegetables, seafood, and chili paste, and with a raw egg thrown over the top. The kimchi is a leftover from the special Yoongi kimchi.”

They take their sweet time to munch the food away and have a good time with their eldest hyung. Jin is always fun to be around with and he loves his three dongsaengs very much. Jimin is sitting in front of Jungkook, and he already misses his touch. He stretches his leg under the table and reaches out to the younger’s legs to caress his calves and thighs with his foot. Jungkook throws him looks over the table, looks that are getting darker and hungrier by the minute.

When the last person around the table puts down his cutlery, Jungkook jumps up and asks: “Shower?” Taehyung jumps off his seat with a happy smile and shouts: “Yes, of course!”. The younger turns to him and groans: “Not you.”. Taehyung smiles his evil smile while Jimin gets up laughing a knowing smile because he gets what he wants, as always.

“OK, I’ll do the dishes then…”, Taehyung pouts to the retreating backs of his friends. Showering together has become a habit: they wash and kiss each other languidly until they come from each other’s hands to resolve the arousal that has been building up the whole day during practice. They both like dancing together, especially the rehearsals after “office” hours, but these are the moments they like the most. These are the only intimate moments they can afford, and they try to get the most out of it.

In the meantime, Yoongi comes home from a producing job outside BTS because he heard through the grapevine that Jin prepared an exquisite dinner to comfort the hard-working members. He’s coming home to eat and will go back to the studio afterward to join RM and Hobi to work on a new song for the rap line.

Jin informs him that Jimin and Jungkook are already home because Jimin had sort of fainted. Yoongi looks up worriedly while he asks: “Is he OK? Where are they now?” Jin smiles at him and replies: “Showering together, to save water, I guess.” Yoongi groans: “Too much information while I’m eating, thank you very much.”

When Jimin and Jungkook enter the living room again, Yoongi is already gone to the studio, and Taehyung and Jin are snuggled together under a blanket, looking at their favorite TV show. Jimin and Jungkook join them on the couch to pass a pleasant evening with the two other members.

Taehyung is snuggled on top of Jin, head against his broad chest. It’s his favorite place when Jimin is not home. Jimin lays down on top of Taehyung, the latter playing with his hair and caressing his scalp reminding him of the times before BTS.

It does not take long before Jimin passes the border to dreamland. When he’s far gone, Jungkook lifts him from the couch, wishes his hugs good night, and carries his boyfriend to his room bridal style. He lays Jimin down in his bed and crawls next to him. Normally he is the little spoon, but because Jimin is already fast asleep, he settles being the big spoon. He wraps his arms around Jimin and presses his chest against the elder's back. And to be honest, he likes it: he always felt protective over Jimin, although he’s the younger one. He nuzzles his nose in the soft hair of his precious and vulnerable lover, inhaling his scent. He kisses and sniffles the back of his head until he falls asleep, content with his current life. It has been different before Jimin came into his life. He’s still young but he knows for sure Jimin is his home, his swan, his partner for life. He still has a thousand songs to sing.

~ * ~

Today they are going to execute the complete choreography for the first time with all members and all background dancers.

Jimin and Jungkook get up very early to have some additional time to go through their routine a few times. Although they know the members and the dancers very well, they still are very nervous as they want to show the others what they are capable of.

The members start to trickle in one by one, nose on their phones. Jungkook wanders nervously around the practice room while waiting for the dance coaches. When he passes by Jimin, who is wearing an orange hoodie now to keep his muscles warm, the elder clings onto the younger’s back and presses his cheek against the muscular back. He smiles softly when he wraps one arm around the other’s waist and wiggles one small hand into the larger one of his boyfriend’s. They continue their walk like that until the coaches clap their hands to get the attention of all members.

They all get a last briefing and guidelines, and they briefly go through the whole choreography before the dancers come in an hour later.

Although the dancers and the BTS members are always very structured and concentrated, the first trials are rather chaotic. But after a few trials, everybody gets into the groove and the choreography becomes more fluent. Each run-through is filmed and commented on by coaches and members, in order to learn from their mistakes.

In the beginning, the pas de deux of Jimin and Jungkook goes less smoothly than expected and Jungkook gets frustrated. But Jimin can calm him down and after a few trials they get into the flow and the other members are in awe.

After Jungkook calmed down, Jimin is much happier and gets very touchy and clingy. He takes every opportunity to hang from the younger like a koala, whether he’s working out or playing around with the other members during breaks.

He also starts touching Jungkook in places where the younger prefers not to be touched in public, like for example his groin region. And it happens more than once. He has a difficult time constantly fighting down a hard-on when he’s touched like that. He steals glances towards the other members and towards the backup dancers, but nobody seems to pay attention to them, everybody seems to mind their own business.

During one of the breaks, while the two dance coaches are discussing the performances, the elder grabs him in a back hug again and he feels something hard pressing against his ass, he quickly turns around and holds him back by the arms while whispering dangerously: “Seriously, hyung? What do you think you are doing?”. Jimin doesn’t answer but looks him straight in the eyes, orbs dark as coal and filled with wanton. He takes the elder by the wrist and groans: “Bathroom”. When they pass Yoongi, the elder looks up from his phone and smirks: “I already admired your dose of self-control.” Jungkook turns crimson red and continues his way to the door, trailing Jimin behind him.

When the dance coach claps his hand to start rehearsing again, everybody takes their position. He looks around but can’t find Jimin and Jungkook. Yoongi addresses the coach with a straight face: “They had an emergency, they had to speak to their manager.” Taehyung and Hobi start laughing like fools and Taehyung squeals to Hobi: “Oh Hobi, can I speak to your manager, please” and Hobi shrieks back: “Only if I can speak to your manager too.” When Jungkook and Jimin enter the practice room again, the three idiots are still laughing their asses off.

Jungkook and Jimin take their places in the front while Jungkook apologizes to the dance coaches, eyes fixated on the ground. He feels so embarrassed while the elder seemingly has no shame at all, grinning and smirking at Taehyung.

Luckily the rest of the day passes without further incidents.

~ * ~

For the general rehearsal of the Melon Music Award Show, BigHit hires a gymnasium. Jimin and Jungkook arrive hand in hand, something they wouldn’t have done before. When they notice that Jin is filming himself while sitting on the stairs of the gymnasium, they let go of each other’s hands.

In the morning they go through the choreography of all numbers they want to perform on the award show. In the afternoon the stylists come in because they need to get accustomed to the different outfits and footwear.

It’s very late in the evening when they get back to the dorms. As they are all home together tonight, they decide the order take out. Suga offers to buy some soju at the night shop, but he’s immediately silenced by Namjoon who decides that the soju has to wait till after the award show.

Chapter Text

Award show season has finally arrived. Today will be their first one: the MMA’s where they will perform their special Black Swan performance.

“Boys wake up!”

A rough voice is heard throughout the whole dorm. Jungkook lifts his head with big difficulty. He squints his eyes still feeling dizzy from sleep. Someone knocks full force on their door. Jungkook snaps his head towards the door, internally cursing the person on the other side. He then looks at his roommate. Namjoon is looking with the same exhausted expression back. His dark hair standing in every direction. Namjoon throws his head in his cushion and groans.

Jungkook keeps looking at him, but the other doesn’t move anymore. If he is going to keep on sleeping then I will too, Jungkook thinks. As he closes his eyes the rough voice is back: “Come on boys! Time to get ready!” Several more knocks and their door opens. Heavy footsteps make their way into the bedroom. Jungkook furiously hopes that the person will first go to Namjoon. But alas, his blanket is ripped off him and the cold air hits his body. Jungkook rolls up to a ball for warmth but refuses to open his eyes. A big hand softly shakes his shoulder, the intensity increasing when he doesn’t react. Finally, he rolls around to look up at his manager’s smiling face. When manager Sejin sees Jungkook is awake he goes over to Namjoon to do the same. After that, he leaves the room telling them they have five minutes to be in the kitchen.

Jungkook groans again. Luckily he and Jimin decided yesterday to sleep in their own beds to have a good night rest. The manager knows about their relationship but Jungkook isn't sure he knows that they sleep together most nights. Jungkook stumbles his way towards the kitchen. He is still drunk from sleep. Arriving in the kitchen he sees Jimin, Yoongi, and Taehyung already at the table. Jimin and Yoongi are excitedly talking to each other. Neither of them looks tired. Taehyung on the other hand is laying with his head on the table sleeping, spoon still in hand.

Yoongi looks up and sees Jungkook. He looks the younger from top to bottom and snorts. “You look like shit”, he says mockingly. This makes Jimin look too. When he sees his boyfriend standing there he smiles. “Hey”, Jimin says. Jungkook suddenly becomes very shy with both men looking at him. “Hey”, he says back. They keep staring at each other until Yoongi coughs snapping them back to reality.

Jimin pats on the chair next to him, indicating for Jungkook to sit there. Which he does. Jungkook puts his head in the crook of Jimin’s neck, breathing in his scent. He smells like peaches, this has become Jungkook’s favorite smell.

Something hits the table. Jin curses. He seats himself next to Taehyung and facing Jungkook and Jimin. When Jungkook sees the elder he can’t help but laugh at him. Jin looks so bad, worse than Jungkook. But the younger immediately stops when he gets a dead glare from his hyung. Jin is obviously not in the mood for any of Jungkook antics. “Pass me the cornflakes please”, Yoongi does as told and hands Jin the box.

Namjoon looks around the table to all the sleepy faces and dryly comments: “Luckily we had no soju yesterday”. Yoongi groans at that.

“You should eat something too”, Jimin says to Jungkook. He then pushes his bowl in between them and offers his spoon. Jungkook looks at Jimin, at the spoon, and back at Jimin. He tries to figure out if the elder is serious or not. It’s not like they have never shared food or something. Besides Jungkook is not grossed out by Jimin. But still, he hesitates. “Just take the damn spoon. You literally shove your tongue in his mouth every chance you get”, there is Yoongi with his brutal honesty. Jimin looks with an open mouth at Yoongi, shocked about his statement. Jungkook inwardly agrees and his growling stomach is another factor for him to take the spoon. While Jungkook is eating from the cornflakes, Jimin takes the youngers’ hand in which he holds a half-eaten banana to take a bite of it. Every few mouthfuls of cornflakes they hand over the spoon.

A spoon is dropped. “Really? In front of my cornflakes? You guys are disgusting”, Jin grabs his fallen spoon and gets up roughly. The whole table shakes making Taehyung wake up. His head shoots up and he looks bewildered around. Jungkook can’t help but laugh. The thing is that his mouth is still full of cereal and milk. He spits everything out back into the bowl, almost choking while laughing. “Jungkook seriously?! I’m not going to eat that. That's a step too far”, Jimin scolds. Spoon still in hand he was about to take a bite, but now he just shoves the bowl away with a disgusted face.

After breakfast, manager Sejin scurries them all to the cars. He counts their heads and freezes in place when he realizes there are only six of them. Manager Sejin rushes inside. It only takes him 7 minutes to come back, carrying a half-asleep J-hope bridal style. He places him in the empty spot in the car, secures his seatbelt, and pushes a protein bar in his hand. J-hope closes his eyes again, leaning against Taehyung’s shoulder. The bar long forgotten in his hand. Manager Sejin takes his place next to the driver and they start their trip to the MMA’s.

~ * ~

It’s very noisy in the dressing room. Jimin tries to close his eyes to get as much sleep as possible, but he isn’t able to because of the constant sound of hairdryers and the stylist-noonas busying themselves with getting him ready. The other members seem to not have the same problem. Namjoon is sweetly dozing off, not bothered by the make-up artist tapping on his nose with a brush.

But if Jimin is honest to himself, it’s not really the noise that stops him from sleeping, it’s the nerves that are killing him. Their first award show starts in a few hours, meaning they will have to walk over the red carpet with all those cameras flashing. Jimin is afraid that he won’t look good or even stumble and fall, embarrassing himself. And they will also perform. This stresses Jimin out the most. Everything will be live, so they can’t mess up their choreography. Especially, his and Jungkook’s couple dance. But Jimin trusts Jungkook and knows he won’t drop him.

As he goes over the choreography in his head, he sees through the mirror a sleeping Jungkook being pushed around the room by two stylist-noonas. This puts a little smile on Jimin’s face and even calms his nerves a bit.

“You are all done Jimin-ssi", his stylist tells him. Jimin snaps out of his thoughts. He stands up and thanks the stylist. She points at a door: “You can change there. The suits have your names on them”. He bows again and makes his way to the appointed room.

Just as Jimin wants to open the room, someone opens it from the other side. J-hope smiles at him, not even looking a tiny bit nervous. J-hope looks immaculate, his hair is quiffed exposing his forehead and he is wearing a grey suit. The suit fits his body perfectly, and a black belt is bound around his waist. Jimin looks him up and down, he feels his heart racing at the sight. Jimin doesn’t have a crush on J-hope, but he can’t deny that the dance leader looks very handsome.

J-hope tilts his head slightly and raises an eyebrow. “You alright?”, he asks when Jimin doesn’t move. Embarrassed, Jimin moves aside to let him pass.

In the room Jimin sees several blue bags hanging on a clothing rack with sticky notes on them. J-hope's bag is already empty. Jimin looks around and finds his name. He opens the bag, and his eyes grow big. His outfit consists of a full black suit, a black and red heart-shaped pin. There are two black belts that will accentuate his small waist. Jimin pulls off his shirt. The room is rather chilly, and goosebumps start to appear on his arms. As quickly as possible he tries to open his dress shirt.

Suddenly the door opens. Surprised, Jimin releases a high-pitched scream, not even seeing who is in the room. The other person closes the door immediately. “It’s me, it’s me, stop screaming”, a familiar voice says. Hearing Jungkook’s sweet voice calms Jimin down. Jimin turns around and puts on the dress shirt, trying to conceal how embarrassed he is. “Can you please knock the next time”, Jimin says, still facing the wall. It's quiet, then two arms wrap around his waist. Jungkook nuzzles in his neck. His warm breath hitting his skin makes Jimin feel butterflies in his stomach. He turns around and places a quick kiss on the younger’s lips. “I’m sorry, please forgive me”, Jungkook says with an adorable pout. And who is Jimin to be mad at such a cutie? He raises his hand to ruffle through his hair but stops himself. The stylist-noonas would hunt him down if he would mess up Jungkook’s hair.

Not getting any reaction from Jimin, Jungkook decides to take the initiative. He starts with a kiss on the lips, then one on his collarbones, and placing several kisses while traveling up to his neck. Jungkook starts to nibble on a piece of soft skin. Jimin moans softly, which encourages Jungkook more. But before he can continue, Jungkook is softly pushed away. With confusion and a bit of shock, he looks at Jimin, whose cheeks are completely flushed. “Not the right time to give me a hickey you think”, he stutters, “besides now is not the time to mess up all the make-up". Jungkook drops his shoulders and whines very loudly like he is a 4-year-old, but he makes his way to the clothing rack.

In silence they dress themselves, occasionally throwing not-so-secret glances towards the other. When they’re both dressed, they can’t keep their eyes off each other, both thinking the other is a meal they can’t wait to devour. Jungkook is also wearing a black suit but in a different design. The same pin but smaller is pinned on his jacket. He looks gorgeous but the red highlights in his dark hair give it a younger and more playful vibe.

A knock. “Is anyone inside?”, Namjoon asks from the other side. “No, we’re ready”, Jimin answers. He opens the door and he and Jungkook pass Namjoon, giggling to each other. Namjoon looks at them suspiciously, shakes his head, and enters the room.

35 minutes later

All the idols are gathered in a big hall. Everyone has to wait until it’s their turn to walk on the red carpet. This is the perfect opportunity to meet idols from other companies or to catch up with friends. Jimin and Taehyung awkwardly stand next to each other ogling at all those big stars. Their shoulders are pressed together and they’re holding hands, trying not to drown in the sea of artists. It’s impossible to not feel intimidated.

The other members have already assured them that they don’t have to worry and that everyone is really kind. But that’s easy for them to say. They are already great artists to whom everyone looks up to, while Jimin and Taehyung are still kind of rookies, even though they’re in the same group.

They all walk in as a group but quickly split up to go greet their own friends, leaving Jimin and Taehyung all alone. Yoongi is the first to leave to the group to talk to Kihyun from Monsta x. Namjoon sees Zico and the other members run off to greet GOT7.

Jimin looks at all the idols swarming around them. His eyes scan the room, recognizing every single face. He also looks around to see if he can spot Jungkook, but he’s out of sight. He is slightly pouting when Taehyung starts slapping his arm rather hard. He looks over but Taehyung’s gaze is fixed on something farther in the room. Jimin grabs his wrist because he is still slapping Jimin. Taehyung turns around. “Jimin, omg you won’t believe who I just saw. I saw Hwasa”, Taehyung says excitedly. Jimin’s heart makes a little jump. He and Taehyung have been a fan of Mamamoo and especially Hwasa since ages. The way they go against the strict norm of the idol world inspires Jimin so much.

He looks in the same direction Taehyung was looking at before. Jimin even goes as far as stand on his tippy toes to look over the sea of people. To no avail. Obvious because Jimin might as well be the shortest person in the room. “Where? I don’t see her”, he says desperately. Taehyung points:” There!” Jimin is quick to snatch his arm down. “Don’t point! Don’t be so obvious”, Jimin hisses, his anxiety rising.

“What are you two scheming together?”

Jin is standing behind them, hands on his hips. He tilts his head waiting for an answer. Taehyung moves forward clinging to Jin’s arm. “Hyung we just saw Hwasa!”, Taehyung looks up, shaking Jin’s arm in excitement. The elder smiles at him adoringly. “Hey, I know Moonbyul. I can introduce you to her and then probably also to Hwasa”.

Jimin and Taehyung look at each other, mouths agape. Jin has a hunch about what is about to happen. He tries to stop them but it’s too late. The two friends grab each other's hands and start squealing loudly making a few idols turn their heads to see what’s the commotion. Jin hides his face in his hands out of embarrassment. It's a pretty funny sight. They look like two over-excited teenagers with their annoyed dad.

To get them to stop, Jin has to forcefully tear them apart. “Where did you see them?”, he asks Taehyung. Taehyung points and off they go, both being dragged by Jin through the crowd.

They arrive at the spot, but the girl group is nowhere to be seen. Jimin and Taehyung look around frantically, looking for them, but to no avail. Jin approaches another girl group. He taps on a girl’s shoulder. A small blonde wearing a beautiful short white dress. She smiles when she sees Jin. They talk for a little and then they depart. She turns back around and Jin returns shaking his head. “I’m sorry guys, they just got called out for the red carpet”, he says.

Disappointed, Jimin and Taehyung make their way back to their previous spot, their shoulders hanging low. Jin doesn’t follow. He is busy looking around. When he sees what he was looking for he runs after his two younger members. He grabs their shoulder to turn them around.

“Come, let me introduce you to some other people”.

Together they traverse the hall, Jin in front and Taehyung and Jimin following.

Those friends Jin wants to introduce them, appear to be none other than the members of GOT7. They see that their own members are already mingling with the other men. When they start approaching the group Jimin notices Taehyung falling behind. He turns around to see what Taehyung is up to. He spots his friend with big eyes, vigorously shaking his head.

Jimin walks towards him: “What’s wrong Tae?”. He grabs Taehyungs hands. They feel clammy. “I don’t think I can do this”, Taehyung’s voice trembles. He wriggles his hands out of Jimin’s grip and takes several steps backward. “Of course, you can. Why wouldn’t you be able to?”, Jimin steps forwards trying to reach for his friend again. Taehyung keeps shaking his head: “No! What if they don’t like me? What if they think I'm annoying or childish?”

This makes Jimin stop in his tracks. He sighs. He suddenly realizes what is bothering Taehyung. Jimin has seen them too, stupid comments and trolls saying how childish he is and that he is too immature to be in BTS. He pulls Taehyung into a tight hug. Taehyung’s body is completely stiff and his breathing is very irregular. Jimin caresses his back and whispers in his ear: “Don’t listen to them. You're one of the most amazing people walking this earth. Those guys will not hate you. And if they do, too bad for them.” After those words, Jimin feels Taehyung relax a bit. He whispers an ‘okay’ and hand in hand they make their way to the group.

When Namjoon spots them, he makes place for the two. They all stand in a circle and to Jimin’s surprise he is facing Jungkook and he throws him a bright smile. The breath of the two handsome men standing next to Jungkook hitch when they see Jimin's dazzling smile. They both do their best to catch Jimin's eye when they introduce themselves. The first one is Jaebeom. He greets Jimin politely and gives him a beautiful smile. The other person introduces himself - a bit unnecessary - as Jackson. The way he looks at Jimin, makes him blush a little bit.

Taehyung and Jimin look at each other, trying to suppress some giggles. Of course, they know Jackson Wang, but they will never admit from were. The others introduce themselves too and just like that the two groups start chatting like they are the best of friends, Taehyung and Jimin not feeling once like an outcast.

During the introductions, Jungkook had carefully watched the two men by his sides. He is still watching them during the conversations. He doesn’t like it. He doesn’t like it one bit how Jay B is looking at Jimin. And he doesn’t like how Jackson makes his boyfriend laugh. Jungkook’s body tenses up completely. The fond smile that he had on his face when he noticed his boyfriend is now gone, replaced with a thin line.

Jungkook just wants to move forward and wrap his arm around Jimin’s waist. He wants to make it clear that Jimin is his boyfriend, and the others should back off. But he can’t, he can’t claim Jimin. BigHit is very clear about their relationship: it has to stay a secret, even to their idol friends. If they were standing next to each other he could slip his arm around his shoulder or maybe even around his waist and brush it off as platonic skinship. But the only thing Jungkook can do watches his boyfriend laugh at the lame jokes and blush at the compliments of the two men competing for his attention. He balls his fists and unconsciously does that poking thing with his tongue in his mouth. He seriously considers placing a hickey on Jimin’s throat next time they are alone, to show everybody that Jimin is taken, but that would make the stylist noonas furious.

When it’s time for BTS to go on the red carpet, half of the hall is already empty. Their talks with the other group had made the time pass quickly. Except for Jungkook, who jumps forward after hearing their name being called. “Let's go!”, he says excitedly, maybe a bit too excited to sound natural. He grabs Jimin by the waist, bows to GOT7 in farewell, and turns both of them around towards the door.

The other BTS members following behind are shaking their heads at each other and J-Hope squeals at Jungkook’s antics. They all have noticed how tense Jungkook became, and they all saw him glare at every person talking to Jimin. But now they feel relieved. Nothing happened, Jungkook kept his composure and now that he has his arm around Jimin, his big smile appears again.

~ * ~

The show begins. All the idols are placed next to the podium on couches. Thousands of fans are seated on every side of the stadium, including behind the idols. The uproar from screams and chants is deafening. They are all waiting for the first signs of the hosts.

Jungkook turns around to greet some of the fans behind them. When he turns around and bows to the fans, the screaming increases making a few other idols lookup. He turns back around and makes himself comfortable. On the other hand, Jimin who is sitting next to him - Jungkook made sure of that - has his back straight. His whole body is stiff from the nerves and his eyes go back and forth. He clenches his fists around his pants, squeezing tightly. Jungkook notices his distress and moves closer to Jimin.

They are sitting shoulder against shoulder, bodies pressed together. But this doesn’t seem to calm Jimin, so Jungkook takes it a step further. He places his hand on Jimin’s small one, without looking at him. Out of the corner of his eyes, he sees Jimin exhale, his shoulders relaxing at the same time.

Jungkook turns his head to look at Jimin. The man next to him looks ethereal, like a prince out of a fairy-tale. He is in complete awe looking at his boyfriend. But Jungkook also sees how stressed Jimin still is. His jaws are clenched together, and his breathing is fast. It breaks Jungkook’s heart to see Jimin like this. He wants to hug him, kiss him, and whisper comforting words in his ear. The first two things are out of the question, but the last one he can do. There is nothing suspicious about two band members having a conversation with each other by whispering in each other’s ears because of the deafening noise around them.

“Don’t stress. Enjoy the show. I'm right next to you”, he whispers. Jimin looks him in the eyes. He smiles softly at Jungkook with adoration in his eyes. The smile in Jungkook’s eyes helps him to relax. The lights start to fade and completely turn off. Jimin takes the opportunity of the dark to put his head on Jungkook’s shoulder. They both wish they could stay like this the whole time.

The lights turn back on, and two people appear on stage. When the screaming of the fans behind them increases, Jimin lifts his head back up. He's afraid that the screams are for them. But other than that, they don’t change their position. Jungkook doesn’t even move an inch away from Jimin, his hand still resting on the elder.

It’s not long before they win their first award. Taehyung and Jimin jump in each other’s arms, adrenaline rushing through their veins. It’s their very first win as K-pop idols. Jimin looks at all the members with a big smile.

On their way to the stage, Namjoon offers Taehyung and Jimin to speak. Jimin quickly declined. He is not ready yet, maybe further in the award season if they get the chance to win again. Taehyung thinks for a second and when they start climbing the stairs, he informs that he wants to say something after Namjoon.

They gather around the microphone. Namjoon in the middle to speak, Taehyung with a big smile and even bigger eyes next to him. On the other side are Yoongi, Jin, and at the end Jungkook. Next to Taehyung stands J-hope and then at the side Jimin.

Jimin is so far away from Jungkook, it kind of hurts. All Jimin wants to do is throw his arms around the younger’s neck and hold him tight. He didn’t have the chance when they were at their seats because he was too busy celebrating with J-hope. And when they were on their way to the stage Jungkook was in front talking with Jin while Jimin was dangling behind with Namjoon and Taehyung.

But when their eyes meet on stage, all they can do is stare at each other, both with smiles plastered on their faces and glistening eyes.

Namjoon starts to speak, but neither of them hears what the leader is saying. Jimin is too busy giggling at how Jungkook’s nose is scrunching up, just like a bunny, and marveling at how handsome he is. And Jungkook is too busy falling in love all over again while admiring how Jimin’s eyes almost disappear because of his beautiful smile.

Jimin gets pulled to the middle, forcing him to break eye contact. Back to reality, the sound of the audience enters his ears and his heart stops for a second when he sees hundreds of lights in front of him. He looks around at the others, trying to understand what is happening. Taehyung is standing next to him at the microphone. Namjoon is now standing behind him, a tight grip on Jimin’s shoulders. Probably to prevent him from running away because he definitely feels like it.

Taehyung starts his little speech by thanking the company and the members. He even manages to make a joke. But when he starts to talk about Jimin, said one feels his breath quickening. “But of course, I wouldn’t be here without Jimin-ssi here. If I hadn’t accompanied him to the auditions and he didn’t, like, literally force me to audition too, I wouldn’t be here”. He grabs Jimin by the waist: “You’re the best soulmate”. The crowd erupts in screaming and the other members start laughing. J-hope even almost dropping down on his knees and clapping violently. Jimin isn’t sure what to say, he just stands there feeling his cheeks burn, but he manages to keep a smile on his face.

A crew member signals that their time is up and they need to go back to their places. Everyone starts moving from the stage. He feels a hand on the small of his back to guide him away from the stage. When he looks up to the man next to him, he looks right in those sparkling big doe eyes he loves so much. He nods almost invisibly to signal that he’s okay. Jungkook pats him on the back before withdrawing his hand and bumps him playfully with his shoulder. After that the whole mood between the two shifts. They are inseparable for the rest of the night.

While other artists are winning prizes and giving speeches and during performances, Jungkook and Jimin are in a world of their own. They whisper to each other, make jokes and just stare into each other’s eyes for a long time. At first, Namjoon tries to get them to stop and even tries to put some members between them after they get back from winning another award but to no avail. Jungkook frowns and shoos them away and Jimin just sneaks back next to Jungkook.

The only time they focus on the award show is when it’s time for Roy Kim to perform. The moment ‘only then’ starts, Jungkook tears his eyes away from the xth staring contest. He sits up straight, with a big smile he looks at the singer, his eyes big and sparkling more than before.

Jimin adjusts his position to look at the performance. ‘Only then’ is a beautiful love song, and the emotions the singer is able to bring over, bring Jimin to tears. Almost.

Next to him, Jimin hears a soft singing. He turns around and sees Jungkook swaying to the music and singing along. His eyes are closed. Jimin forgets the artist on stage and focuses now on Jungkook. His voice is very soft but Jimin can hear it. The chorus is nearing and Jungkook decides to open his eyes and looks right at Jimin.

If you start to like someone else
If I get used to not being with you
When that time comes, when it’s that time
Only then we can break up

Jimin feels like, no, Jimin knows Jungkook is singing it to him. Jimin is sure his heart will burst into a million pieces. Jungkook starts singing more passionately and slaps softly on Jimin’s thigh, still keeping eye contact. Jimin smiles at him, entranced.

Whether you want it or not, I’m going to hold onto you
When I get too tired that I can’t even walk
When that time comes, when it’s that time
Only then we can break up
Only then we can break up

The song ends and the audience erupts in big applause. Jimin doesn’t want to stand up, he just wants to sit here looking at Jungkook. He wants to touch him; it doesn’t matter in what way. He just wants Jungkook to know that he loves him very much and he will not leave him, ever. But out of respect for the artist Jimin stands up and claps. Jungkook follows too.

When the cheering starts to die down, Jungkook immediately grabs Jimin by the shoulders and pulls him down with him. They are sitting so close right now. Jungkook leans over, places his mouth at Jimin’s ear, and covers it with his hand. Jimin even leans a little closer, leaning with his forearm on the other’s thigh. But Jungkook isn’t planning on whispering anything. Instead, he places a soft kiss on the elder’s ear. He leans back to see the reaction and is satisfied when he is met with Jimin’s flustered face. He chuckles at how cute he looks right now.

Jungkook leans back in to actually whisper something now. But Jimin, thinking he will risk it again to kiss him, moves away. With a raised eyebrow he looks at Jungkook who is laughing and shaking his head. Jimin gives in and lends Jungkook his ear. “I love you”, Jungkook’s lips brush Jimin’s ear. It tickles and Jimin inhales sharply. He tries to control the butterflies in his stomach. He playfully slaps Jungkook’s chest when he sees the finger heart Jungkook is holding up between them. This boy is too bold right now. Jimin is sure that the audience behind them and the idol next to Jungkook are getting suspicious of their behavior. How they have been the whole night is not really how ‘just friends’ behave. Even Taehyung, sitting at his other side, is shifting nervously in his seat.

“It was beautiful”, Jimin says. “You are more beautiful”, Jungkook immediately replies. Jimin feels his cheeks reddening for the xth time this night. What has gotten into Jungkook? How come he is making Jimin such a blushing mess, while it has always been Jungkook who is the shy one.

Jungkook reaches over and brushes his chin, teasing Jimin for his flushed cheeks. Jimin crosses his arms and pouts: “You have to stop. You’re too cheesy for me”. Jungkook chuckles. The look in his eyes makes Jimin even shyer. “Why? Can't I be cheesy to my boyfriend?”, Jungkook teases. Jungkook can’t help himself, riling Jimin up is too much fun.

But Jimin isn’t going to give in this time. He leans back, arms still crossed, and raise an eyebrow. “I don’t know if I will be your boyfriend if you keep teasing me like that” for a second, Jungkook is quiet, looking intently into Jimin’s eyes. The latter smirks thinking he wins this round. Except, Jungkook decides to say: “I want you to be my husband”. Jimin gasps loudly, shocked at what Jungkook just said. He lunges forward and starts slapping his chest multiple times, harder than previous. Jungkook grabs his wrists, forcing him to stop. With a smug smile, he looks at Jimin.

They playfully wrestle a bit; Jimin trying to get loose and Jungkook just smiling at him, when there is a cough coming from behind Jimin. They both turn to look and are met with all the members plus a crew member looking at them. “Sorry”, Jimin apologizes wriggling his wrists out of Jungkook’s grip. Namjoon looks at them with a stern face. He looks annoyed and there is also a glint of disappointment. When he meets eyes with Jungkook, the younger drops his shoulders when he realizes, he is letting Namjoon down. “It’s time to get ready for the performance”, he says. Jimin and Jungkook both nod and get up with the other members.

Jimin is sure that after the performance they will not be allowed to sit next to each other anymore. They both know that they might have gone too far.

As they leave their seats, fans start to scream their names trying desperately to get their attention. Some idols look at them too and turn to their members to pass on the news that BTS will perform soon. The boy-idol that was sitting next to Jungkook is staring at them too, but for a whole different reason. His eyes are big and his mouth is wide open, shocked about everything he just overheard. He tries to deny everything in his head, but he clearly heard what Jimin and Jungkook were saying to each other. It’s hard for him to comprehend everything, and he is sure that he is the only one that heard it. At that moment he decides to keep it a secret, and he is determined to never reveal that secret.

~ * ~

Before the performance, nobody mentions their behavior. Once back in the dressing room backstage they put on their costumes for their black swan performance. They are all stressed, especially Jimin and Jungkook as the whole dance break stands or falls with their performance.

Jungkook’s stylist hands the couple rings they bought in Tokyo to Jungkook. Jungkook had wanted to wear the rings during the whole award show, but Namjoon had strongly advised against it. Jungkook had sulked for a good few minutes but then agreed with it.

He takes Jimin’s hand and gently slides the ring on Jimin’s ring finger while looking him in the eyes. Then he brings the elder’s hand to his lips and kisses the ring. Then he softly places a kiss on Jimin’s temple and whispers: “We are going to nail it”.

When the music for the dance break starts you could feel the audience gasp in anticipation. And when Jungkook comes into vision, on his knees at the edge of a solar eclipse, a few fans start screaming. The moment Jimin is kidnapped by the black swans and the audience sees that Jungkook is right behind him, the screaming becomes even louder. Once they start performing the pas de deux, the screaming gets overwhelming. Jungkook is able to lift Jimin smoothly in the air and Jimin manages to keep his balance when they spin around.

The performance went amazingly well, and the fans respond very enthusiastically. They get a well-deserved standing ovation from fans and idols. They stay a few minutes longer on the stage to receive lasting applause.

When they all take their leave and rush backstage after the performance, Jungkook feels euphoric. The adrenaline is still pumping through his veins. He needs to do something; he needs to hold someone. He finally spots that someone and Jungkook bolts towards the silver-haired boy leaning against the wall. In his haste to get to Jimin, he knocks over Yoongi, making him fall face-first in Namjoon’s broad chest. “Jungkook!”, Yoongi yells at him. But Jungkook doesn’t hear it, he is too focused on his goal: get to Jimin.

Jungkook finally stands in front of Jimin with the biggest smile. He is still out of breath from the performance. Jimin looks up. It’s obvious that he is tired, but he still manages to put on a smile when he sees how happy Jungkook is. Jimin’s hair is drenched in sweat, droplets trickling down from his forehead, over his face into his collar. But that doesn’t stop Jungkook from embracing Jimin so tightly that he isn’t almost able to breathe anymore.

“Are you going to hug me or what?” Jimin asks. Jungkook immediately wraps his arms around Jimin’s shoulders, pulls him as close as possible, and nuzzles his face into his neck. Okay, Jungkook has to admit that feeling their clammy skin pressed together isn’t the best feeling.

Two arms wrap around Jungkook’s waist. “We did it”, Jimin whispers, only for the younger to hear. Jungkook hums in agreement, face still buried in Jimin’s neck. Thereafter they keep quiet, just enjoying each other's touch as long as possible.

How long they stand there, they don’t know. But long enough to be ripped apart by a stern looking Namjoon. “We have to talk”, he says. The happiness he had from the successful performance is all gone and is replaced with a frown. “You two need to tone it down.”, Namjoon glares between the two of them. The two lovers drop their heads in guilt. Namjoon’s intensity increases the more he scolds them: “The company has already given me several warnings to keep you apart. At first, I thought that it might be a one-time happening because you’re both nervous, but it obviously wasn’t.” He scoffs, folding his arms in front of him and shaking his head. “Just now was too much. Taehyung told me everything he heard you saying”. Jimin looks betrayed and Jungkook frowns. Both open their mouth to say something, but Namjoon raises his hand. “Don’t get mad at him. I had to drag it out of him”.

Namjoon sighs deeply and massages his head. “Just imagine that all your doing is filmed, and fans afterwards try to analyse what you have been saying?” He looks extremely tense and Jimin feels guilty for putting so much burden on their leader’s shoulder. “Sorry hyung, we will pay attention from now on”, Jungkook says while rubbing his hands together. It's obvious he’s feeling guilty too. A crew member comes around the corner and gets their attention. She signals that they need to get back to their seats. Namjoon nods at her, then turns back to Jimin and Jungkook. He looks them both in the eyes for a few seconds. “No more funny business”, he says while raising a finger, “and I’m placing you apart from each other”.

Both Jimin and Jungkook nod and off they go, back to their seats. To their waiting members, the fans and the rest of the award show.

~ * ~

The award show is almost over and BTS has won two more awards. When all idols gather on stage for the finale, Jungkook stays right behind Jimin. They walk up to GOT7 who immediately starts to congratulate the BTS members with their win. Jungkook takes Jimin in a back hug, and Jimin doesn’t mind: he likes the comfortable warmth of this muscular chest of a very talented and handsome man against his back. He’s so proud of Jungkook. He’s so very proud to call this man his. He’s still glowing when he thinks about all the nice words Jungkook whispered to him during the show. J-Hope sees the frown on Namjoon’s face while looking at the two and decides to hang on Taehyung shoulders.

BTS returns to green room to get some rest. A staff member gathers them around for a thank you video for the fans and to take several group photos. Before they split up, they are encouraged to take some selcas and post them on twitter.

Jimin immediately does as he is asked. He looks around the room for the perfect places and decides to take the pictures in front of a white wall. It feels a bit awkward to take pictures in a room full of people, but nobody is paying him any mind. Staff are busy cleaning everything up and the members are doing their own thing.

Yoongi is in the dressing room, changing in something more comfortable. When he is done, he goes over to the couch and sits next to J-hope making dozens of pics of himself making cute faces. Unconsciously, J-hope makes several cute sound effects. Yoongi shakes his head, grabs his phone. He takes one pic of himself with a peace sign, taps a bit on his screen and then puts it back. He closes his eyes to get some sleep.

Jimin’s phone pings, it’s a notification from Yoongi’s post. A second later his phone pings again, indicating that J-hope too has posted. Jimin takes a picture too and then posts it. His tweet immediately gets thousands of likes and comments. Jimin smiles at the increasing hearts for a second and then makes his way to the buffet.

There is some fried chicken left from before the award show. He places a few pieces on a plastic plate and puts it in the microwave. While the food is heating up, Jimin grabs a hand full of grapes and half a banana. It’s not really the most delicious combination but he is starving, and he needs some energy if he wants to stay awake.

The microwave tings. Jimin takes his steaming plate out of it and goes to sit next to Jin at the table. Jin is already done eating and is now checking his phone. When Jimin sits down, he looks up. The bags under his eyes are very prominent without the make-up. But nonetheless, he still manages to be as handsome as always.

“How do you feel?”

Jimin had just taking a bite of the steaming chicken when Jin asks him this question. Jimin desperately tries to get the hot chicken out of his mouth. He has two choices: spit it out and be disgusting or swallow it and burn his throat. Jimin goes for the last one. With great difficulty he swallows the chicken. His face contorts in a painful grimace when he feels it burning his windpipe. The spice of the chicken –Jimin didn’t know the chicken was spicy until he stuffed it in his mouth - starts to kick in.

Jin starts laughing his ass off, seeing Jimin’s ridiculous face. When Jimin jumps up to search for any sort of relieve in the form of water, he laughs even harder making his shoulder shake. His well-known laugh attracts the attention of several staff, curious what the fuss is about.

“Water!”, Jimin chokes out while waving his hand in front of his mouth. A member of the staff rushes over with a bottle of water, a worried expression on his face. Jimin grabs the bottle and pours the contents in his mouth. He only stops when the bottle is empty. In his haste to extinguish the fire in his throat he spilled half of the water. His chin and the front of his shirt completely drenched.

Jimin looks around the room in some kind of daze, trying to process everything. He stands there, his shirt wet, lips red and swollen and tears rolling out the corner of his eyes. Jin really has the giggles now. “You should see yourself. You look ridiculous”, Jin’s voice is high pitched from the constant laughing.

Not amused and not seeing the humour in all of this, Jimin sits down. He crosses his arm and throws a dirty look at the eldest. His gaze drifts towards someone behind Jin.

Jungkook is standing in the doorway with open mouth. Great, Jimin thinks, he probably saw me making a complete fool of myself. He drops his head on the table and groans. Jimin feels the table shake and someone, probably Jin, pats him on the back and leaves. Quick after that, Jin’s place is occupied by another person.

“Jimin-ssi”

Jungkook’s teasing voice makes Jimin look up with a big pout. When Jungkook sees this, he laughs. Not like Jin’s mocking laugh, but a heartful chuckle full of adoration. “Don’t tell me you saw that.” Jungkook reaches over and grabs his chin, rubbing his swollen underlip with his thumb. “Yes I did. It was pretty funny”, Jungkook chuckles again. Jimin throws himself back in his chair, groaning loudly.

Jimin covers his face in embarrassment: “Leave me alone so I can wallow in self-pity". Jungkook makes several ‘tsk’-sounds. “I have been apart from you for too long. I don’t think I can handle more.” He reaches over and softly grabs the elder’s wrists and pulls them away so he can admire his face. Jimin rolls his eyes when he sees the ‘cute’ pouting face Jungkook is making. “You’re so cheesy, I swear”, but he can finally laugh again.

That’s something Jungkook is able to always do: make Jimin laugh. He only needs to look at the younger and a smile appears on his face. Even when he feels down, Jungkook manages to pull him back up while respecting Jimin’s need of personal space at times like that. Jimin is very grateful for that.

Seeing Jimin getting back to his happy self, Jungkook decides to broach the subject about what he wanted to say in the beginning. “On my way to the bathroom I saw an ice-cream machine. Shall we go get some?” Jungkook watches Jimin closely awaiting his reaction. Jimin’s brows furrow indicating he is thinking about it. As Jungkook suspected, Jimin says: “I don’t know, kook-ie. My diet...”

Jungkook sighs. I will hunt down the person who put him on a diet, he curses inwardly. Jungkook grabs Jimin’s arms to pull him closer. Their faces are now mere inches from each other. “You deserve an ice-cream tonight. Hell, you deserve an ice-cream every night if you want to. Come on, the performance went amazing, and we won so much. Let’s celebrate with ice-cream”, Jungkook looks deeply into Jimin’s eyes. He feels himself loosing himself in those beautiful eyes, like always.

But it’s obvious the elder still isn’t sure, so in order not to push Jimin Jungkook says:” You can just come with me and decide when we are there. Okay?”. Jimin nods. Jungkook jumps happily from his chair and extends his hand to the elder. Jimin grabs it and lets himself get pulled up. Hand in hand they leave the room, making their way to the ice-cream machine.

They round the corner and see a tall handsome man standing in front of the machine serving himself to a sweet treat. Automatically, Jimin and Jungkook let loose of each other and approach the male idol. From far away it is difficult to tell who this is, but as they get closer Jungkook recognizes him.

“Hey Taemin-sunbaenim”, Jungkook cheerfully greets. The guy turns around, curious to know who is calling him. Taemin is very handsome. His aura is very intimidating and Jimin has to gasp a little. But Taemin’s gaze immediately softens and a smile appears when he sees Jungkook. He bows politely: “Jungkook-ssi, how are you? Congratulations on the many wins”. “I’m good, thank you. We are all very proud.” Jungkook answers proudly.

Taemin spots Jimin who is standing next to Jungkook. He bows again, now towards Jimin his kind smile still in place but his eyes boring into Jimin’s. “Good to meet you… Jimin-ssi, right?” Jimin bows politely. “Yes, that’s me. Nice to meet you. It’s such an honour, I’ve always been a big fan of you”, Jungkook notices the strain in his voice and to comfort him he discretely places his hand on the elder’s lower back.

“The honour is all mine. That black swan performance-”, he makes a ‘mind blown’ motion with one hand, “was spectacular. Especially your uhm...” Taemin hesitates a bit, searching for the right word. “Couple dance”, he says uncertain.

Jungkook smiles widely: “Thank you sunbaenim, we worked really hard”. “That is very obvious. I was especially impressed with how elegant and precise you are, Jimin-ssi. You are a very good dancer. Did you have any training before joining BTS?”

Jimin is completely taken aback by the praise of an idol known for his amazing dancing skills. He wants to answer Taemin but no words come out. When Jimin looks over at Jungkook for help, he sees his boyfriend glowing with pride. This gives Jimin the confidence he was looking for. “Yes, I started dancing since I was a little boy. And I majored in modern dance just before joining BTS. Your kind words make me very proud, thank you. I will work harder in the future”, Jimin ends it with another bow.

Both Jungkook and Taemin start laughing, which makes Jimin blush. “That’s good to hear”, Taemin smiles and then continues while staring Jimin in the eyes: “I also watched your dance video of ‘Own it’ several times. Very… how I shall I put it… intense”. They both blush because they know damn well what could be seen by an attentive eye. Luckily, Taemin doesn’t see the blush on their faces as he suddenly turns around when his name is called from far away. He turns back to them: “Well, I need to go. It was good to see you Jungkook-ssi” He locks eyes with Jimin once again and continues: “And nice to meet you Jimin-ssi". He bows in goodbye, but before he takes his leave he adds with a wink: “Oh Jimin-ssi, we should definitly do a dance collab together? I already have the perfect song for that in mind”.

Jungkook scratches his neck while he watches the retreating back of Taemin. Was this man flirting with his Jimin? When he is gone, Jimin turns to Jungkook. He starts squealing and slapping the younger’s chest in excitement. “Oh my God, oh my God, oh my God! Did you hear that, Jungkook-ah.” Jungkook looks down on the elder, confusion still in his eyes. “Yes, I did”. When he sees the elder’s happiness, he puts his jealous thoughts aside, and confusion makes place for adoration. “Yes I did, aegi”, fondness dripping from his voice. Jimin freezes, hearing the pet-name. Jungkook tilts his head in confusion and his eyes widen when he realises the slip-up. “Oh, uhm... sorry, that just- that just slipped out, sorry”, he stutters while stepping back to create some distance.

Jimin, who doesn’t want anything of that, steps forward. He wraps his arms around Jungkook’s shoulders – a very risky thing to do – and says: “Don’t say sorry. In fact, I like it. Please call me that more often” Jungkook comes closer to Jimin’s face and wraps his arms around Jimin’s small waist. “Let’s get that ice-cream, aegi”, he says, making Jimin giggle.

Jungkook moves to the ice-cream machine. He did not forget why they are here in the first place. While he serves himself a good portion of chocolate ice-cream, two arms wrap around his waist. The warm embrace is welcomed, as Jungkook loves back-hugs. “Mmh, you know what. I think I do want some ice-cream. I deserve it”, Jimin says from behind his back. He doesn’t see how Jungkook starts smiling. He puts a generous amount off sprinkles on his ice-cream and then goes to help Jimin with his. Jimin’s portion is rather small and he refused to put any sprinkles on it, but Jungkook is already proud of his boyfriend for allowing himself a treat. The happy smile Jimin throws him and seeing his eyes light up after taking a bite, is for Jungkook the cherry on top.

Their names are being called from somewhere in the hallway. The two make their way back, enjoying their ice-cream and reminiscing on the conversation with Taemin. Jungkook mentions that Taemin won’t be strong enough to lift Jimin and then loudly protests when Jimin accuses him of being jealous. They arrive at the dressing room giggling and are then escorted to a car. Other members have already left in separate cars and they were desperately searching for them, informs a manager. Jimin apologises for the inconvenience they caused, but that is immediately dismissed by a smile of the manager.

They drive home from the exhausting but amazing evening. Jungkook looks out of the window feeling content with a sleeping Jimin leaning against him. He looks at their intertwined hands, then at his boyfriend and then back outside. “Thank You”, he mumbles to the sky and then closes his eyes too, the ghost of a smile on his lips.

Jungkook is not that happy anymore when he hears from Namjoon the day after that Taemin requested Jimin’s phone number from his manager.

Chapter Text

It’s two days before Christmas. You might think that it will be a period of rest for BTS. Well, think again. For the past week they have been rehearsing for a special show, leaving no time for relaxation. Except for today. The company is apparently not totally inhumane and decided to give them time to breath. Luckily, they are also able to celebrate Christmas day. Not with their parents at home though, with each other in the dorms because the next day they are expected to perform at a smaller (not really) event and give several interviews.
Jin decided, because they will spend most of the holiday period together, he wants to cook a delicious meal for the members. Taehyung tells the others during breakfast that yesterday late at night he had been searching for the best recipes. The managers had offered that if they make a list, they will get all the ingredients, but the eldest had profoundly refused and stood by it that he wants to buy it himself. They are going to spend this holiday together as a new family, without any trace of the company. They agreed dubiously and Bang PD warned them that he doesn’t want any funny business.
So now, they are all sitting at the breakfast table. Jin had gathered them all together to talk about their plan for today. Well gathered, is maybe not the wright phrasing. Jungkook is still sitting on his chair with wild hair and a shocked expression after being dragged out of his bed and over the floor to the kitchen by his oldest hyung.
“Okay, so tomorrow our day will be packed with rehearsals and, of course, the show itself, so we have to buy everything today. And by everything, I mean everything. Even presents if you haven’t already”, he looks directly at Jungkook. The younger throws his arms in the air, looking offended that it was directed at him. Jin continues: “Because I know you will say, ‘Oh, I’m just gonna buy it the 25th in the morning’. But I know all off you well enough that you will still be asleep at 2 p.m.”
All the members are looking up at Jin with groggy and sleepy eyes. They are just awake and so not ready yet for Jin’s antics. The elder is standing in front of them with his hands on his hips, waiting for any kind of reaction. When he doesn’t get one, he sighs: “Aissh, you are all so helpful.”
Jimin is the first to get out of his dizzy state and is finally fully wake. “Well, what do you propose, hyung?”, he asks. Jin’s face lights up. “Ah, Jimin-ah, at least one person that show some interest”, he claps his hands startling the other members. Jin sits down and starts rambling again: “I’m going to cook, so I already listed all the ingredients that I need. Yoongi, can you help me cooking? You can be my sous-chef.” He looks at Yoongi with a big smile and wiggles his eyebrows at the rapper, who releases a scowl and some disapproving sounds from Yoongi. J-hope, who is also gaining energy with every bite of his cornflakes giggles lightly. This ends in him receiving a slap from a now grumpy looking Yoongi.
“But we also have to buy Christmas decorations and the most important; a Christmas tree”, Jin continues not startled by the little commotion. Namjoon raises his hand: “I think I'm able to squeeze some time to buy the decoration in my schedule. Although my agenda is packed with meetings.”
All heads turn towards Namjoon. Namjoon buying fragile Christmas decorations? That is really not the best idea, but their leader seems to not catch on why they are all looking apprehensive. “Namjoon-ah very kind of you, but I can speak for all of us that this is not a good idea”, Jin explains feeling a little awkward to be the one to let Namjoon down. Taehyung looks up from is second portion of cornflakes and says: “Hyung, maybe you can buy the Christmas tree with one of the managers after your meetings.” Namjoon thinks about it for a second and then nods in agreement: “That’s indeed a better idea!”. With a big smile on his face, Taehyung continues eating, happy that their leader agrees with his idea.
Jin claps his hands for the third time to get everyone’s attention back. “Okay, me and Yoongi go to the supermarket-”, he stands up and starts pacing behind his chair out of excitement, “and Namjoon will get the tree. So, the deco-… Hey please pay attention to the conversation will you!”. Jin places his hands on his hips and all the other members snap their necks violently to see at what the eldest is looking at in anger.
Jungkook was in the middle of biting Jimin’s nose when he heard Jin yell, making him stop in his tracks. He retreats and apologises. “Why do you always have to do that lovey-dovey shit when we’re discussing important stuff?”, Jin sighs, shaking his head. The other members look with mixed emotions at them and then turn back around. Jimin and Jungkook look at each other sheepishly, giggle softly and then also bring their attention back to the conversation.
It was not really their intention to interrupt anything. But after Jimin asked his question, their attention just slipped. The holiday spirit made them giddier and more affectionate to each other, especially with the knowledge that it will be their first Christmas together. To the other members annoyance Jimin and Jungkook are inseparable, even more than before. Always touching each other, flirting, kissing. You know all that disgusting couple stuff.
Jimin only looked at Jungkook for one second. Seeing him with wild hair and small eyes from sleep struggling to eat his cornflakes, was enough for Jimin to put his full attention on the younger. Jimin giggles and felt the urge to poke Jungkook’s cheek, just to touch him, so he did. Jungkook, who had been barely paying attention to Jin, turns his head. He smiles when he sees his boyfriend looking all cute with his head in his hands and a beautiful smile on his lips. Without making any sound he mouths: “I’m tired”. “Me too”, Jimin mouths back.
Jungkook sees that Jimin has not eaten anything yet so he offers him a spoonful of soggy cornflakes. Jimin looks at it with mild disgust and shakes his head. But Jungkook will not take no for an answer. He leans forward, the milk dripping on his pyjamas. Meanwhile Jimin is leaning backwards away from the spoon, his lips tightly pressed but still smiling when he keeps shaking his head. Jungkook presses the spoon against Jimin’s closed mouth and starts tickling him. The elder is forced to open his mouth and Jungkook puts the spoon in his mouth. Jimin swallows and looks with a frown at his boyfriend. Jungkook on the other hand is trying his best not to burst out laughing. This results in him getting slapped. Not too hard of course, Jimin would never slap Jungkook with full force. It's just playful little slaps. And then Jungkook decides to take it a little further and playfully bite Jimin’s nose.
That’s when Jin saw them.
“Now, what was I talking about?”, scratches his head and throws a sneering look at Jimin and Jungkook. Yoongi, who had been staring into his empty bowl for a while, replies in a monotone voice: “You were deciding who will do what”. “Ah thank you Yoongi”, Jin goes to sit back on his chair and folds his hands. “Namjoon is going to get the tree.”, he points at Namjoon for emphasis. The leader nods. “And then; me, Yoongi, J-hope, Taehyung, Jimin and Jung-”, “Actually hyung, Jimin and I were planning to do something else”. Jungkook interrupts looking sheepishly. Jin looks Jungkook in the eyes. If looks could kill Jungkook would be dead right now. Jin narrows his eyes: “Do you really think you have a say in this after all of that?” “But hyung, we really wanted to do something else”, Jimin interjects trying to defend Jungkook and rescue the alone time they thought they would have. But alas, Jin shakes his head: “No protesting. Everyone except Namjoon will join buying groceries and the Christmas decorations.”
Jimin and Jungkook accept their fate and stay quiet. This pleases Jin, he gathers all the empty bowls and places them in the sink to clean them later. Everyone gets up to get ready except for Jungkook. With crossed and furrowed eyebrows, he is sulking on his chair. Yoongi passes him and pats him on the shoulder. “Heads up kid, I'm sure you will get time to do that something else you’re so eager to do”. To hide his blush, Jungkook jumps up and rushes to his room. Leaving a chuckling Yoongi alone in the kitchen.
~ * ~
One of their managers parks the van and the six of them jump out of the car. Bundled up in tick coats, with big scarfs around their necks and masks to cover their faces the members are unrecognisable. But still the manager insists on accompanying them.
Before they make their way into the shop, the manager goes over some ground rules. “We are going to stick together, no one is going on their own. Try to not use each other’s names and if you have to, don’t be too loud. Okay?”, he looks all of them in the eyes. They start walking towards the shop, but not a moment later Taehyung runs towards the entrance. “Taehyung-ah! Stay here!”, their manager yells loudly. But Taehyung is already inside.
All the other members giggle. They did not even start and both rules are already broken.
“Look hyung it’s snowing”, Jungkook points at the sky. Little snowflakes are falling down. Jimin’s eyes grow big: “Oh, so pretty! But it’s so cold.” Jungkook has to chuckle at the elder whining. He grabs Jimin’s hand and puts both their hands in his pocket. “I will keep you wa-”, somebody forces himself between the lovers, making them let go of each other’s hands. Their manager looks them both in the eyes and says in a low voice: “None of that in the store. You got it? You might be covered up well but it’s obvious, and Taehyung proved already that staying anonymous is not your strongest point.” Jimin and Jungkook ensure him that they will keep distance. The manager pats them on the back and retreats to the back.
Inside the store it is a lot warmer than outside. Taehyung is already waiting for them with two shopping carts. Both Jin and J-hope take one, and off they go. As they enter the first aisle, Jin looks at his list. “Okay so for the Pollock pancakes we’re going to need: frozen pollock fish, flour and eggs”, he reads out loud. “Hyung, we’re at the breakfast aisle”, Yoongi points out in a matter-of-fact voice. Jin looks at the man in the padded Jacket and drowning in an enormous black scarf. “Don’t you think I know that Yoongi-ah. I’m just reading the list”, the eldest sighs. Their manager flinches hearing Yoongi’s name being said too loud to his liking.
Jin closes his eyes for a second, breaths in and out and continues reading: “For the candied sweet potato we need: 1kg of sweet potato. That’s all, I guess. We have sugar and black sesame seeds at home. We also need a lot of meat for the galbi. And carrots, cucumbers and lettuce ‘cause we don’t have those anymore. Oh, for I forget, kimchi. And something sweet for dessert.”
J-hope leans against the cart. “Maybe it’s best that we split up the work. I’ll go with Taehyung to get the vegetables and maybe some soy sauce, ‘cause I used the last of it yesterday”, J-hope suggests. Everyone nods except for the manager. “Guys I thought we agreed to not split up”, he interjects. But nobody is listening to him.
“Oh, but I would like to go with Jin-hyung", Taehyung pouts. With the cutest face he looks at J-hope who after some long deliberation gives in. “Okay, then Hoseok and Yoongi will get the vegetables. Taehyung and I will get the meat and eggs”, Jin concludes. “And then the dessert will be for...”, all four turn their heads.
Jimin and Jungkook are standing a distance watching their members discuss everything. They look extremely innocent, but the devilish smile that’s playing on the maknae’s mouth gives them away. Jungkook grabs Jimin’s hand. “We’ll get the desserts!”, he says a bit too excited. Before anyone can interject, they run away to another aisle.
Yoongi scoffs and shakes his head and turns to their manager, panic written all over his face. “You might want to follow them”, he says. That’s enough for the manager to sprint after the two mischievous lovers.
“Poor manager-nim", J-hope has his hands fold on top of his heart. The sympathy is quickly gone when he waves Yoongi over. “Come hyung let’s get what we need”, and they too walk to a different aisle. When Jin turns around he is face to face with an oh so happy Taehyung. “I’m so excited hyung! This is going to be so much fun”, he squeals and clings himself to the eldest’s arm. Jin feels his heart skip a beat for a second but shakes it off. He chuckles: “Don’t get your hopes up, Taehyung-ah. Come let’s find the meat.” and they too leave the breakfast aisle.
~ * ~
Out of breath Jimin and Jungkook arrive in the cookies and sweets section. They know their manager is following them, so as quiet as possible they crouch down behind a big tower of ‘Orion choco pies’ on sale. Jimin’s heart is racing from the adrenaline. He can’t help but giggle, so Jungkook puts a finger against his lips. They smile widely at each other. Running away from their manager is much more fun than you would think.
“And what do you two think you’re doing?”
Jimin and Jungkook stop giggling, their laughs faltering. They turn around and are met with their manager angrily looking down on them. “I thought you were more mature than this. Especially you Jimin”, their manager crosses his arms. He taps his foot on the floor impatiently while the two men on the ground get up. Jimin bows, apologising for their behaviour.
“I should just lock you in the car”, the manager points his finger at them. Jungkook shrugs: “Oh don’t mind spending some alone time while you go grocery shopping”. He smirks and places an arm around his boyfriend’s waist to pull him closer. Jimin wriggles himself out of Jungkook’s grip and slaps him on the chest. He turns to their manager and apologises again. He and Jungkook look intensely at each other, both not wanting to be the first to let go. Their manager tries to assert his dominance to regain the control and Jungkook just tries to provoke him.
After what seems like a decade, the manager drops his arms and sighs: “Come one let’s find something for dessert.” He turns around and starts walking, expecting for the two to follow him.
Jimin starts walking behind their manager, but Jungkook has other plans. He grabs Jimin’s hand and places a finger on his lips to sign to the elder that he has to stay quiet. Jimin throws him a ‘what are you planning?’ look. Jungkook on the other hand just smirks. He makes sure that their manager isn’t looking and then pulls Jimin the other way.
They sneak out of the cookie aisle into the next one. The two men giggle at their mischievous plan while looking at the delicious cakes and pies displayed. Now that the adrenaline is subsiding, Jimin takes a hold of Jungkook’s arm and places his head against the taller one’s shoulder.
“They all look really delicious, but I would prefer a cake from halmeoni’s bakery”, they stroll around the aisle as a couple would stroll around in a shopping district. Jungkook makes a sound of agreement. He locks eyes with Jimin, a smirk playing on his lips: “We can ask to go there, or we can just ditch every one and go now.” Jimin slaps Jungkook’s broad chest again, his hand lingers a bit. “What is it with you today?”, he laughs.
Jungkook pulls Jimin closer, his expression more serious. “I’m just a bit annoyed that are plans were interrupted”, he says in a lower voice. Jimin’s heart skips a beat like it always does when Jungkook talks like that. The atmosphere around them starts changing into something more intimate. Which it shouldn’t because they still are in a supermarket where at any moment someone could recognise them.
But before anything can happen, someone grabs both their ears from behind and pulls them apart. They look right into the red face of their furious manager. Oh God, they fucked up. “Are you some horny teenagers or what? Running away from me not once but two times and now I catch you in each other’s arms. Pretty sure just in time. That's it, I'm splitting you up”, he says while breaking the couple apart by their ears. He starts walking, pulling them behind him without letting go in spite of Jimin and Jungkook’s protest.
“Jimin, you’re going with Jin and Taehyung and you Jungkook, will join Hoseok and Yoongi.” “But we still don’t have any dessert”, Jungkook sputters. “Fuck the dessert. I'm dropping you off first and get a plain vanilla cake myself”, he hisses. They keep walking like this throughout the store attracting more and more stares from other shoppers. Jimin wants to interject that nobody likes vanilla cake but decides not to as it will just anger their manager more.
A group of four starts walking up to them. When they get closer it is clear that these are their other members. They're laughing among themselves, carts filled with several products, when one red-faced manager arrives holding two grown men by their ears. “Ah, manager-nim you found them”, Jin laughs even when their manager is far from laughing with the situation. “Yes, they we’re getting quite comfortable between the pies and cakes”, their manager spits. It wouldn’t surprise Jungkook if he would start fuming smoke out of his nose. Jungkook feels his ear hurting really bad so he lightly taps on their manager’s arm, but he is not willing to let go yet.
As though he doesn’t notice the ridiculous happening in front of him, Yoongi asks: “Did you at least get a cake?” Jimin shakes his head, but stops immediately because of the stinging pain in his ears. He has to bite his lip to not make any sound. J-hope, who sees how both are struggling, feels a pang of sympathy. “Manager-nim, I think it’s okay to let them go now. They won’t run away anymore”, he speaks up. It's only then that their manager finally let’s go. He takes a step back and inhales deeply. Jimin and Jungkook scurry behind their members as far away from the man.
The manager collects himself and when he opens his eyes again, he says: “Everyone stay here. I’ll get a cake.”
After they paid for all the stuff, they go to a little shop to buy some Christmas decorations. This time Jimin and Jungkook are not allowed to go with the others. Their manager placed Jimin in the front of the car, Jungkook in the back and himself between them. The whole 30 minutes, Jungkook and Jimin listen to a speech about immature behaviour, professionalism and scandals if they got caught.
Finally, they’re on their way back to the dorm. The tension in the car is high and nobody dares to say anything. Jimin and Jungkook feel guilty for their behaviour and the others are somewhat upset that because of that their privileges to go out alone might get provoked.
They get dropped off with a warning that this will be reported and then the manager leaves. As they take off their shoes, Taehyung points out the floor is covered with needles from a tree. “Namjoon is probably already back with the tree”, Yoongi says what everyone is thinking. They enter the living room. To their horror they see the whole floor covered with the same needles. The tree were the needles fell from almost completely bare.
At the same moment Namjoon rushes in from the kitchen, a brush in his hands. “Oh, you guys are back”, he says a bit surprised. “Hyung, what happened?”, Jimin asks peeking from behind Jin’s broad shoulders. Namjoon stays quiet and starts brushing the floor. The other members keep standing in the doorway, looking over each other’s shoulders to get a better view. Jungkook and J-hope at the back try pushing the others into the room. “The tree bumped into a few things”, Namjoon says quietly. More to himself than to anyone else.
Jin laughs as he finally steps foot into the living room with the others following behind. They all try to avoid as much needles as possible. “Namjoon-ah, the tree is almost naked! I think it bumped into more than a few things”, Jin says and takes over the broom from their leader. Namjoon drops on the couch in defeat: “I might have overestimated my abilities. I thought I could carry the tree inside by my own, but apparently not.” The leader drops his shoulders. It’s so sad to see Namjoon this disappointed.
“Maybe I can go back and buy a new one”, Namjoon offers trying to sound optimistic. J-hope quickly dismisses his suggestion with a single hand wave: “Just go help the younger ones with the groceries. Yoongi-hyung, Jin-hyung and I will clean up this mess.” he then drops on his knees and gathers several needles with his hands. “After that, we need to talk about the behaviour of two of them”, Yoongi adds glancing at Jimin and Jungkook. Namjoon looks confused at his hyung and then follows his gaze to look at the two sheepishly looking men. Namjoon opens his mouth to ask Yoongi what he means, but is interrupted by Jungkook taking over the bag full of groceries from Taehyung. “Asking questions is for later hyung!”, he yells while walking to the kitchen as fast as possible. Jimin and Taehyung are right behind him.
That evening Jimin and Jungkook get their second sermon. This time from Namjoon. He tells them that tomorrow evening he will not allow them to be close to each other on the red carpet. The other members giggle together as Jimin and Jungkook keep protesting. It comes as far as Jungkook dropping on his knees, whining and begging Namjoon to forgive them.
“Go apologise to our manager who probably almost suffered from heart failure because of you”, with that the conversation was over.
~ * ~
The morning of the 24th December, when Jungkook opens the door of his room, he’s greeted by the delicious smell of pancakes. He feels instant happiness, the sermon of last evening completely forgotten. With excitement, Jungkook hops towards the kitchen. He finds Jin there, baking pancakes, already a big pile ready. He surprises the elder by wrapping his arms around his waist from behind. “Goodmorning, Jin hyung! Are you going to spoil us today?”
The elder answers: “I was awake very early this morning, and I couldn’t sleep anymore. So I decided to make pancakes because it’s almost Christmas, and tonight we have that Christmas show.” Jungkook grins: “You always have great ideas.” He looks around and asks: “Nobody else is up yet?” “Nope”, the elder replies. Jungkook tries to steal a pancake from the pile, but he gets a slap on his hands instead. Jungkook laughs wholeheartedly.
When he sees that Jin is almost ready he asks eagerly: “Can I also make a pancake?” Jin laughs at his antics because the younger is almost jumping up and down. “OK“, he says, “I’ll wake up the others in the meantime”.
When Jin returns to the kitchen, he sees one big pancake on top of the pile. “What’s this?”, he questions the younger, but Jungkook only smiles sheepishly. When the other members start trickle into the kitchen, they all look at the pile of pancakes, all very happy and thankful for the effort of their eldest. Some throw a questionable look at the big pancake on top of the pile, but they don’t have to wait long for an answer. As soon as Jimin appears in the kitchen, Jungkook shouts: “Hyung! Hyung! That’s your pancake!” J-Hope and Yoongi grumble in unison: “As expected”.
The pile of pancakes disappears rather quickly in the stomachs of the members. When Jimin and Taehyung go to the kitchen to fetch something to drink, they see that there is still a bit of dough over. Taehyung starts heating butter to make extra pancakes. When his second pancake is almost ready, he takes the frying pan from the stove and shouts: “Jimin-ie! Look! I’m going to flip the pancake!”. Jungkook, who had been watching the close friends – especially Jimin -, jumps from his chair and runs to the kitchen while shouting: “Don’t fling at Jimin!” Some of the members start mocking overprotective Kookie.
When all pancakes are finished, J-Hope rubs over his tummy and says: “Wow! That was very tasty! Thanks, Jin.”
“Hob-ah, eat this piece of butter”.
All heads turn to Yoongi, who is holding a fork with some butter on it, in confusion. “So suddenly?”, J-hope exclaims, surprised by the random suggestion. He looks at the others trying to see if they know what’s going on. Jin shrugs his shoulders and finishes the last pieces of his pancake. Jimin and Jungkook already lost interest and are in their own world again. Only Namjoon and Taehyung are also still in shock.
Yoongi doesn’t seem bothered by it at all. He waves the piece of butter in front of J-hope's face as if he is trying to seduce him to eat it. “Hyung is something wrong?”, J-hope questions. He leans backwards to avoid the fork. Yoongi does not give up: “No, I just want you to eat the butter”.
J-hope grabs the elder’s wrist to stop him from maybe poking out his eye. “But why?”, he persists. Yoongi leans closer and nonchalantly says: “Just, because”
“Did someone spike his coffee?”, Namjoon mutters. J-hope turns around and is met by five pairs of eyes watching everything enfold before them. Jin scoffs at Namjoon’s comment, but tries to not look to amused with what’s happening. The maknae-line on the other hand is fully enjoying it, not trying to hide it. ‘Help!’, J-hope mouths, making them snicker even louder.
“Maybe you should make a bet”, Namjoon suggests and takes a sip of his coffee. J-hope shoots their leader an angry look. “Don’t encourage him”, he sneers. Yoongi, on the other hand, his eyes grow big and they start to sparkle with delight. “Okay, okay, okay”, he re-sits in excitement, “What about-”. He is interrupted by J-hope raising the hand not holding Yoongi’s wrist. “I’m going to eat the butter, so I will determine the stakes”, he lets go of Yoongi’s arms.
He thinks for a while. If he is going to eat this piece of butter, he needs to find something that Yoongi really despises. J-hope's eyes light up. He smirks: “If I eat the butter, you are going to perform ‘Otsukare’ with me at our next Japanese muster.”
All the members start laughing while the smile on Yoongi’s face disappears. He pulls his arm back: “Mmh, I don’t know. You know what forge-” Before he can blow of the bet, J-hope grabs the fork and puts the piece of butter in his mouth. Without chewing he swallows it. Several sounds of disgust and gagging are given around the table. With head held high, J-hope stands up. “Start practising hyung”, he smirks and walks away. Six pairs of eyes follow him.
Namjoon gets up from the table, claps his hands and shouts: “Time to get dressed. Everybody is expected back in the living room within 20 minutes.”
~ * ~
That day they have dress rehearsal for the Christmas show at the event location. BTS will sing a number of Christmas songs, they already rehearsed on beforehand.
The director of the show explains that they will have a little roleplay with a little girl while singing their medley. The story is about a poor little girl that spends Christmas eve alone in her room. When she finally falls asleep, she dreams about Christmas eve. Jungkook will come down from the sky in a sleigh while singing ‘Oh Christmas night’. The girl will wake up to him and he will guide her to the different parts of the scene where different songs will be performed by BTS in different setups.
They all follow the director who stops at every setup on the large stage. The little girl and Jungkook hit it off from the first moment. She is not shy at all and easily takes his hand when they walk through the different setups.
The first dry run takes the most time as every scene needs to be rehearsed carefully. At the last dry run the maknae line wants to ride the sleigh together with Jungkook. The maknae line has a lot of fun with the girl.
~ * ~
The Christmas show ends with the Christmas medley of BTS. Jungkook wears a black and white checkered vest.
Jungkook descends in the sleigh. When the audience sees him, they start clapping and when he starts singing ‘Oh Christmas night!’, the fans go crazy. He meets the little girl and takes her by the hand. The little girl plays her role very well.
When they get to the stage, he asks her to place her hands before her eyes so that she does not see the other BTS members.
Dancers reveal Taehyung sitting behind a shop counter singing ‘Jingle Bell Rock’. Taehyung dances with the little girl while singing. Yoongi tunes in later but he is not that keen on little children, so he lets Taehyung do most of the interaction. When Taehyung and Yoongi are finished, Jungkook returns to the little girl and gives her a lolly pop and guides her away, Yoongi and Taehyung waving at her.
They arrive at a part of the stage full of packages. A big package opens and reveals Namjoon and Jimin. Jimin wears almost the same black and white checkered vest as Jungkook, except that Jimin’s vest is fitted, showing off his magnificent body line. Jungkook leaves the girl with them. They sing ‘Santa Clause is coming to town’. Also, Jimin and Namjoon dance with her. Jungkook joins the song and the dance towards the end. When the song ends, she walks in the middle, one hand in Jimin’s and one hand in Namjoon’s. Jimin makes the girl turn towards him and goes on his knees for her. He hands her one of the packages. Jungkook takes over the package from her and she easily glides her small hand in his. Both their eyes shine from happiness. He guides her away while waving at Jimin. Jimin knows he should look at the girl, but his eyes are glued on Jungkook’s. And during a few seconds the world stops turning for them while they stare into each other’s sparkling eyes, smile never leaving their face. When the lights go out around Jimin and Namjoon, Jungkook finally turns around to walk to another part of the stage while still holding the hand of the little girl. Jimin sights softly in the dark while watching them walk away.
This part of the stage reveals a shop for party outfits. There they meet Jin and J-Hope singing ‘Feliz Navidad’. Halfway the song she gets a new dress and Jungkook joins the song again. At the end of the song, Jungkook takes her by the hand again and runs towards the middle of the stage.
She returns to her old room and wakes up from the beautiful dream she had. Jungkook left here a present in her Christmas sock: it’s a bell. When she rings the bell, the Christmas tree in the middle of the stage lights up and when she leaves her room, she walks up to BTS standing next to the Christmas tree. They all sing ‘Silent Night Holy Night’ together. Although all members signal that she can come stand next to them, she walks up right to Jungkook and takes his hand. She looks up to him with a big happy smile and he returns her smile as happy as she is. When he looks up he meets Jimin’s dazzling smile, and all he wants is to go over to him and hug him, but they are on stage, so he stays on his place and waves to the audience while keeping his eyes on Jimin.
When they walk of the stage, he takes a few quick steps to walk close to Jimin and he brushes his hand against Jimin’s. Jimin looks up, smiles at him, and automatically places his hand on the younger’s back: “You did well, Jungkook! You were so adorable.”
~ * ~
There is a small party backstage after the Christmas show. They mingle with the other idols and have a lot of pleasant conversations. Jungkook sticks by Jimin’s side, which makes Jimin feeling comfortable and secure. But it doesn’t take long for the little girl to find her way to Jungkook, who’s standing in a group formed by a few BTS members and GOT7 members. Jungkook has his arm casually slung around Jimin’s shoulder. She takes him by the hand to drag him to a quieter part of the backstage where they can sit and play a few games. Jungkook does not want to leave Jimin alone, and while the girl pulls at his hand, he slides his hand from Jimin’s shoulder, over his arm, down over the small of his back and further down over his ass. When Jungkook’s hand softly brushes over Jimin’s pinkie, the other looks at him with a dazzling smile and understands the hint.
Jimin follows them and they play a few games together. After a few games Jungkook says to her that he would like to go back to the group, but she whines and convinces Jungkook to stay with her and play another game. Jimin offers to fetch some drinks. When Jimin turns away to fetch the drinks, he follows the elder with longing eyes before returning his attention to the little girl, big smile on his face. But Jimin doesn’t come back. When the girl leaves, Jungkook looks around but can’t find his boyfriend. He wanders past a lot of idols and whenever he encounters one of the BTS members, he asks if he has seen Jimin.
When he encounters Taehyung, he shouts almost in despair: “Taehyung-hyung! Have you seen Jimin?” Taehyung looks at him stunned: “Noooo, I thought he was with you. Otherwise, I would have looked out for him.”
Jungkook is very worried now: “No, he left me to fetch something to drink but he never came back. He was rather absent when we came backstage after the show, and now I can’t find him. I’m so worried.”
He looks around the idols that are standing together: all BTS members are there, surrounded by GOT7 members, except for one, Jaebeom. His jealous side lights up and he dashes away direction bar. He runs into Jaebeom and almost shouts at him: “Have you seen Jimin-hyung.” Jaebeom looks aghast because he never saw an angry Jungkook, and he replies hesitating: “Euh, yes, I met him at the bar some time ago. He was knocking back a drink and he was going to down a second one when we started talking. But then he went to the restroom. I waited for him at the bar but he never came back. It’s a pity because he’s a really nice guy.” And he winks at Jungkook before leaving in the direction of the other GOT7 members.
Jungkook groans when he looks at the retreating back of Jaebeom, and he mumbles to himself: “Stay away from him or I will not be so nice.”
Jungkook turns around and almost runs into the direction of the restrooms. When he closes the door behind him, he softly calls: “Jimin-hyung?”. But there is no response. He walks by the stalls and looks into the open ones while calling Jimin’s name. He knocks on a closed one and he swears he can hear sniffling inside. He takes a few steps back and he is sure he recognizes Jimin’s shoes. He leans his forehead against the door and whispers: “Mini-jagi, please come out of there and talk to me… Is something wrong?” He almost starts crying himself. He knocks softly and the lock turns with a click.
Jimin opens the door and Jungkook stumbles inside. He immediately sees that the elder has been crying. He closes the door behind him and takes Jimin in his arms. He caresses the back of Jimin’s head and tries to comfort him. He dries Jimin’s tears with his sleeve and places small kisses on his temple.
Jungkook whispers: “What have I done wrong to make you so upset?” His eyes travel down to the elder’s quivering lips and places soft kisses on his lips. Jimin kisses back with a fervour that borders to desperation. When they break the kiss, Jungkook whispers again: “Mini-jagi, please, tell me what’s wrong. I can feel something is wrong.” Jimin sighs: “You’ve done nothing wrong, Kookie, I just have a bad day.” He doesn’t look into Jungkook’s eyes instead he focuses on playing with the buttons of said one’s jacket. Jungkook caresses his arms up and down. He lifts Jimin’s chin up to force him to look at him and asks: “Do you want me to take you home? We can take a taxi, you know.” Jimin looks at the younger, tears still spilling out of his eyes: “But I don’t want to ruin your evening.” Jungkook chuckles softly: “Do you really think I can enjoy myself when I know you are hurting? I can be selfish sometimes, but not when it comes to you.”
Jungkook looks down at his boyfriend and after a few seconds hesitating, he comes to a decision. He gets his phone from his pocket and calls Taehyung: “Hyung, I found him. We are in the restrooms, but I’m going to take him home.” He listens to what Taehyung responds, moving his phone a bit away from his ear as the elder is practically screaming and answers while looking at Jimin: “No, he’s ok, but he’s tired and not feeling well”. He listens again to Taehyung:” No, no, you don’t have to leave with us. Just enjoy yourself. Just tell Namjoon that we are leaving. We will take a taxi.” He wishes Taehyung good night and then calls a taxi.
They walk through a small hallway to avoid the party, Jungkook’s arm protectively around Jimin’s shoulders. During the taxi ride Jungkook tries to figure out what’s bothering Jimin but the elder always shakes his head and refuses to talk. He looks outside the window with a glazed look.
When they enter the dorm, they brush their teeth and dress for the night. Jungkook asks softly: “Your bed or my bed”, afraid that the elder will refuse to sleep together. But to his surprise, Jimin nods towards Jungkook’s bedroom. When they are under the covers, Jungkook takes the elder in his arms and wants to wish him goodnight. But Jimin smothers him in kisses. He’s reluctant in the beginning because he does not understand what’s going on, but he kisses back. Jimin pulls at the younger’s t-shirt and boxers to get them off, and while Jungkook takes his clothes off, he notices that Jimin also quickly undresses. They start kissing again and when Jungkook wants to take his sweet time to pleasure the elder, now that they have the dorm for themselves, Jimin does not want to take his time. While wrapping his legs around the younger’s waist to hold him as close as possible, he whines against Jungkook’s ear: “Please, Kookie, take me. You promised.” Jungkook stops kissing him to look at him: “No, Jimin, not like that. If I do that without prepping properly, I will hurt you. I’m not going to do that!”.
“Fine!” the elder shouts, jumps out of the bed and gathers his clothes, “It’s your loss.” And he storms out of the room, right into his own room. Jungkook also jumps out of his bed, hastily putting on his boxers and follows him to his room, but he gets the door smashed in his face. He knocks on the door and wants to open it, but the door is held close because Jimin is leaning against it at the other side.
Jungkook almost yells in despair against the door: “Please, Jimin, open the door and let’s talk.”. But there is no answer. Jungkook tries again: “You always tell me to use my words, to explain how I’m feeling. Why can’t you do the same towards me?”. No answer. He knocks on the door but there is no reaction at the other side of the door. He places his forehead against the door and whines: “Jimin, please, what have I done wrong…. What have I done wrong?”. His voice is shaking and tears are threatening to fall. But still no answer is coming from the other side. He tries to open the door one last time, but it’s not opening.
He returns to his own room with his head hanging into his shoulders. He crawls into his bed and starts crying while softly whining: “Why?...”
When Jimin is sure Jungkook returned to his own bed, he softly opens the door. He halts at the door of Jungkook’s room and hears him crying, he wants to hold the younger so badly, but he can’t bring himself to enter the room. He stays there for a while, with his hand on the door handle and his forehead against the door, but he does not enter. Only when the crying changes into soft sobs, he moves away from the door and drags himself to Taehyung’s bed.
The other BTS members come home in a very good mood a few hours later. They all wash up and brush their teeth before going to bed. When Taehyung wants to crawl into his bed, he finds Jimin there. He touches his shoulder and the elder shifts releasing a sob from his throat. “Jimin?” Taehyung asks worriedly while sitting down on his bed. Jimin throws himself onto his best friend and starts crying again. Taehyung pats his back while asking: “What’s the matter? Have you two been fighting?”
When Jin enters the room, he finds Jimin crying against Taehyung and he whispers while patting Taehyung’s shoulder: “Take your time, I’m going to sleep in your bed tonight. I don’t want to invade your privacy while getting into my bed, and I’m honestly too tired to wait in the living room.”
Taehyung rubs Jimin’s back and patiently waits for Jimin to come around, and finally Jimin starts talking: “He looked so happy with that kid, Tae.” Taehyung’s heart sinks listening to his soulmate. Jimin sounds so broken.
“But he only has eyes for you, Jimin. Everybody notices the chemistry between the two of you”, he reassures Jimin. Taehyung doesn’t really understand why this made Jimin so upset. Everything went great. Jungkook did an amazing job with the girl. And there was nothing negative to find on SNS.
Jimin shakes his head. That’s not what he means. He is not jealous of the little girl. Why would he? Jimin stays quiet for a second. Searching for the right words to confess his worries. Jimin finds it difficult to talk about his feelings and what’s bothering him. He prefers to stay in control of his emotions and display a positive version of himself to everyone else. But Jimin knows he is safe with Taehyung.
“Sometimes I have the feeling that I hold him back. Before I came into his life, he worked almost 24/7, and now he has a nagging boyfriend that prevents him from working.”
It’s out. Jimin said it. Taehyung’s hand that had been stroking Jimin’s head the whole-time tenses.
“Oh, Jimin-ah that’s not true. OK, you two spend a lot of time together. But most of that time is dancing and singing together. You spend quality time with him, but it’s still working. You can count the evenings that you spend before the television on your one hand.”
Taehyung’s voice is full of compassion. Of course, Jimin would blame himself for something small like that. He resumes the head stroking and starts humming softly in comfort. That’s when Jimin starts to really break down.
“And tonight, when I saw him so happy with that kid, it hit me that I’m holding him back from having his own happy family”, his voice quivers. Hearing those words out loud makes him realise how true they are. Jimin let’s out a heart-wrenching sob.
Taehyung’s hand tenses once again. He is shocked about Jimin’s confession: “But the guy loves you! Can’t you see? Everywhere you go, he has only eyes for you.”
Jimin doesn’t answer. Of course, Jungkook loves him, he knows that. The thing is that Jimin can’t give him the life he deserves. An amazing wedding, beautiful children and a calm and steady future. Those are all things Jungkook deserves so much. Jimin knew it the moment he saw Jungkook interacting with the little girl.
When Taehyung doesn’t get a reaction from his friend, he starts stroking Jimin’s head again. He softly whispers: « You have to talk to him… You can’t leave him in the dark like that. That boy is literally obsessed with you. Wherever you are he follows, even if it is just with his eyes. Don’t you know how much he talks about you when you aren’t there? It’s always Jimin this and Jimin that. I’m quite sure that he only wants a future with you.”
Jimin doesn’t reply but he feels a small nudge against his chest. Taehyung continues in a soft tone: “You know, in the beginning I wasn’t sure that Jungkook would be the one for you. I thought you were infatuated with him because you saw the idol in him. But now that I know him better, he is really a sweet boy that admires you like no one else. And he respects your wishes, and what also is very important, he accepts your flaws.” Taehyung stops for a while, but there is still no reply from Jimin, so Taehyung continues: “You cannot let him off the hook like that. You can’t be serious Jimin-ah. Everything is going so well between you two. Don’t let such a ridiculous insecurity get between the two of you.”
“But it’s not ridiculous! We can’t ever go public with our relationship. Society doesn’t accept homosexuals. We will never be able to marry! We won’t ever get to raise children. And obviously Jungkook wants children, he proofed that in the way he played with that sweet, little girl”, Jimin starts ranting, his voice increasing with the second. Now that he started speaking about what’s going on in his mind, he can’t stop himself.
Taehyung thinks for a second. Jimin is being ridiculous, he knows that. But how is he going to make it clear to his o so stubborn friend. When he speaks up, his voice is stern: “Jimin listen to me. Yes, our society might not be so accepting, but it’s changing with the years. People are getting more acceptable. And I'm sure that in the future, you will be able to marry. I'm so sure. It might be a while until, but you gotta keep hope. And as for children, that’s a bit different. But you need to talk to Jungkook. You can’t keep that boy in the dark. He loves you so much and not knowing what’s bothering you hurts him a lot.”
Jimin knows his friend is right and after some time he whispers: “I’ll talk to him in the morning.” Taehyung sighs: “OK, he’s probably sleeping by now, but you talk to him first thing in the morning.” They both crawl under the covers and they finally fall asleep, Jimin wrapped in Taehyungs arms.
~ * ~
The next morning, Jin and Hobi are already in the kitchen enjoying their first mug of coffee, when Namjoon enters the kitchen sighing. Jin and Hobi look at him questioning. Namjoon sighs with a defeated voice: “Jungkook cried the whole night. I don’t know if he even slept, each time that I turned, I could hear him sobbing.” He shakes his head and continues: “I asked him if something happened between him and Jimin, but he kept repeating that he didn’t know. In the beginning I thought that he didn’t want to talk about it, you know how difficult it is for him to talk about his feelings. But in the end, I believe he really doesn’t know. Jimin left him in the dark about something that was bothering him.”
Namjoon stands with his back towards the kitchen door, so he doesn’t see Jimin and Taehyung stumbling into the kitchen. Namjoon turns to Jimin and tells him in a rather commanding voice: “You really have to talk to him. I suppose you have your reasons to be upset with him, but he really doesn’t know what he has done wrong. If you don’t explain it to him, he will not be able to properly apologize and learn out of it.”
Jimin drops his head and mumbles: “He did nothing wrong. I just felt so desperate yesterday after the show.” He never meant to hurt Jungkook this bad. Hobi walks up to Jimin and rubs his arms: “Go talk to him, please. Namjoon says he cried the whole night.” Jimin hesitates a bit but then turns around and shuffles to Jungkook’s room.
He stirs in front of the door. Taehyung knows his best friend very well and he already suspected something like that, so he followed Jimin to Jungkook’s room, and when he sees Jimin hesitating in front of the door, he walks up to him and places his arms in a way that he cannot walk away. He whispers: “Talk to him. Now”.
Jimin nods and then finally softly knocks and opens the door without waiting for a reply. He stands in the door while he looks in the direction of Jungkook’s bed. The younger is turned with his back towards the door but when he hears someone whispering his name, he turns around and almost hopefully questions: “Jimin?”
The elder is horrified when he sees Jungkook’s bleary eyes, but then patters towards the bed and hides his face in Jungkook’s neck. Jungkook starts stroking his hair to comfort him. Jimin sobs: “I’m sorry, I’m sorry. I shouldn’t have let this escalate.” Jungkook continues stroking his boyfriend’s hair but does not reply immediately. But then he tries hesitantly: “Can you now tell me what I did to make you so upset.”
Jimin softly shakes his head and replies: “The worst is, that you didn’t do anything wrong.” The younger stops caressing through Jimin’s hair when he replies in disbelieve: “What?”
Jimin lifts his head and looks right into Jungkook’s red eyes. “I’m so terribly sorry, but I’ll try to explain, if you want to hear me out”, he pleads. Jungkook pushes against the elder to make him get up from the bed and one second Jimin thinks that he’s being pushed away. But the younger just moves his covers to make place for his boyfriend. Jimin eagerly accepts the invitation and crawls next to him. He wraps one leg over the younger’s waist and buries his face in Jungkook’s shoulder.
“What happened?” Jungkook encourages his lover to start explaining, and then Jimin starts rambling: “I saw how that kid looked up to you and I saw how your eyes sparkled while you played with her. I realized that you really like kids, and I got afraid that I’m holding you back. I’m already holding you back in your carrier because I prevent you from working as much as you did before, and now I’m holding you back from having a happy family. If I stay with you, you will never have kids of your own.”
The silence is heavy.
Jungkook does not know what to answer. He didn’t expect this to be the reason of Jimin’s distress. He thinks a moment about what to reply. He kisses the top of Jimin’s head and then whispers in his hair: “Do you really think I would be happier with some random girl just to have kids? Jimin, you should know by now how much I love you, how much I adore you. I’m not attracted to girls, I’m totally gay.” He softly chuckles making his whole body and Jimin’s shake. “I will never marry a woman just to have kids.” He softly passes a finger over the elder’s nose and lips. “I love you too much to let you go… You’re my first love and as far as I’m concerned, you’ll the only one I’ll ever love.” And he softly sings: “If it's not you, it's not anyone.”
Jimin looks up to him and places soft kisses on his jaw. He crawls a bit higher to place little kisses on his lips. He whispers: “Gosh, I love you so much. Sometimes I think that I won the lottery to be dating a guy like you. And sometimes I can’t even believe that a guy like you loves me back. “
Jungkook giggles and replies softly: “When I see how the fans worship you and how other idols react when they get to meet you, I realize that I am the one who won the lottery. The only thing I want to do is grab you by your waist and show everyone that your mine.”
They kiss each other languidly. After a few minutes, Jungkook ponders in a soft voice: “Who knows what the future brings? Things are changing. We still have many years to go with BTS and as long as we’re BTS, there is no time for kids. But within 10 years, it will perhaps be possible for people like us to adopt a child. Who knows?” Jimin pouts. That’s what Taehyung said to him yesterday. Now he feels stupid that he made such a big deal out of it and hurt the one he loves. But Jungkook’s answer does surprise him. Jimin looks up at him with expectant eyes: “Would you consider adopting if that would be possible?” Jungkook smiles at his lover. “Yes, who knows” He pauses for a minute and then continues with dreamy eyes: “You know, in the western world, you can sign a contract with a woman to bear your own child. Wouldn’t that be cute? A little Jimin in the house?” Jimin slaps his chest while Jungkook snorts. Jimin smiles his most beautiful smile while he whispers: “Or a little Jungkook-ie” and he buries his nose in Jungkook’s neck, pressing his body flush against Jungkook’s body.
Jungkook tilts Jimin’s chin to look him in the eyes. “Promise me one thing, Jimin. Please, talk to me next time whenever something bothers you. I never want to hurt like that again. We both unnecessary hurt.” Jimin softly nods and whispers: “I promise….”
They continue kissing while Jungkook passes his hand under Jimin’s t-shirt to caress the soft and warm skin of his waist. Jimin rides the younger’s t-shirt up to nibble at his naked chest.
They hear a soft knock on the door and then they hear Namjoon’s voice: “Guys, I have to come in for a minute. I just want to get some clothes and then I’m going to the studio for a couple of hours.” He waits a bit before he opens the door and enters the room. He purposefully does not look into the direction of Jungkook’s bed and walks straight to his closet. When he’s rumbling in his closet, Jungkook snorts: “Couldn’t you borrow something from one of the other members.” Namjoon takes that as his cue that everything is alright, and he turns towards Jungkook’s bed with a smirk on his face: “You know damn well that I don’t fit in the clothes of the other members. And if there is someone from who I can borrow something, that guy is sleeping in my room.” Jungkook and Jimin giggle at his reply and Namjoon looks at them with a fatherly smile. Before he closes the door, he repeats softly: “I’m gone for a few hours”.
When the door is closed, Jungkook turns to Jimin and chuckles: “Where were we?”
Before leaving, Namjoon pops his head through the kitchen door to give the other members a heads up: “Everything seems OK”. A sigh of relief is shared between the members. Taehyung stares at the contents of his mug and says quietly: “Jimin can become very insecure, sometimes. It is not always easy to see it coming, and you never know what triggers it. But when his thoughts spiral down, he falls deep. Through the years he learnt to fight against it and avoid the depths, but yesterday was not such a day.” He lets out a deep sigh and adds: “I’m sorry about that.”
The other members look flabbergasted: Taehyung has never revealed something so personal about his friend, until now. J-Hope wraps his arms around Taehyung’s shoulder and caresses his arm up and down with his other hand: “We don’t hold you responsible for your friend’s deeds. We know you are always at his side and that you always support him, but that does not make you responsible.” Taehyung leans his head against Hobi’s head and sighs: “Thanks hyung”.
Yoongi sighs: “We all have our flaws, and we all have our demons.” The kitchen falls silent, and after a while Namjoon says: “OK, I’m going, I’m already late. But I think it’s a good idea to stay away from the room.” Everybody grumbles and Namjoon waves to them: “See you in a couple of hours”.
~ * ~
With Namjoon gone, and the two love birds in Jungkook’s room, Jin and Suga bundle forces to prepare a fantastic Christmas meal for all the members, while Taehyung and Hobi start decorating the Christmas tree and the living room.
After a while Jungkook enters the living room while singing “If it's not you, it's not anyone.” Taehyung and Hobi look up at him. In first instance they don’t see Jimin but then they see Jimin behind him, hanging on the younger’s clothes while trying to keep up with the song. Hobi starts to squeal because it’s so adorable.
When they reach the Christmas tree they offer to help with the decoration, but Taehyung sniffles the air and pulls a disgusted face: “Please, go shower first, you both stink!”
“OK, OK! But can I put the star on top of the Christmas tree?” Jimin pouts, and when he pouts, he is irresistible. So both Taehyung and Hobi melt and promise him that he can put the star on top of the tree.
When the tree is completely decorated, nice smells are coming from the kitchen. They all get dressed up and place their gifts under the Christmas tree. Jimin wears his new royal blue woollen sweater that Jungkook bought him a few days ago.
When Namjoon comes back from the studio, he is not alone: he is accompanied by a man dressed up as Santa Claus. The members don’t recognize him immediately but when he starts wishing everybody a merry Christmas, they recognize Bang PD. He laughs at their surprised faces and he laughs: “I heard Seokjin and Yoongi are cooking a delicious diner, so I wanted to see that with my own eyes.” He looks around with a fond smile on his face, before he continues: “And of course I don’t come empty handed: I brought a few bottles of Champagne and the wine to accompany your delicious diner.”
When Taehyung enters the living room with glasses, Namjoon wants to open the first bottle of champagne. But Jin grabs the bottle out of his hands: “No way you are going to spill fine Champagne!”. He opens the bottle like a real professional and fills the glasses. Namjoon offers the first glass to Bang PD.
When everybody has his glass, they start wishing each other the best for the New Year. They are all hopeful for a successful New Year.
They also talk about yesterday’s show and gossip about the idols they met at the party. Bang PD turns to Jungkook and says: “You did really well with that kid, I have to give you that. You'll be a good dad one day” Jungkook feels Jimin shrink next to him crossing his arms on his chest as his defence mechanism, so he moves to stand behind him and tries to comfort him by caressing his waist.
Bang PD doesn’t stay for dinner and when he leaves, all members gather around the table that has been skilfully set up and decorated by Jin. He’s always in his element when he can cook a nice dinner for his friends and serve it on a well-dressed table.
Between courses they open the presents. Most of the presents are meant like jokes. When Jimin opens the present he receives from J-Hope, he turns bright red, and he does not want to show it to the others. Jungkook sneaks behind him and peaks into the package and when he sees the content, he starts laughing. The members can finally convince him to show the contents of the package and when they see that the present is an undie in jeans print, they all start laughing and shouting that he should try it on. But of course, Jungkook is not going to let that happen, and prevents Jimin from changing into it.
When they opened all presents, Namjoon takes the word: “I have a last present for Jimin and Jungkook”. Both men look surprised because they have no idea why they should receive another present. Namjoon smiles at their surprised faces and continues: “I sat down with J-Hope and with all members, and we all agree that you two should have your own room. I’ll move out of my shared room with Jungkook, and I’ll move in with J-Hope”.
They all start clapping and Jimin and Jungkook jump into each other’s arms. They are glad that they don’t have to sneak into each other’s room anymore. Yoongi cannot stop himself from grumbling: “This does not mean you have to jump each other on every occasion. The walls are not that thick.”
Finally, Namjoon turns to J-Hope. He opens his hand to reveal a small package. J-Hope snorts: “I hope you’re not proposing to me because that will be a big NO NO.” Namjoon laughs and places the small package in Hobi’s hands. All members hold their breath when he opens the package only to reveal a set of ear plugs. J-Hope’s mouth opens in a big: “Ooooh”. Namjoon explains: “Jungkook always complain that I snore”. J-hope laughs so hard that he throws himself on Taehyung’s lap.
When the laughter dies, and all soju is gone, they all head to bed. Tomorrow, most members will travel home to spend a few days with their families. Jimin and Jungkook will take the train to Busan together.

Chapter Text

It’s been two years since Taehyung and Jimin joined BTS. They did several concerts, brought out new music, and broke all the records. Tonight is the last night of their second world tour since being the new BTS.

The Love Yourself World Tour has been an adventure from the beginning. They had their ups and downs: a member falling sick, bad weather, or the equipment not working. But they made it through with nothing too catastrophically.

It's almost time to say goodbye, but Jungkook isn’t ready. He is laying curled up on the couch gripping at his phone. On his screen, a video of ARMY surprising them with singing ‘Forever Young’ is playing. The overwhelming feeling, he then got still affects him when he thinks of it. Nobody suspected anything, so when the lights dyed down and the song started playing, they all fell quiet. The fans harmonizing gave all of them goosebumps, some members even broke down in tears, Jungkook included. But when they were backstage the remaining members also shed a few tears.

Now Jungkook is laying there, trying to ignore the looming end. He doesn’t want to say goodbye. He can’t. But their management has told them to enjoy the last evening and make it perfect ‘cause it might be their last concert for a while.

Someone knocks on the door.

“Jungkook, are you in there?”

Namjoon’s voice is heard from the other side of the door. Jungkook rolls around on the couch now facing the cushions. He doesn’t feel like talking to anyone, he just wants to wallow in pity before going upstage. Namjoon knocks again: “Can I come in, Jungkook?” Jungkook groans loudly in response which the leader takes as a ‘yes’.

The door opens and closes again, and footsteps make their way towards the couch. Unbeknownst to Jungkook, Namjoon crouches down next to him. He pulls the younger’s shoulder to make him face him. Jungkook complies, swiftly wipes away a few tears before facing him. With a pout, he looks at Namjoon. Namjoon chuckles. His laugh is deep, warm, it calms Jungkook every time.

“What’s wrong?”, Namjoon asks nothing but compassion in his eyes. He places a hand on Jungkook’s shoulder to emphasize his good intention. “Nothing, hyung. I swear.”, Jungkook tries to sound as convincing as possible. But looking at Namjoon’s face, he didn’t succeed to convince the other. “The staff told me you locked yourself up in here and refused to answer them”, he goes now into leader mode making it impossible for Jungkook to deny there’s something wrong.

Jungkook sighs: “I don’t want this to end”. His voice barely a whisper. God, Jungkook feels so pathetic, sounding like a little kid.

“Ah Jungkook-ie, nobody wants it to end. No reason to be ashamed of that and locking yourself away from all the others. All the good things come to an end, but that just gives us the opportunity to create new good things, new memories. And don’t you look forward to a few weeks of vacation?”

And there is philosophical Namjoon, always knowing what to say to make others feel valid. It does make Jungkook feel more at ease, but there is still that nagging voice from their manager telling them it might be a long time before they stand on stage again. “But still. What if it’s our last concert”, He mutters.

Namjoon starts stroking his arm, with a big smile he looks at Jungkook. “Then you should really, and I mean really enjoy it.” With raised eyebrows and a smirk, Namjoon is looking at Jungkook as if they both know what he means. But the thing is, Jungkook doesn’t understand. He gets into a sitting position while stammering: “What? I don’t think I understand, hyung”

The man in front of him sighs, looking a bit embarrassed. He gets up and slaps Jungkook’s thigh. “Ask Jimin. He might be able to explain it better”, then he walks out of the room leaving Jungkook behind. But he doesn’t need to ask Jimin to explain anymore, because by the mere mention of his name Jungkook understands what Namjoon was implying.

Jungkook jumps up, his heart jolting from excitement. Namjoon’s right, instead of sulking he is going to really enjoy this concert. “Now, where is Jimin”, he states to no one in particular and marches out the room.

~ * ~

The evening begins with their spectacular intro. Everyone gives it their all; the vocals are on point, the choreographies were performed meticulously without any mistakes and if you ask ARMY, they all look like gods.

After they introduce themselves, they go over to the songs where they are a bit freer to interact with the audience and each other. And oh boy, Jungkook and Jimin take that last one very seriously.

They are inseparable, to all the members' frustration. It’s only their first song and Namjoon is already regretting what he said to Jungkook.

While Namjoon is rapping his verse from one of their new songs: ‘Save Me’, Jungkook literally skips over to Jimin and grabs his hand. When it’s the chorus he starts spinning Jimin around and around while he is singing. Jimin starts giggling and barely manages to sing his part without laughing.

‘Save Me’ goes over into ‘I’m Fine’. The others are relieved when they see Jungkook run over to Taehyung and interact with him. Taehyung pinches Jungkook’s cheek with one hand, the younger smiling brightly. Meanwhile, Jimin is interacting with the fans and flirting with the camera. The attention of the other two from the maknae-line is pulled to the big screen when the screaming of the audience intensifies. Jimin is looking all seductively at the camera, brushing his hair back.

For a second Jungkook is glued to the spot, not being able to look away from the big screen, from Jimin. That's until J-hope nudges him with a teasing look when he passes by. Jungkook looks at his hyung, sticks his tongue out, and turns back to the screen but Jimin is already gone.

Before ‘Magic Shop’ they’re able to catch their breaths by talking to the audience. Taehyung excitedly exclaims how full of passion the fans are tonight. ” I hope you’re all excited for what’s coming up. Which song are you excited to hear tonight?”, he says, pointing his mic to the glittering void. Screams come from the audience all answering with their favorite song, but it’s too mixed up that no one is able to understand anything.

“What about you Taehyung-ie?”, J-hope picks up trying to make it a little segment for the fans. So, they all talk about their favorite song from the set-list. The audience screams each time they answer with another member’s song. J-hope is about to ask Jungkook what his favorite song is, but Jimin interrupts him asking the same question.

He steps towards Jungkook, one hand on his hip: “Jungkook-ie, which song do you like?” As Jimin comes closer, Jungkook at first tries to put some distance between them by putting his arm between their bodies. But Namjoon’s voice starts telling him in his head: “you should really, and I mean really enjoy it.” So, he does just that, he lets Jimin closer. “For me...”, he answers Jimin. He looks the elder deep into the eyes, not letting his gaze go. He wants to make sure Jimin knows what he is going to say. Jimin puts a hand on his hip and starts smiling when he catches on to what the younger is insinuating. “As expected,...”, Jungkook teases. Jimin is not going to let him win this round.” As expected, it seems like it’s that song”, he says while inching closer.

But he gets startled when Jungkook slides his hand on Jimin’s waist. Jimin takes a step backward, surprised by the sudden action. Jungkook on the other hand is not thinking about letting Jimin getaway. He grabs the lapel of the elder’s jacket to hold him in place and takes a step forward. He begins to sing: “All of this is not a coincidence, … I know it just because…"

Jimin’s heart is beating fast. Jungkook is so close and blatantly flirting with him. Jimin becomes extremely flustered, but he doesn’t want to give this one to Jungkook. Especially because the younger is looking at him with heart eyes and a big smile on his face, encouraged by the screaming fans.

As Jungkook turns around to continue singing, Jimin taps him on the arm. He reaches his index finger out. Jungkook puts his index finger against the elder’s while singing: “You are me…" “I am you...”, Jimin answers. The audience combusts into literally screeching.

Then they both turn away, reality finally settling back in. While all this is happening, the other members are standing there, looking at them with mixed emotions: embarrassment, happiness, slight fear. It’s not that they deny their happiness, but they are afraid of possible homophobic reactions on social media. Nobody knows what to do, and Namjoon seems to not put a stop to it, so the others don’t dare to interfere.

When the lovers turn away from each other, every single member releases their breath out of relief. What they did will be difficult to play off as something between friends, but at least it didn’t go any further. But ‘Magic Shop’ starts playing, not giving them time to react to or think any further about it.

The lights turn off and all members rush backstage, J-hope and Jungkook ahead of the rest as their two solos are first. The VCR is playing loudly for the audience, but in no way long enough to get dressed calmly. How they always manage to get ready is a mystery but when it’s time, J-hope hypes up the audience with ‘Just Dance’ and Jungkook brings ‘Euphoria’, making hitting the high notes look easy. Jimin watches his boyfriend from behind the scenes.

During ‘Run’, Jimin decides it’s his turn to initiate the interaction with the maknae. When his and Jungkook’s synchronizing high notes are nearing, Jimin decides to act a little bold. He makes his way over to Jungkook, who is standing still trying to guess what the elder is up to. Their voices harmonize beautifully, both hitting the high notes. It’s then that Jimin decides to get closer and push back Jungkook’s hair. The latter takes a step back, smiling at the affection but Jimin does not give up. He takes another step to get closer and to press their bodies are together, hips and crotch touching. For a second Jimin forgets everything except feeling Jungkook’s body against him, but he is quickly brought back to the show by the immense screaming. He must admit that he acted on impulse, so when he runs away after all of that he tries to compose himself by sticking out his tongue to the screaming crowd. He doesn’t notice the shocked faces of the other members, but Jungkook does.

The rest of the evening goes on perfectly. Jimin brings ‘Serendipity’ so beautifully, his dancing so elegant, and Namjoon sweeps the fans away with ‘Trivia: Love’, executing his special effects correctly. The solos are followed up by ‘DNA’ and another talking session. After that, it’s time for the medley. The energy is flowing through the audience and screams erupt every time the fans are being attacked by hip thrusts, impressive dance moves, and flirting with the camera. They don’t get time to breathe. Then, Taehyung brings his solo: ‘Singularity’, capturing the audience with his deep and charismatic voice. That goes over into ‘Fake Love’ and then it’s time for the last solos of the night.

~ * ~

All the members are backstage, changing. Jimin is busy closing his shirt when two arms wrap around his waist from behind. A kiss is placed in the crook of his neck and then on his ear. Jimin leans against the broad chest of his boyfriend. “You are so hot when you dance like that”, Jungkook’s voice is low when he whispers in the elder’s ear. Jimin only hums, feeling goosebumps appearing because of his boyfriend’s tone. Jimin closes his eyes and together they start to softly sway from left to right.

Jungkook covers Jimin’s neck with small kisses and Jimin sighs in content. The atmosphere shifts when Jimin turns around to grab Jungkook’s face and starts kissing him passionately. Jungkook answers to the elder's demand, slipping his tongue into his mouth and placing his hands on Jimin’s ass. Softly he starts kneading his ass, making Jimin moan into the kiss.

A cough interrupts their intimate moment. When Jimin and Jungkook turn their heads, not releasing each other, they are face to face with Namjoon awkwardly standing in the doorframe. Jimin is first to let go and quickly fixes his shirt. “Namjoon-hyung, can you please stop being a cock-blocker", Jungkook groins looking annoyed at the leader.

But Namjoon is not taking any of it. He points at the couch and when the two are seated he grabs himself a chair. With crossed arms and a stern look, he sits down in front of Jimin and Jungkook. Both have to swallow hard looking at their leader. Namjoon sitting there, his big arms crossed and his intimidating look is very, very hot. Jimin cannot stop himself from smiling. They catch each other’s eyes and then quickly look down. Silence fills the room, only the ticking of Jungkook’s foot on the floor. Jimin places a hand on his knee and Jungkook immediately relaxes.

Namjoon sighs, his stern face melting into a warm smile and he drops his arms. “Look, I know I said you should really enjoy it and that I was implying especially with each other, but please tone it down a little bit. The managers are not so happy. They agreed to give you some more freedom, but they find that you went over the top with it”, when Namjoon is done he looks at them with an empathetic smile. But Jungkook and Jimin don’t see it, too busy looking at the ground.

It's quiet, Namjoon looks at Jungkook and Jimin with sadness. He hates to be the bringer of such news, but as the leader, those are his responsibilities. Besides, he prefers to inform the lovers himself, instead of someone of the staff, as they might be less understanding. Namjoon watches how Jimin leans against Jungkook and puts his head on the younger’s shoulder. The leader sighs when he sees the defeat in Jimin’s eyes. Namjoon straightens his back and claps in their hands: “You know what? Forget everything I said or the staff for that matter. Enjoy the evening. Everyone is doing it. Why should you limit your affection for each other, while Taehyung and Jin were almost dancing crotch to crotch a few minutes ago? -Which they seemed to enjoy a bit too much, for it to being just goofing around.” With that, he gets up and walks towards the door. But before he leaves, he turns around one more time. “But please, do not kiss each other on stage”, he practically begs.

Jungkook and Jimin watch with mouths agape as their leader leaves. What did just happen? First, Namjoon was informing them that they should tone their behavior down and now he is encouraging it (to a certain extend). And when did Taehyung and Jin dance crotch to crotch?

“Well, … I think we should ready ourselves. I think I hear the beginning of ‘Epiphany’”, with that Jungkook stands up. He smiles down on Jimin and extends his hand. The elder takes it and when he stands, he hugs the younger, placing his cheek briefly on the younger’s shoulder. Together they go to the platform to be raised on stage.

~ * ~

Both Jin and Yoongi have brought their solo songs. Yoongi surprised everyone with choreography for ‘Seasaw’. The screams were probably audible from a great distance of the stadium and Jin bewitched the fans with ‘Epiphany’, his angelic voice hitting all the high notes. Now the rest of the vocal line joins Jin to bring ‘The truth untold’.

It's a beautiful and sad song, and all of them put all their emotions into singing it. As they are lowering to the stage and the end is nearing, Jungkook feels a sudden urge to look at Jimin. Throughout the whole song, he looked at the audience to focus, but now he needs to see Jimin. The man who thought him that being what he is, being himself, is okay and that the opinions of others don’t matter. The man with who he spends late evenings watching silly shows, cuddling, and making love. Because that is what Jungkook feels for Jimin. Love. It’s been three years now, and he still feels the same strong attraction towards the elder. When he acts all cute, when he does silly dance moves or makes weird faces, Jungkook can’t help but look at Jimin with a big smile and eyes full of adoration.

He needs to sing those last lines to him, so that everyone who wants to understand, understands that he wants Jimin, that he loves Jimin. But when he turns around, he is met with the elder already looking at him, with a soft look on his face. Just that sight already takes Jungkook’s breath and makes him want to cry. It makes him also want to laugh; they really are the same person. Both had the same idea: serenade the last line to the other.

“And I still want you.”

They harmonize the last words together. Their voices mix so beautifully together, nobody can deny that. Especially because the whole stadium bursts out applauding and cheering. The lights die down but Jimin and Jungkook don’t take their eyes off each other. Only when it’s dark, Jimin dares to make a move. He darts forward and crashes into Jungkook’s awaiting arms, continually whispering – maybe a bit louder than what was safe - ‘I love you, I love you, I love you’. Jungkook hugs the smaller men tightly, burying his nose in the crook of his neck to inhales his scent; Peaches and sweat. And Jungkook allows himself to let out one tiny sob when the love he feels for Jimin suddenly overwhelms him.

Jin who had been watching them was expecting something like this to happen. So, when the lovers flew into each other’s arms and did not attempt to move any time soon. Jin rushes over and grabs them both by the clothes to hastily drag them backstage under some protesting. He doesn’t like breaking up sweet moments between Jimin and Jungkook, but this time he had no other choice because the first notes of ‘Tear’ are already booming out the speakers.

“Can’t you wait until you’re off the stage to do all that cheesy shit? Now go change, you amateurs!”, Jin scolds the younger two. He pushes past them and rushes towards the changing room. He is not angry, just a bit annoyed and slightly panicked that once again Jimin and Jungkook dared to do something so risky.

Taehyung pats both on the back with a big smile. He throws his arms around their shoulders: “You two are too cute. But I swear to God, stop putting us in those situations because I will slit both your throats.” In the last sentence, Taehyung says in a more serious and darker tone. He continues to slap their buts, throws them another big smile, and then skips away.

Jimin and Jungkook don’t get time to process everything, because the staff is rushing them towards the changing room.

~ * ~

The evening is getting to an end. For the encore stage, the big bouncy castle is blown up for them to play on. Of course, funny scenarios unfold. Yoongi runs and throws himself on the part with many cylinders. He bounces off it and falls into a notch and gets stuck. This leaves him wriggling violently to escape before it’s his turn to rap. All the members also take turns to climb the stairs and then slide from the slide.

When Jungkook sees Jimin struggling to get up the stairs, he takes the opportunity to follow him. With two hands he places his hands on Jimin’s ass to push him upwards. Jimin looks back and sees that it’s Jungkook grabbing his ass. Both boys giggle as they finally get on top. Jimin takes Jungkook’s hand and together they slide down with the biggest smiles.

After them, Namjoon is the next to come down. But as expected, the leader slides down with such a speed that he falls flat on his ass on stage. While rubbing his ass he raps his part, looking extremely funny. All the members have a good laugh seeing their leader like this.

Their encore stage ends and BTS gathers in a line for the final moment. Every member gives a little speech, outing their thankfulness to the fans and that they feel sad it’s the final concert. It starts to down on all of them that it’s almost done. Jungkook feels the adrenaline and happiness from before subsiding. He looks at the lights in front of them when he starts talking. Jungkook doesn’t want to cry. He wants to be strong and stay positive for ARMY, but a single tear still manages to escape. Only when the attention is on Namjoon he dares to wipe it away, trying to be very subtle.

It’s Jimin’s turn to speak. He starts off a bit unsure. From the moment he saw how much Jungkook was struggling, his attention is on the younger. Jimin wants to go over there and take Jungkook in his arms so bad, but he can’t right now. He takes a deep breath: “It’s our last show. This tour was amazing. We went to so many beautiful places and saw so many beautiful ARMY. I'm so grateful for your love.” He smiles, feeling the tears forming in his own eyes. He looks first at the ocean of lights, then his members, and as of last at Jungkook.

“Jungkook-ie, did you have fun?”, he asks when he notices the maknae is completely facing him and staring at him.

“Yes, but it was all because of you hyung”, he answers, sniffing his nose. His voice is shaking.

Jungkook and Jimin do not break eye contact, the stadium fills with loud cheers. When Jungkook and Jimin do not move, Namjoon decides to wrap the evening up. He steps to the front, placing himself between the two boys which forces them back into reality.

‘Mikrokosmos’ starts playing and the members all split up to interact with the audience the last time. Jimin waves at the audience on the beat of the song while keeping a close eye on his boyfriend. Jungkook is aimlessly walking around on stage, singing his heart out. His teary doe eyes sparkle in the waving lights from army bombs.

Jimin is busy telling a fan not to cry when someone appears beside him. He looks and there he is. Jungkook looks at him with those big, now sad, eyes. It’s obvious Jungkook wants to say or do something but changes his mind and walks away. Jimin walks after him and wraps his arms around the taller one. While back hugging they walk further. Jimin places his chin on Jungkook’s shoulder trying to comfort him as much as possible and Jungkook starts crying. His heart beats fast feeling his boyfriend’s calming presence.

Jungkook can’t take it anymore. If they stay any longer like this, Jungkook is sure he will completely break down. So, he loosens himself from the embrace and walks away again. Something in his mind though is telling him to look back one more time. He does, and shit this was a bad idea. Because when he looks at his boyfriend standing there wearing that big sweater and too-big glasses, with the widest smile does it for him.

He is already crying but turning around and looking at Jimin makes him cry even more. And Jimin is quick to act. He walks over to Jungkook with a heart-warming smile and grabs his face in his small hands. Jungkook is now violently sobbing. Jimin wipes away the tears with the sleeves of his sweater. The crowd screams in awe over so much cuteness.

When Jungkook’s tears stop falling, he whispers a soft “Thank you” and turns away to walk to another part of the stage. But Jimin does not want to let go, and he jumps on Jungkook’s back, wrapping his arms around the younger’s shoulders and wrapping his legs around his waist. The crowd screams even louder. Jungkook continues singing while carrying his boyfriend around the stage.

The song comes to an end, and they gather on the platform that will take them down. Fireworks are distracting the fans while they disappear. Jimin and Taehyung stay for a little bit longer, jumping up to wave at the audience. Only when the staff asks them to stop, they leave the platform.

Jimin’s first thought is to find Jungkook. He needs to have the younger in his arms right now, so he can comfort him. “Is Jungkook already in the dressing room?”, he asks one of the staff members. He hurriedly nods and then he is gone to clean everything up. Jimin rushes to the dressing room. He throws the door open. A half-naked Namjoon screams and flings his phone against the wall. Jimin cringes seeing the expensive item drop on the floor. Jimin apologizes, but Namjoon waves it off. “Have you seen Jungkook”, he asks. Namjoon scratches his head: “Now that you ask. He was following us, but I didn’t see him enter.”

“Who didn’t enter?” Jimin twirls around and sees J-hope already dressed to go home. “Jungkook. Have you seen Jungkook?”, Jimin is starting to get impatient. Why is it so difficult to find out Jungkook’s whereabouts? Even though he only asked three people, it feels like he has been searching for hours. J-hope's face lights up: “Oh, Jungkook-ie is outside enjoying the fireworks.”

Jimin claps his hands together to thank him and runs off.

“Yes, Jimin! Go get him!”, J-hope yells after him. He enters the room and sees Namjoon, still with no shirt, looking at him with annoyance. “What?”, he asks dumbfounded. Namjoon sighs: “Why do you always have to be so dramatic. J-hope puts a hand on his chest and gasps dramatically. “Me dramatic? Aishh, that really hurts Namjoon-ah", he says while pinking away a non-existent tear. The leader only shakes his head and starts looking for his shirt.

~ * ~

Jungkook is looking up. The sky is colored with different colors. First, it’s an explosion of red, followed by a bigger green one and it ends in several tiny yellow ones. It calms Jungkook down in some kind of way. He takes a deep breath and feels the cold air filling his lungs. His eyes are puffy from the crying and his nose is red. It was an amazing night, an amazing year. Jungkook is thankful for everything, especially for the person who is, unbeknownst to him, sneaking closer and closer.

Two tiny hands barely cover Jungkook’s eyes. He has to laugh as the welcoming voice says: “Guess who?” “I don’t know. Can the charming person give me a hint?”, Jungkook jokes. The person behind him giggles and oh does it sound like music to his ears. “You think of me every day”, the person says. Jungkook laughs: “Wow Namjoon-hyung, I didn’t know you had such tiny hands.” Said hands disappear as quickly as they came and instead, they slap Jungkook’s back. Jungkook turns around.

“You’re so mean!”, Jimin whines. He is still in their tour merch and has his arms crossed, his lips form a big pout. A sight for sore eyes, Jungkook thinks. He takes Jimin in his arms and puts his forehead against the elder. He breathes in deeply, soaking up the soothing energy Jimin’s presence gives off. Jimin wraps his arms around Jungkook’s neck and softly hums in content. Because of the fireworks exploding it’s not really a quiet moment, but they enjoy it nonetheless.

“Selca?” Jimin asks. He takes a picture of both of them with the firework exploding in the sky behind them.

They sway from side to side. Staff is rushing around them, but they make sure to not bother the couple. Two female workers stop for a second to look at the love birds in a swoon. A male employee sees this and shoos the women away.

Not caring for the people around them, Jungkook connects their lips. His heart explodes like the fireworks to finally kiss Jimin. The elder deepens the kiss by slipping his tongue in Jungkook’s mouth. After a few long seconds, they break apart, smiling at each other.

“I love you”, Jungkook proclaims. Jimin bites his lip, looking in awe at the younger. Jungkook’s confession warming his heart. He giggles: “I love you too.” They connect their lips together.

This evening has been perfect and it will end perfectly when they are back at the dorms and Jungkook is laying in Jimin’s arms.

“Uhm, excuse me. Jimin-ssi, Jungkook-ssi, I'm sorry to bother but your car is ready”, a male voice says. Jimin and Jungkook quickly break away from each other. With embarrassment, they look manager Sejin in the eyes. But their manager is just laughing at them. He waves at them to follow him. When the younger turns around, Jimin jumps on his back to make his boyfriend piggyback him to the car. He brushes his nose under Jungkook’s jawline and closes his eyes while he inhales his boyfriend’s scent.

At the car, Jungkook stops to let Jimin enter first. Jimin shuffles to the middle and Jungkook joins beside him. When he is seated, they immediately intertwine their fingers. Jungkook leans his head on Jimin’s shoulder and closes his eyes. Jimin rubs his thumb over his boyfriend’s hand, making him sigh in content. The car starts and off they go.

Jimin places the selca on social media with the message: “We had fun tonight. We hope you had fun too. See you soon, ARMY!”

The thought of what will be next for them is a worry for tomorrow. As for now, sleep is calling them and they are desperate to answer to it.